WO2021132452A1 - Ue and communication control method - Google Patents
Ue and communication control method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021132452A1 WO2021132452A1 PCT/JP2020/048406 JP2020048406W WO2021132452A1 WO 2021132452 A1 WO2021132452 A1 WO 2021132452A1 JP 2020048406 W JP2020048406 W JP 2020048406W WO 2021132452 A1 WO2021132452 A1 WO 2021132452A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- pdu session
- congestion management
- information
- network
- identification information
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 639
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 69
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 285
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 919
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 179
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 158
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 135
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 116
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 80
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 24
- 230000007420 reactivation Effects 0.000 description 22
- 238000012508 change request Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 15
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000013475 authorization Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000013256 coordination polymer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009849 deactivation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 3
- VEMKTZHHVJILDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N resmethrin Chemical compound CC1(C)C(C=C(C)C)C1C(=O)OCC1=COC(CC=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 VEMKTZHHVJILDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013523 data management Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 2
- 102100038254 Cyclin-F Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101000884183 Homo sapiens Cyclin-F Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004378 air conditioning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009795 derivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012384 transportation and delivery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/02—Access restriction performed under specific conditions
- H04W48/06—Access restriction performed under specific conditions based on traffic conditions
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/14—Reselecting a network or an air interface
- H04W36/142—Reselecting a network or an air interface over the same radio air interface technology
Definitions
- 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is engaged in standardization activities for mobile communication systems in recent years, is studying SAE (System Architecture Evolution), which is the system architecture of LTE (Long Term Evolution).
- SAE System Architecture Evolution
- 3GPP is specifying EPS (Evolved Packet System) as a communication system that realizes all IP (Internet Protocol).
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- the core network that makes up EPS is called EPC (Evolved Packet Core).
- 5G Next-generation mobile communication systems
- 5G System 5th Generation mobile communication systems
- 5G System is being specified (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2).
- 5GS extracts technical issues for connecting a wide variety of terminals to cellular networks and specifies solutions.
- optimization and diversification of communication procedures to support continuous mobile communication services according to terminals that support a wide variety of access networks, and the system architecture that matches the optimization and diversification of communication procedures. Optimization is also mentioned as a requirement.
- Non-Patent Document 1 In addition to the mechanism that provides the function equivalent to congestion management, control signal management based on reasons other than congestion management is being studied (Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document). 3).
- the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize congestion management in a state where network slice information associated with a PDU session may be updated. It is to provide a mechanism and a communication control method.
- the UE User Equipment; terminal device
- the UE sends a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the control device, and the PDU session ID and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information).
- PDU Protocol Data Unit
- S-NSSAI Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information
- the backoff timer is provided with a control unit for starting the backoff timer.
- the backoff is performed.
- the timer is characterized in that it is associated with no S-NSSAI and the first S-NSSAI and no DNN.
- the UE (User Equipment; terminal device) communication control method of the present invention includes a step of transmitting a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the control device, a PDU session ID, and a first S-NSSAI (Single).
- PDU Protocol Data Unit
- DNN Data Network Name
- the back-off timer is associated with the no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and the DNN, and the UE provides the no S-NSSAI and the no DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message.
- the back-off timer is characterized in that it is associated with no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and no DNN.
- the terminal device constituting the 5GS and the device in the core network can perform the network slice and the network slice information even in a state where the network slice information associated with the PDU session may be updated. / Or, it is characterized in that management processing such as congestion management is performed for each DNN.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an access network among the mobile communication systems of FIG.
- FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of the core network_A90 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG.
- FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of the core network_B190 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG. As shown in FIG.
- the mobile communication system 1 includes a terminal device (also referred to as a user device or mobile terminal device) UE (User Equipment) _A10, an access network (AN; Access Network) _A, an access network_B, and a core network ( It is composed of CN; Core Network) _A90, Core Network_B190, Packet Data Network (PDN) _A6, and Data Network (DN) _A5.
- UE User Equipment
- UE User Equipment
- AN Access Network
- AN Access Network
- AN Access Network
- AN Access Network
- DN Data Network
- the combination of access network_A and core network_A90 may be called EPS (Evolved Packet System; 4G mobile communication system), and the combination of access network_B, core network_B190 and UE_A10 is 5GS (5G System).
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- 4G mobile communication system 4G mobile communication system
- 5GS 5G System
- core network_A90, core network B, or a combination thereof may also be referred to as a core network
- access network_A, access network_B, or a combination thereof may also be referred to as an access network or a wireless access network.
- DN_A5, PDN_A6 or a combination thereof may also be referred to as DN.
- UE_A10 can connect to network services via 3GPP access (also referred to as 3GPP access or 3GPP access network) and / or non-3GPP access (also referred to as non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network). It may be a device.
- UE_A10 may be provided with UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or eUICC (Embedded UICC).
- UE_A10 may be a terminal device capable of wireless connection, or may be a ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile Station), CIoT (Cellular Internet of Things) terminal (CIoT UE), or the like.
- UE_A10 can be connected to the access network and / or the core network. UE_A10 can also connect to DN_A and / or PDN_A via the access network and / or core network. UE_A10 sends and receives (communicate) user data with DN_A and / or PDN_A using a PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session and / or PDN (Packet Data Network) connection (also referred to as PDN connection). ). Furthermore, the communication of user data is not limited to IP (Internet Protocol) communication (IPv4 or IPv6), for example, EPS may be non-IP communication, and 5GS may be Ethernet (registered trademark) communication or Unstructured communication. There may be.
- IP Internet Protocol
- IPv4 or IPv6 IP (Internet Protocol) communication
- EPS may be non-IP communication
- 5GS may be Ethernet (registered trademark) communication or Unstructured communication. There may be.
- IP communication is data communication using IP, and is data communication realized by sending and receiving IP packets to which an IP header is added.
- the payload portion constituting the IP packet may include user data sent and received by UE_A10.
- non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and is data communication that is realized by sending and receiving data to which an IP header is not added.
- non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP address is not assigned, or UE_A10 may be provided with another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header.
- User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
- a PDU session is a connectivity established between UE_A10 and DN_A5 to provide a PDU connection service. More specifically, the PDU session may be the connectivity established between UE_A10 and the external gateway.
- the external gateway may be UPF, PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway), or the like.
- the PDU session may be a communication path established for transmitting / receiving user data between UE_A10 and the core network and / or DN, or may be a communication path for transmitting / receiving PDU.
- the PDU session may be a session established between UE_A10 and the core network and / or DN, and is a logical configuration consisting of one or more bearers and other transfer paths between each device in the mobile communication system 1.
- the PDU session may be a connection established by UE_A10 between the core network_B190 and / or an external gateway, or may be a connection established between UE_A10 and UPF.
- the PDU session may also be connectivity and / or connection between UE_A10 and UPF_A235 via NR node_A122.
- the PDU session may be identified by a PDU session ID and / or an EPS bearer ID.
- UE_A10 can send and receive user data using a device such as an application server located in DN_A5 and a PDU session.
- the PDU session can transfer user data transmitted and received between the device such as the application server arranged in UE_A10 and DN_A5.
- each device UE_A10, device in the access network, and / or device in the core network, and / or device in the data network
- These identification information includes APN (Access Point Name), TFT (Traffic Flow Template), session type, application identification information, DN_A5 identification information, NSI (Network Slice Instance) identification information, and DCN (Dedicated Core Network).
- At least one of the identification information and the access network identification information may be included, and other information may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents. Further, the NSI identification information is information that identifies NSI, and may be NSI ID or Slice Instance ID below.
- UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
- E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
- NG-RAN 5G-
- UTRAN_A20 and / or E-UTRAN_A80 and / or NG-RAN_A120 are referred to as 3GPP access or 3GPP access network
- wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN are referred to as non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network.
- Each radio access network includes a device (for example, a base station device or an access point) to which the UE_A10 actually connects.
- E-UTRAN_A80 is an LTE access network, and is configured to include one or more eNB_A45.
- eNB_A45 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by E-UTRA (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access).
- E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
- each eNB may be connected to each other.
- the NG-RAN_A120 is a 5G access network, which may be the (R) AN shown in FIG. 4, and includes one or more NR nodes (New Radio Access Technology node) _A122 and / or ng-eNB. It is composed.
- NR node_A122 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by 5G radio access (5G Radio Access), and is also referred to as gNB.
- the ng-eNB may be an eNB (E-UTRA) that constitutes a 5G access network, may be connected to the core network_B190 via NR node_A, or may be directly connected to the core network_B190. You may be.
- E-UTRA eNB
- each NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB may be connected to each other.
- NG-RAN_A120 may be an access network composed of E-UTRA and / or 5G Radio Access.
- NG-RAN_A120 may contain eNB_A45, NR node_A122, or both.
- eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 may be similar devices. Therefore, NR node_A122 can be replaced with eNB_A45.
- UTRAN_A20 is an access network for 3G mobile communication systems, and is composed of RNC (Radio Network Controller) _A24 and NB (Node B) _A22.
- NB_A22 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by UTRA (Universal Terrestrial Radio Access), and UTRAN_A20 may be configured to include one or more radio base stations.
- RNC_A24 is a control unit that connects the core network_A90 and NB_A22, and UTRAN_A20 may be configured to include one or more RNCs.
- RNC_A24 may be connected to one or more NB_A22s.
- UE_A10 is connected to each radio access network means that it is connected to a base station device, an access point, or the like included in each radio access network, and data, signals, etc. to be transmitted and received. It also means that it goes through a base station device or an access point.
- the control message sent / received between UE_A10 and the core network_B190 may be the same control message regardless of the type of access network. Therefore, sending and receiving messages between UE_A10 and core network_B190 via NR node_A122 may be the same as sending and receiving messages between UE_A10 and core network_B190 via eNB_A45.
- the access network is a wireless network connected to UE_A10 and / or the core network.
- the access network may be a 3GPP access network or a non-3GPP access network.
- the 3GPP access network may be UTRAN_A20, E-UTRAN_A80, NG-RAN (Radio Access Network) _A120, and the non-3GPP access network may be a wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN).
- UE_A10 may be connected to the access network in order to connect to the core network, or may be connected to the core network via the access network.
- DN_A5 and PDN_A6 are data networks (Data Networks) that provide communication services to UE_A10, and may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, DN_A5 may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to DN_A5 may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from DN_A5 may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5. Further, although DN_A5 is outside the core network in FIG. 1, it may be inside the core network.
- Data Networks Data Networks
- the core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190 may be configured as devices in one or more core networks.
- the device in the core network may be a device that executes a part or all of the processing or function of each device included in the core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190.
- the device in the core network may be referred to as a core network device.
- the core network is an IP mobile communication network operated by a mobile network operator (MNO; Mobile Network Operator) connected to an access network and / or DN.
- the core network may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages the mobile communication system 1, or a virtual mobile communication operator such as MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) or MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler) or virtual. It may be a core network for mobile communication service providers.
- the core network_A90 may be an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) that constitutes an EPS (Evolved Packet System), and the core network_B190 may be a 5GC (5G Core Network) that constitutes a 5GS.
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- 5G Core Network 5GC
- the core network_B190 may be the core network of the system that provides the 5G communication service.
- the EPC may be the core network_A90 and the 5GC may be the core network_B190.
- the core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190 is not limited to this, and may be a network for providing a mobile communication service.
- the core network_A90 includes HSS (Home Subscriber Server) _A50, AAA (Authentication Authorization Accounting), PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), PGW_A30, ePDG, SGW_A35, MME (Mobility Management Entity) _A40, SGSN (Serving GPRS Support). Node), SCEF, at least one may be included. Then, these may be configured as NF (Network Function). NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network.
- the core network_A90 can be connected to a plurality of radio access networks (UTRAN_A20, E-UTRAN_A80).
- Figure 3 shows only HSS (HSS_A50), PGW (PGW_A30), SGW (SGW_A35) and MME (MME_A40), but other devices and / or NFs. Does not mean that is not included.
- UE_A10 is also referred to as UE
- HSS_A50 is referred to as HSS
- PGW_A30 is referred to as PGW
- SGW_A35 is referred to as SGW
- MME_A40 is referred to as MME
- DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 is also referred to as DN or PDN.
- PGW_A30 is a relay device that is connected to DN, SGW_A35, ePDG, WLAN ANa70, PCRF, and AAA, and transfers user data as a gateway between DN (DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6) and core network_A90.
- the PGW_A30 may be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication. Further, the PGW_A30 may have a function of transferring IP communication, and may have a function of converting between non-IP communication and IP communication.
- a plurality of such gateways may be arranged in the core network_A90. Further, the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_A90 and a single DN.
- the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
- the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving a control message, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
- PGW_A30 may be connected to SGW and DN and UPF (User plane function) and / or SMF (Session Management Function), or may be connected to UE_A10 via U-Plane.
- PGW_A30 may be configured with UPF_A235 and / or SMF_A230.
- SGW_A35 is connected to PGW_A30, MME_A40, E-UTRAN_A80, SGSN and UTRAN_A20, and is a relay that transfers user data as a gateway between core network_A90 and 3GPP access networks (UTRAN_A20, GERAN, E-UTRAN_A80). It is a device.
- MME_A40 is a control device that is connected to SGW_A35, an access network, HSS_A50, and SCEF, and performs location information management including mobility management of UE_A10 and access control via the access network. Further, the MME_A40 may include a function as a session management device that manages the sessions established by the UE_A10. Further, a plurality of such control devices may be arranged in the core network_A90, and for example, a position management device different from the MME_A40 may be configured. A location management device different from the MME_A40 may be connected to the SGW_A35, the access network, the SCEF, and the HSS_A50, similar to the MME_A40. Furthermore, MME_A40 may be connected to AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function).
- AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
- the MMEs may be connected to each other.
- the context of UE_A10 may be sent and received between MMEs.
- the MME_A40 is a management device that transmits and receives control information related to mobility management and session management to and from the UE_A10, in other words, it may be a control plane (Control Plane; C-Plane; CP) control device.
- MME_A40 may be one or more core networks or a management device composed of DCN or NSI, or one or more core networks or. It may be a management device connected to a DCN or NSI.
- a plurality of DCNs or NSIs may be operated by a single telecommunications carrier or may be operated by different telecommunications carriers.
- MME_A40 may be a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway between the core network_A90 and the access network.
- the user data transmitted / received using MME_A40 as a gateway may be small data.
- MME_A40 may be an NF that plays a role of mobility management such as UE_A10, or an NF that manages one or more NSIs. Further, MME_A40 may be an NF that plays one or more of these roles.
- the NF may be one or more devices arranged in the core network_A90, and may also be a CP function for control information and / or a control message (hereinafter, CPF (Control Plane Function) or Control Plane Network Function). It may be a shared CP function shared between multiple network slices.
- NF is a processing function configured in the network. That is, the NF may be a functional device such as MME, SGW, PGW, CPF, AMF, SMF, UPF, or functional or capability information such as MM (Mobility Management) or SM (Session Management). Further, the NF may be a functional device for realizing a single function, or may be a functional device for realizing a plurality of functions. For example, an NF for realizing the MM function and an NF for realizing the SM function may exist separately, or there is an NF for realizing both the MM function and the SM function. You may.
- HSS_A50 is a management node that is connected to MME_A40, AAA, and SCEF and manages subscriber information.
- the subscriber information of HSS_A50 is referred to when the access control of MME_A40 is performed, for example.
- the HSS_A50 may be connected to a position management device different from that of the MME_A40.
- HSS_A50 may be connected to CPF_A140.
- HSS_A50 and UDM (Unified Data Management) _A245 may be configured as different devices and / or NFs, or may be configured as the same device and / or NFs.
- AAA is connected to PGW30, HSS_A50, PCRF and WLAN ANa70, and controls access to UE_A10 connected via WLAN ANa70.
- PCRF is connected to PGW_A30, WLAN ANa75, AAA, DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6, and performs QoS management for data delivery. For example, it manages the QoS of the communication path between UE_A10 and DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6. Further, the PCRF may be a device that creates and / or manages PCC (Policy and Charging Control) rules and / or routing rules that each device uses when transmitting and receiving user data.
- PCC Policy and Charging Control
- the PCRF may also be a PCF that creates and / or manages policies. More specifically, the PCRF may be connected to UPF_A235.
- the ePDG is connected to PGW30 and WLAN ANb75, and delivers user data as a gateway between core network _A90 and WLAN ANb75.
- SGSN is connected to UTRAN_A20, GERAN and SGW_A35, and is a control device for position management between 3G / 2G access network (UTRAN / GERAN) and LTE (4G) access network (E-UTRAN). Is. Furthermore, the SGSN has a PGW and SGW selection function, a UE_A10 time zone management function, and an MME_A40 selection function at the time of handover to E-UTRAN.
- SCEF is a relay device that is connected to DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6, MME_A40 and HSS_A50, and transfers user data as a gateway connecting DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 and core network_A90.
- SCEF may be a gateway for non-IP communication.
- SCEF may have the ability to convert between non-IP communication and IP communication.
- a plurality of such gateways may be arranged in the core network_A90.
- a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_A90 and a single DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 and / or DN may be arranged.
- the SCEF may be configured outside the core network or inside the core network.
- the core network_B190 includes AUFF (Authentication Server Function), AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function) _A240, UDSF (Unstructured Data Storage Function), NEF (Network Exposure Function), NRF (Network Repository Function), PCF (Policy Control). Function), SMF (Session Management Function) _A230, UDM (Unified Data Management), UPF (User Plane Function) _A235, AF (Application Function), N3IWF (Non-3GPP InterWorking Function) may be included. .. Then, these may be configured as NF (Network Function). NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network.
- Figure 4 shows only AMF (AMF_A240), SMF (SMF_A230), and UPF (UPF_A235), but others (devices and / or NF (Network)). It does not mean that Function)) is not included.
- UE_A10 is also referred to as UE
- AMF_A240 is referred to as AMF
- SMF_A230 is referred to as SMF
- UPF_A235 is referred to as UPF
- DN_A5 is also referred to as DN.
- FIG. 4 shows the N1 interface (hereinafter, also referred to as a reference point or reference point), the N2 interface, the N3 interface, the N4 interface, the N6 interface, the N9 interface, and the N11 interface.
- the N1 interface is the interface between the UE and AMF
- the N2 interface is the interface between (R) AN (access network) and AMF
- the N3 interface is (R) AN (access network).
- the interface between UPF is the interface between SMF and UPF
- the N6 interface is the interface between UPF and DN
- the N9 interface is the interface between UPF and UPF
- N11 interface is the interface between AMF and SMF. Communication can be performed between the devices by using these interfaces.
- (R) AN is also referred to as NG RAN below.
- AMF_A240 is connected to other AMF, SMF (SMF_A230), access network (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120), UDM, AUSF, PCF.
- AMF_A240 is used for registration management (Registration management), connection management (Connection management), reachability management (Reachability management), mobility management such as UE_A10 (Mobility management), and transfer of SM (Session Management) messages between UE and SMF.
- SMF Session Management
- AMF_A240s may be arranged in the core network_B190.
- AMF_A240 may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances).
- AMF_A240 may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
- CCNF Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)
- the RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state).
- RM-DEREGISTERED state the UE is not registered in the network, so the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE. is there.
- the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network.
- CM-IDLE state a non-connected state
- CM-CONNECTED state a connected state
- N2 connection an N2 interface connection
- N3 connection an N3 interface connection
- the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
- SMF_A230 has session management (Session Management; SM; session management) functions such as PDU sessions, IP address allocation to UEs and its management functions, UPF selection and control functions, and traffic to appropriate destinations.
- UPF setting function for routing function to notify that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), and AN-specific (AN) transmitted to AN via AMF via N2 interface. It may have a function of providing SM information (for each session), a function of determining an SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for a session, a roaming function, and the like.
- SMF_A230 may be connected to AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF.
- UPF_A235 is connected to DN_A5, SMF_A230, other UPFs, and access networks (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120).
- UPF_A235 is an anchor for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, packet routing & forwarding, UL CL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, Routing point function that supports multi-homed PDU session, QoS processing for userplane, verification of uplink traffic, buffering of downlink packet, downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification) It may play a role such as a trigger function.
- UL CL Uplink Classifier
- UPF_A235 may be a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway between DN_A5 and core network_B190.
- UPF_A235 may be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication.
- UPF_A235 may have a function of transferring IP communication, and may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication.
- the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_B190 and a single DN.
- the UPF_A235 may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
- UPF_C239 (also referred to as branching point or uplink classifier), which is a UPF different from UPF_A235, may exist as a device or NF between UPF_A235 and the access network. If UPF_C239 is present, the PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_A5 will be established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_A235.
- AUSF is connected to UDM and AMF_A240. AUSF acts as an authentication server.
- UDSF provides a function for all NFs to store and retrieve information as unstructured data.
- NEF provides a means to safely provide the services and capabilities provided by the 3GPP network.
- Information received from other NFs is saved as structured data.
- NRF When NRF receives an NF discovery request (NF Discovery Request) from an NF instance, it provides information on the discovered NF instance to that NF, information on available NF instances, and information on services supported by that instance. Or hold.
- NF Discovery Request NF Discovery Request
- PCF is connected to SMF (SMF_A230), AF, AMF_A240. Provide policy rules, etc.
- UDM is connected to AMF_A240, SMF (SMF_A230), AUSF, PCF.
- UDM includes UDM FE (application front end) and UDR (User Data Repository).
- UDM FE processes authentication information (credentials), location management (location management), subscription management (subscription management), and the like.
- UDR stores the data required by UDMFE and the policy profiles required by PCF.
- AF is connected to PCF. AF influences traffic routing and is involved in policy control.
- N3IWF establishes IPsec tunnel with UE, relays NAS (N1) signaling between UE and AMF, processes N2 signaling transmitted from SMF and relayed by AMF, and establishes IPsec Security Association (IPsec SA). , Provides functions such as relaying userplane packets between UE and UPF, and AMF selection.
- NAS N1 signaling between UE and AMF
- IPsec SA IPsec Security Association
- S1 mode is a UE mode that allows sending and receiving of messages using the S1 interface.
- the S1 interface may be composed of an S1-MME interface, an S1-U interface, and an X2 interface that connects radio base stations.
- the UE in S1 mode can access the EPC via eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and the EPC via en-gNB that provides the NR function, for example.
- Access to the EPC via eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and access to the EPC via en-gNB that provides the NR function are set to S1 mode, but they may be configured as different modes individually. ..
- N1 mode is a UE mode in which the UE can access 5GC via a 5G access network. Further, the N1 mode may be a UE mode capable of transmitting and receiving messages using the N1 interface.
- the N1 interface may be composed of an N1 interface and an Xn interface that connects radio base stations.
- the UE in N1 mode can access 5GC via ng-eNB, which provides the E-UTRA function, and 5GC via gNB, which provides the NR function, for example.
- the access to 5GC via ng-eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and the access to 5GC via gNB that provides the NR function are set to N1 mode, but they may be configured as different modes individually. ..
- UE_A10 is composed of a control unit_A500, a transmission / reception unit_A520, and a storage unit_A540.
- the transmission / reception unit_A520 and the storage unit_A540 are connected to the control unit_A500 via a bus.
- An external antenna 410 is connected to the transmitter / receiver _A520.
- the control unit_A500 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UE_A10, and realizes various processes of the entire UE_A10 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_A540.
- the transmitter / receiver_A520 is a functional unit for UE_A10 to connect to the base stations (UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) and / or wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN) in the access network and to connect to the access network. is there.
- the UE_A10 can be connected to a base station and / or an access point in the access network via an external antenna 410 connected to the transmitter / receiver_A520.
- the UE_A10 transmits / receives user data and / or control information to / from a base station and / or an access point in the access network via an external antenna 410 connected to the transmission / reception unit_A520. Can be done.
- the storage unit_A540 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of UE_A10, and is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like.
- the storage unit_A540 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, rules, policies, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
- Fig. 6 shows an example of the device configuration of eNB_A45 and NR node_A122.
- the eNB_A45 and the NR node_A122 are composed of a control unit_B600, a network connection unit_B620, a transmission / reception unit_B630, and a storage unit_B640.
- the network connection unit_B620, the transmission / reception unit_B630, and the storage unit_B640 are connected to the control unit_B600 via a bus.
- An external antenna 510 is connected to the transmitter / receiver _B630.
- the control unit_B600 is a functional unit for controlling the entire eNB_A45 and NR node_A122, and by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_B640, the entire eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 Realize various processes.
- the network connection part_B620 is a functional part for eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 to connect with AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network.
- eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can be connected to AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network via the network connection part_B620.
- eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from AMF_A240 and / or UPF_A235 via the network connection unit_B620.
- the transmission / reception unit_B630 is a functional unit for eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 to connect to UE_A10.
- the eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the UE_A10 via the transmission / reception unit_B630.
- the storage unit_B640 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of eNB_A45 and NR node_A122.
- the storage unit_B640 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like.
- the storage unit_B640 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
- the storage unit_B640 may store this information as a context for each UE_A10.
- the MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is composed of a control unit_C700, a network connection unit_C720, and a storage unit_C740.
- the network connection unit_C720 and the storage unit_C740 are connected to the control unit_C700 via a bus.
- the storage unit_C740 stores the context 642.
- the control unit_C700 is a functional unit for controlling the entire MME_A40 or AMF_A240, and realizes various processes of the entire AMF_A240 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_C740. To do.
- MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is another MME_A40, AMF_240, SMF_A230, base stations in the access network (UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) and / or wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN), UDM. , AUSF, a functional part for connecting to PCF.
- the MME_A40 or AMF_A240 sends and receives user data and / or control information to and from the base station and / or access point, UDM, AUSF, PCF in the access network via the network connection_C720. Can be done.
- the storage unit_C740 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of MME_A40 or AMF_A240.
- the storage unit_C740 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like.
- the storage unit_C740 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
- the context 642 stored in the storage unit_C740 may include a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer.
- the contexts stored for each UE include IMSI, MSISDN, MMState, GUTI, MEIdentity, UERadioAccessCapability, UENetworkCapability, MSNetworkCapability, AccessRestriction, MMEF-TEID, SGWF-TEID, eNBAddress. , MMEUES1APID, eNBUES1APID, NRnodeAddress, NRnodeID, WAGAddress, WAGID may be included. Further, the context stored for each PDU session may include APN in Use, Assigned Session Type, IP Address (es), PGW F-TEID, SCEF ID, and Default bearer.
- the contexts stored for each bearer are EPSBearerID, TI, TFT, SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, MMEF-TEID, eNBAddress, NRnodeAddress, WAGAddress, eNBID, NRnode. ID and WAG ID may be included.
- the SMF_A230 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively.
- the network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus.
- the storage unit_D840 stores the context 742.
- the control unit_D800 of SMF_A230 is a functional unit for controlling the entire SMF_A230, and realizes various processes of the entire SMF_A230 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D840. To do.
- the network connection part_D820 of SMF_A230 is a functional part for SMF_A230 to connect with AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF.
- the SMF_A230 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF via the network connection _D820.
- the storage unit_D840 of SMF_A230 is a functional unit that stores programs, data, etc. required for each operation of SMF_A230.
- the storage unit_D840 of the SMF_A230 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like.
- the storage unit_D840 of the SMF_A230 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
- the context 742 stored in the storage unit_D840 of SMF_A230 includes a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each APN, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer. There may be a context.
- the context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype.
- the context stored for each APN may include APN in use.
- the context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier.
- the context stored for each PDU session may include AssignedSessionType, IPAddress (es), SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, DefaultBearer.
- the context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
- PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively.
- the network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus.
- the storage unit_D840 stores the context 742.
- the control unit_D800 of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is a functional unit for controlling the entire PGW_A30 or UPF_A235, and by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D840, PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 Realize various processing as a whole.
- the network connection part_D820 of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 connects PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 to DN (that is, DN_A5), SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and access networks (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120). It is a functional part to do.
- UPF_A235 is between the DN (ie DN_A5), SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and the access network (ie UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) via the network connection_D820.
- User data and / or control information can be sent and received.
- the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 is a functional unit that stores programs, data, etc. required for each operation of UPF_A235.
- the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like.
- the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
- the context 742 stored in the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 includes a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each APN, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer. There may be a context.
- the context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype.
- the context stored for each APN may include APN in use.
- the context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier.
- the context stored for each PDU session may include AssignedSessionType, IPAddress (es), SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, DefaultBearer.
- the context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
- IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
- MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A2400 and SGW_A35 may be equal to the IMSI stored by HSS_A50.
- EMM State / MM State indicates the mobility management state of UE_A10 or MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- the EMM State / MM State may be an EMM-REGISTERED state (registered state) in which UE_A10 is registered in the network, and / or an EMM-DEREGISTERD state (unregistered state) in which UE_A10 is not registered in the network.
- the EMM State / MM State may be an ECM-CONNECTED state in which the connection between UE_A10 and the core network is maintained, and / or an ECM-IDLE state in which the connection is released.
- the EMM State / MM State may be information that can distinguish between the state in which UE_A10 is registered in the EPC and the state in which it is registered in the NGC or 5GC.
- GUTI Globally Unique Temporary Identity
- MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 identification information GUMMEI (Globally Unique MME Identifier)
- M-TMSI M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
- MEIdentity is UE_A10 or ME ID, and may be, for example, IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) or IMEISV (IMEI Software Version).
- MSISDN represents the basic telephone number of UE_A10.
- the MSISDN stored by MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 may be the information indicated by the storage unit of HSS_A50.
- the GUTI may include information that identifies CPF_140.
- MME F-TEID is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- the MME F-TEID may include the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240, the TEID (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier) of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240, or both of them. May be good.
- the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 and the TEID of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 may be stored independently.
- the MME F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
- SGW F-TEID is information that identifies SGW_A35.
- the SGW F-TEID may include the IP address of SGW_A35, the TEID of SGW_A35, or both. Further, the IP address of SGW_A35 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the SGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
- PGW F-TEID is information that identifies PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235.
- the PGW F-TEID may include the IP address of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235, the TEID of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235, or both. Good.
- the IP address of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 and the TEID of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 may be stored independently.
- the PGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
- the eNB F-TEID is information that identifies eNB_A45.
- the eNB F-TEID may include the IP address of eNB_A45, the TEID of eNB_A45, or both of them. Further, the IP address of eNB_A45 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the eNB F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
- APN may be identification information that identifies the core network and the external network such as DN. Furthermore, the APN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / UPF_A235 that connects the core network A_90.
- the APN may be a DNN (Data Network Name). Therefore, APN may be expressed as DNN, and DNN may be expressed as APN.
- the APN may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN.
- identification information that identifies such a gateway
- identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN.
- one gateway may be selected from a plurality of these gateways by another method using identification information other than APN.
- UERadioAccessCapability is identification information indicating the wireless access capability of UE_A10.
- UENetworkCapability includes security algorithms and key derivation functions supported by UE_A10.
- MS Network Capability is information that includes one or more information required for SGSN_A42 for UE_A10 having GERAN_A25 and / or UTRAN_A20 functions.
- Access Restriction is registration information for access restrictions.
- eNB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45.
- the MMEUES1APID is information that identifies UE_A10 in MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- the eNB UES1AP ID is information that identifies UE_A10 in eNB_A45.
- APN in Use is a recently used APN.
- APN in Use may be a Data Network Identifier. This APN may consist of network identification information and default operator identification information. Further, APN in Use may be information that identifies the DN at which the PDU session is established.
- the Assigned Session Type is information indicating the type of PDU session.
- the Assigned Session Type may be the Assigned PDN Type.
- the type of PDU session can be IP or non-IP.
- the type of PDU session is IP, it may further include information indicating the type of PDN assigned by the network.
- the AssignedSessionType may be IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4v6.
- IP Address is the IP address assigned to the UE.
- the IP address may be an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, an IPv6 prefix, or an interface ID.
- AssignedSessionType indicates non-IP, it is not necessary to include the element of IPAddress.
- DN ID is identification information that distinguishes the core network_B190 from an external network such as DN. Furthermore, the DN ID can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as UPGW_A130 or PF_A235 that connects the core network_B190.
- the DN ID may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN.
- a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_B190 and the DN there may be a plurality of gateways that can be selected by the DN ID. Further, one gateway may be selected from the plurality of gateways by another method using identification information other than DNID.
- the DN ID may be information equal to the APN or information different from the APN. If the DN ID and the APN are different information, each device may manage the information indicating the correspondence between the DN ID and the APN, or may carry out the procedure for inquiring the APN using the DN ID. Alternatively, the procedure for inquiring the DN ID using the APN may be carried out.
- SCEFID is the IP address of SCEF_A46 used in the PDU session.
- the Default Bearer is information acquired and / or generated when the PDU session is established, and is EPS bearer identification information for identifying the default bearer associated with the PDU session.
- EPS Bearer ID is the identification information of EPS bearer. Further, the EPS Bearer ID may be identification information for identifying SRB (Signalling Radio Bearer) and / or CRB (Control-plane Radio bearer), or may be identification information for identifying DRB (Data Radio Bearer).
- TI Transaction Identifier
- the EPS Bearer ID may be EPS bearer identification information that identifies the dedicated bearer. Therefore, the identification information that identifies the EPS bearer different from the default bearer may be used. TFT shows all packet filters associated with EPS bearers.
- the TFT is information that identifies a part of the user data to be transmitted / received, and UE_A10 transmits / receives the user data identified by the TFT using the EPS bearer associated with the TFT.
- UE_A10 sends and receives user data identified by the TFT using the RB (Radio Bearer) associated with the TFT.
- the TFT may associate user data such as application data to be transmitted / received with an appropriate transfer path, or may be identification information for identifying the application data.
- UE_A10 may send and receive user data that cannot be identified by TFT using the default bearer.
- UE_A10 may also store the TFT associated with the default bearer in advance.
- Default Bearer is EPS bearer identification information that identifies the default bearer associated with the PDU session.
- the EPS bearer may be a logical communication path established between UE_A10 and PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / UPF_A235, or may be a communication path constituting a PDN connection / PDU session. Further, the EPS bearer may be a default bearer or a dedicated bearer. In addition, the EPS bearer may be configured to include an RB established between UE_A10 and a base station and / or access point in the access network. Furthermore, there may be a one-to-one correspondence between RB and EPS bearers.
- the RB identification information may be associated with the EPS bearer identification information on a one-to-one basis, or may be the same identification information.
- the RB may be SRB and / or CRB, or may be DRB.
- the Default Bearer may be information acquired by UE_A10 and / or SGW_A35 and / or PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 from the core network when the PDU session is established.
- the default bearer is an EPS bearer that is first established in a PDN connection / PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established only once in one PDN connection / PDU session.
- the default bearer may be an EPS bearer that can be used to communicate user data that is not associated with a TFT.
- a decadeted bearer is an EPS bearer that is established after the default bearer is established during a PDN connection / PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established multiple times during a single PDN connection / PDU session. is there.
- a decadeted bearer is an EPS bearer that can be used to communicate user data associated with a TFT.
- User Identity is information that identifies the subscriber. User Identity may be IMSI or MSISDN. Further, User Identity may be identification information other than IMSI and MSISDN. Serving Node Information is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 used in the PDU session, and may be the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- ENB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45.
- the eNB ID is information that identifies the UE in eNB_A45.
- MMEAddress is the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- the MME ID is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
- NR nodeAddress is the IP address of NR node_A122.
- the NR node ID is information that identifies the NR node_A122.
- WAGAddress is the IP address of WAG.
- WAG ID is information that identifies WAG.
- Anchor or anchor point is a UFP that has a gateway function for DN and PDU sessions.
- the UPF serving as an anchor point may be a PDU session anchor or an anchor.
- the SSC mode indicates the mode of service session continuity (Session and Service Continuity) supported by the system and / or each device in 5GC. More specifically, it may be a mode indicating the types of service session continuation supported by the PDU session established between UE_A10 and the anchor point).
- the anchor point may be UPGW or UPF_A235.
- SSC mode may be a mode indicating the type of service session continuation set for each PDU session. Further, the SSC mode may be composed of three modes, SSC mode 1, SSC mode 2, and SSC mode 3. The SSC mode is associated with the anchor point and cannot be changed while the PDU session is established.
- SSC mode 1 is a service session continuation mode in which the same UPF is maintained as an anchor point regardless of the access technology such as RAT (Radio Access Technology) and cells used when UE_A10 connects to the network. More specifically, SSC mode1 may be a mode that realizes the continuation of the service session without changing the anchor point used by the established PDU session even when the mobility of UE_A10 occurs.
- RAT Radio Access Technology
- SSC mode2 is a service session continuation mode in which the PDU session is released first and then the PDU session is established continuously when the anchor point associated with one SSC mode2 is included in the PDU session. More specifically, SSC mode2 is a mode in which when an anchor point relocation occurs, the PDU session is deleted once and then a new PDU session is established.
- SSC mode2 is a service session continuation mode in which the same UPF is maintained as an anchor point only within the serving area of the UPF. More specifically, SSC mode2 may be a mode that realizes service session continuation without changing the UPF used by the established PDU session as long as UE_A10 is within the serving area of the UPF. Furthermore, SSC mode2 is a mode that realizes the continuation of the service session by changing the UPF used by the established PDU session when the mobility of UE_A10 occurs, such as leaving the serving area of the UPF. Good.
- the TUPF serving area may be an area where one UPF can provide the service session continuation function, or a subset of the access network such as RAT and cell used when UE_A10 connects to the network. It may be. Further, the subset of the access network may be a network composed of one or more RATs and / or cells, or may be a TA.
- SSC mode3 is a service session continuation mode in which a PDU session can be established between a new anchor point and the UE for the same DN without releasing the PDU session between the UE and the anchor point.
- SSCmode3 has a PDU session established between UE_A10 and the UPF, and / or a new PDU session via a new UPF for the same DN before disconnecting the communication path, and / Alternatively, it is a mode of service session continuation that allows the establishment of a communication path. Further, SSC mode3 may be a service session continuation mode that allows UE_A10 to be multihoming.
- / or SSC mode 3 may be a mode in which the continuation of the service session using the UPF associated with a plurality of PDU sessions and / or the PDU session is permitted.
- each device may realize the service session continuation by using a plurality of PDU sessions, or may realize the service session continuation by using a plurality of TUPFs.
- the selection of the new UPF may be carried out by the network, and the new UPF is where UE_A10 connects to the network. It may be the most suitable UPF.
- UE_A10 will immediately address the newly established PDU session for application and / or flow communication. It may be carried out based on the completion of communication.
- the network refers to at least a part of access network_A20 / 80, access network_B80 / 120, core network_A90, core network_B190, DN_A5, and PDN_A6.
- one or more devices included in at least a part of access network_A20 / 80, access network_B80 / 120, core network_A90, core network_B190, DN_A5, and PDN_A6 are referred to as a network or network device. You may call it. That is, the fact that the network executes the transmission / reception and / or procedure of the message means that the device (network device) in the network executes the transmission / reception and / or procedure of the message.
- Session Management (SM; Session Management) messages are NAS messages used in procedures for SM (also called session management procedures or SM procedures). It may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240.
- the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session establishment rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, and the like. It may be.
- the procedure for SM may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
- the message sent by UE_A10 is expressed as an SM request message.
- the PDU session establishment request message and the PDU session change request message are SM request messages.
- the tracking area (also referred to as TA; Tracking Area) is a range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network, and may be composed of, for example, one or more cells. Further, the TA may be a range in which a control message such as a paging message is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure.
- the TA list is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned to UE_A10 by the network. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the registration procedure while moving within one or more TAs included in the TA list. In other words, the TA list may be a set of information indicating the areas that UE_A10 can move to without performing the registration procedure.
- a network slice is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics.
- the network slice is also referred to as a NW slice.
- NSI Network Slice Instance
- Network Slice is an entity of network slice (Network Slice) composed of one or more in core network_B190.
- NSI may be composed of a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template).
- NST is a logical expression of one or more NFs (Network Functions) associated with a resource request for providing a required communication service or capability. That is, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs.
- NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like. At least one or more NFs may be configured in the network slice.
- the NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices.
- UE_A10 and / or devices in the network include NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or one or more network slice type IDs and / or one or more NS IDs, etc. It can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and / or APN.
- S-NSSAI is an abbreviation for Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information, and is information for identifying network slices.
- S-NSSAI may be composed of SST (Slice / Service type) and SD (Slice Differentiator).
- S-NSSAI may be composed of SST only or both SST and SD.
- SST is information indicating the operation of the network slice expected in terms of function and service.
- SD may be information that complements SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by SST.
- S-NSSAI may be information specific to each PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network), standard information shared among PLMNs, or information specific to a telecommunications carrier that differs for each PLMN. There may be.
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- standard information shared among PLMNs or information specific to a telecommunications carrier that differs for each PLMN. There may be.
- SST and / or SD may be standard information (Standard Value) shared between PLMNs, or information specific to a telecommunications carrier (Non Standard Value) that differs for each PLMN. You may.
- the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the registration information of UE_A10 as the default S-NSSAI.
- NSSAI Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information
- UE_A10 may store NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF_A240.
- Operator A network is a network operated by network operator A (operator A).
- the operator A may develop a NW slice common to the operator B described later.
- Operator B network is a network operated by network operator B (operator B).
- operator B may develop a NW slice common to operator A.
- the first NW slice is the NW slice to which the established PDU session belongs when the UE connects to a specific DN.
- the first NW slice may be a NW slice managed in the operator A network or a NW slice commonly managed in the operator B network.
- the second NW slice is a NW slice to which another PDU session that can connect to the DN to which the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice belongs belongs.
- the first NW slice and the second NW slice may be operated by the same operator or may be operated by different operators.
- Equal PLMN is a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same PLMN as any PLMN in the network.
- DCN Dedicated Core Network
- a DCN for a UE registered as a user of an M2M (Machine to Machine) communication function may be configured in the core network_A90.
- M2M Machine to Machine
- a default DCN may be configured within core network_A90 for UEs that do not have a suitable DCN.
- the DCN may be populated with at least one MME_40 or SGSN_A42, and may further be populated with at least one SGW_A35 or PGW_A30 or PCRF_A60.
- the DCN may be identified by the DCN ID, and the UE may be assigned to one DCN based on information such as the UE usage type and / or the DCN ID.
- the first timer is a timer that manages the start of procedures for session management such as the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the transmission of SM (Session Management) messages such as the PDU session establishment request message, and is the behavior of session management. It may be information indicating the value of the backoff timer for managing the session.
- the first timer and / or the backoff timer may be referred to as a timer. While the first timer is running, each device may be prohibited from starting procedures for session management and / or sending and receiving SM messages.
- the first timer may be set in association with at least one of the congestion management unit applied by the NW and / or the congestion management unit identified by the UE.
- the SM message may be a NAS message used in the procedure for session management, and may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. Further, the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session establishment rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, and the like. It may be. Further, the procedure for session management may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like. Also, in these procedures, the backoff timer value may be included for each message received by UE_A10.
- the UE may set the back-off timer received from the NW as the first timer, may set the timer value by another method, or may set a random value. Further, when a plurality of backoff timers received from the NW are configured, the UE may manage a plurality of "first timers" corresponding to the plurality of backoff timers, and the UE holds the timers. Based on the policy, one timer value may be selected from a plurality of backoff timer values received from the NW, set as the first timer, and managed. For example, when two backoff timer values are received, the UE sets the backoff timer values received from the NW to "first timer # 1" and "first timer # 2", respectively, and manages them. To do. Further, based on the policy held by the UE, one value may be selected from a plurality of backoff timer values received from the NW, set as the first timer, and managed.
- UE_A10 may manage a plurality of "first timers" corresponding to a plurality of backoff timers when receiving a plurality of backoff timer values from the NW.
- first timer # 1 the following may be described as, for example, "first timer # 1" or "first timer # 2".
- the plurality of backoff timers may be acquired by one session management procedure or by different different session management procedures.
- the first timer is set for a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for identifying one NW slice as described above, and is a backoff timer for suppressing reconnection, or APN /. It may be a backoff timer that is set in units of a combination of DNN and one NW slice to prevent reconnection, but it is not limited to this, and it is information for identifying APN / DNN and one NW slice. Based on this, it may be a backoff timer that is set in units of a combination of a plurality of related NW slices and suppresses reconnection.
- the UE is executing the PDU session establishment request (S1100) that does not include the DNN in the PDU session establishment request (1100), the fact that the DNN is not included is referred to as the same information. Further, when the UE executes the PDU session establishment request (S1100) that does not include S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment request (1100), the fact that S-NSSAI is not included is referred to as the same information.
- the re-attempt information may be set in units of UTRAN access and / or E-UTRAN access and / or NR access and / or slice information and / or equal PLMN and / or S1 mode and / or NW mode. ..
- the re-attempt information specified in the access unit may be information indicating reconnection using the same information to the network on the premise of access change.
- the re-attempt information specified in slice units slice information different from the rejected slice is specified, and reconnection using the specified slice information may be permitted.
- the re-attempt information specified in units of equal PLMN may be information indicating that reconnection using the same information is permitted if the PLMN of the change destination is equal PLMN when the PLMN is changed.
- the PLMN of the change destination is not an equal PLMN, it may be information indicating that reconnection using this procedure is not permitted.
- the re-attempt information specified for each mode indicates that when the mode is changed, if the mode to be changed is the S1 mode, reconnection using the same information is permitted. It may be information. Further, if the mode of the change destination is S1 mode, it may be information indicating that reconnection using the same information is not permitted.
- the network slice association rule is a rule that associates information that identifies a plurality of network slices.
- the network slice association rule may be received in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or may be set in UE_A10 in advance.
- the newest network slice association rule may be applied in UE_A10.
- UE_A10 may behave based on the latest network slice association rules. For example, if a new network slice association rule is received in the PDU session establishment rejection message while the network slice association rule is set in UE_A10 in advance, UE_A10 updates the network slice association rule held in UE_A10. You may.
- the backoff timer priority management rule is a rule set in UE_A10 to manage multiple backoff timers that occurred in multiple PDU sessions together in one backoff timer. For example, if conflict or duplicate congestion management is applied and the UE has multiple backoff timers, UE_A10 will have multiple backoff timers based on the backoff timer's preferred management rules. May be managed collectively.
- the pattern in which conflict or duplicate congestion management occurs is when congestion management based only on DNN and congestion management based on both DNN and slice information are applied at the same time. In this case, congestion based only on DNN is applied. Management is prioritized.
- the priority management rule for the backoff timer does not have to be limited to this.
- the backoff timer may be the first timer included in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the first state is a state in which each device has completed the registration procedure and the PDU session establishment procedure, and UE_A10 and / or each device is in a state in which one or more of the first to fourth congestion managements are applied. ..
- UE_A10 and / or each device may be in a state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state) by completing the registration procedure, and when the PDU session establishment procedure is completed, UE_A10 is PDU from the network. It may be in the state of receiving the session establishment refusal message.
- Congestion management consists of one or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management.
- the control of the UE by the NW is realized by the first timer and the congestion management recognized by the UE, and the UE may store the association of these information.
- the first congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for DNN parameters. For example, if the NW detects congestion for DNN # A and the NW recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request for DNN # A-only parameters, the NW will be the first. Congestion management may be applied. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include the DNN information, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and set it as the congestion management target. Alternatively, the NW may apply the first congestion management even if the NW recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request that includes DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A. If the first congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for DNN # A only.
- the first congestion management may be control signal congestion management for the DNN, and may be congestion management due to the connectivity to the DNN being in a congestion state.
- the first congestion management may be congestion management to regulate the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity.
- the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity may be the connection of DNN # A in connectivity using any S-NSSAI available to the UE, and the network slice to which the UE can connect. It may be a DNN # A connection via.
- connectivity to DNN # A via network slices may be included.
- the second congestion management refers to control signal congestion management for S-NSSI parameters. For example, when the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A is detected in the NW, and the NW recognizes that it is a UE-led session management request targeting only the parameters of S-NSSAI # A. , NW may apply a second congestion management. If a second congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for S-NSSAI # A only.
- the second congestion management may be control signal congestion management for S-NSSAI, and may be congestion management due to the network slice selected by S-NSSAI being in a congestion state.
- the second congestion management may be congestion management for regulating all connections based on S-NSSAI # A. In other words, it may be congestion management to regulate connections to all DNNs via the network slice selected by S-NSSAI # A.
- the third congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI. For example, when the control signal congestion for DNN # A and the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A are detected at the same time in the NW, the NW sets the parameters of DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A.
- the NW may apply a third congestion management if it recognizes that it is a targeted UE-driven session management request. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include information indicating the DNN, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and also set it as the congestion management target. If a third congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A parameters.
- the third congestion management is control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI, and the connectivity to DNN via the network slice selected based on S-NSSAI is congestion. Congestion management due to the state may be used.
- the third congestion management may be congestion management for restricting the connection to DNN # A among the connectivity based on S-NSSAI # A.
- the fourth congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for at least one parameter of DNN and / or S-NSSAI. For example, when the control signal congestion for DNN # A and the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A are detected at the same time in the NW, the NW is DNN # A and / or S-NSSAI # A.
- the NW may apply a fourth congestion management if it recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request for at least one parameter. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include information indicating the DNN, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and also set it as the congestion management target. If a fourth congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for at least one parameter of DNN # A and / or S-NSSAI # A.
- the fourth congestion management is control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI, and the network slice selected based on S-NSSAI and the connectivity to DNN are in a congested state. It may be congestion management due to the above.
- the fourth congestion management is congestion management for regulating all connections based on S-NSSAI # A, and congestion for regulating connections to DNN # A in all connectivity. It may be management.
- it is congestion management to regulate the connection to all DNNs through the network slice selected by S-NSSAI # A, and to regulate the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity. It may be congestion management.
- connection to DNN # A in all connectivity may be the connection of DNN # A in connectivity using any S-NSSAI available to the UE, and the network slice to which the UE can connect. It may be a DNN # A connection via.
- connectivity to DNN # A via network slices may be included.
- the fourth congestion management with DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A as parameters is the first congestion management with DNN # A as parameters and the second congestion management with S-NSSAI # A as parameters. May be congestion management that executes at the same time.
- the first behavior is the behavior in which the UE stores the slice information transmitted in the first PDU session establishment request message in association with the transmitted PDU session identification information.
- the UE may store the slice information sent in the first PDU session establishment request message, or store the slice information received when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected. You may.
- the second behavior is for the UE to connect to the same APN / DNN as the first PDU session establishment request using different slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment.
- This is the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request.
- the second behavior is that if the UE receives a backoff timer value from the network of zero or invalid, it uses slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment.
- the behavior may be to send a PDU session establishment request for connecting to the same APN / DNN as the first PDU session establishment request. Also, if the first PDU session is rejected because the radio access of the specific PLMN to which the specified APN / DNN is connected is not supported, or the first PDU session is rejected for a temporary reason.
- the UE connects to the same APN / DNN as the APN / DNN included in the first PDU session establishment request, using slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment. It may be the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request for the purpose.
- the third behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information until the first timer expires. .. Specifically, the third behavior is that if the UE receives a backoff timer value from the network that is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU that uses the same identification information until the first timer expires.
- the behavior may be such that the session establishment request is not transmitted.
- the same identification information means that the first identification information and / or the second identification information to be included in the new PDU session establishment request is the first identification information and / or the first identification information transmitted in the rejected PDU session establishment request. Alternatively, it may mean that the second identification information is the same.
- the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information is not transmitted until the first timer expires.
- the PDU session that does not send a new PDU session establishment request in the third behavior may be a PDU session to which congestion management associated with the first timer is applied. More specifically, in the third behavior, the first timer has connectivity according to the type of congestion management associated with it, and the DNN and / or S-NSSAI associated with that congestion management. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not transmitted to the PDU session using.
- the process in which the UE is prohibited by this behavior may be the start of the procedure for session management including the PDU session establishment request and / or the transmission / reception of the SM message.
- the fourth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request that does not carry slice information or DNN / APN information until the first timer expires. Is. Specifically, the fourth behavior is that if the backoff timer received by the UE from the network is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU that does not carry slice information or DNN / APN information until the first timer expires. The behavior may be such that the session establishment request is not transmitted.
- the fifth behavior is the behavior in which the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request is rejected.
- the fifth behavior is a new PDU session using the same identification information when the UE is in the same PLMN when the PDP types supported by the UE and the network are different.
- the behavior may be such that the establishment request is not transmitted.
- the sixth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sends a new PDU session establishment request as an initial procedure using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request is rejected. Specifically, the sixth behavior is that if the UE rejects the first PDU session establishment request because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP access, the same identification information As an initial procedure using, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request.
- the seventh behavior is that when the UE selects another NW slice in the procedure for selecting the PLMN, the backoff timer received when the previous PDU session establishment request is rejected is continued.
- the seventh behavior is when the UE makes a PLMN selection when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected, and is specified in the first PDU session establishment request in the selected PLMN. If it is possible to specify a NW slice that is common to the NW slice that was created, the behavior may be to continue the backoff timer received when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected.
- the eighth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sets the value notified from the network or the value set in the UE in advance as the first timer value.
- the eighth behavior may be the behavior in which the UE sets the backoff timer value received in the rejection notification of the first PDU session establishment request as the first timer value, or in advance.
- the behavior may be to set or hold a value in the UE as the first timer value. If the timer to be set or held in the UE is set as the first timer value in advance, it may be limited to HPLMN or even PLMN in the service area.
- the ninth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is inserted or removed. is there.
- the ninth behavior is that the UE has an invalid backoff timer received from the network, or the first PDU session rejection reason is a PDP type between the UE and the network. If they are different, do not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed.
- the connected PLMN when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, there is no information element of the backoff timer from the network, and Re- If there is no attempt information, or if PDU session reconnection to equal PLMN is allowed, the connected PLMN will not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed. It may be a behavior.
- the connected PLMN will not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed. It may be a behavior. Also, if the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is neither zero nor invalid.
- the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not transmitted until the terminal power is turned on / off or the USIM is inserted / removed. Also, if the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is disabled, the terminal power is turned on. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not sent until / off or USIM insertion / removal.
- the tenth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sends a new PDU session establishment request when the PDU session establishment request is rejected. Specifically, the tenth behavior is that the UE further notifies from the network when the backoff timer received from the network is zero, or when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected for a temporary reason. If there is no backoff timer information element itself, it may be the behavior of sending a new PDU session establishment request. Also, if another PLMN is selected, or if another NW slice is selected and the first PDU session establishment request is rejected for a temporary reason, the target APN / DNN in the selected PLMN.
- the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request. Also, when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the PDP type of the UE and the network are different, when different PLMNs are selected, Re-attempt information is not received or PLMNs that are not on the equal PLMN list. When is selected, when the PDP type is changed, when the terminal power is turned on / off, or when the USIM is plugged in or unplugged, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request.
- the backoff timer notified from the network is zero when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, it is new. It may be the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request.
- the eleventh behavior is the behavior in which the UE ignores the first timer and the Re-attempt information. Specifically, the eleventh behavior is that the UE rejects the first PDU session establishment request in the handover from non-3GPP access because the target PDN session context does not exist, or If the establishment of the first PDU session is rejected because the number of bearers stretched in the PDN connection has reached the maximum allowed number, the behavior is to ignore the first timer and Re-attempt information. May be good.
- the twelfth behavior is to identify a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for the UE to identify one NW slice received in the rejection notice for the first PDU session establishment request. It is a behavior that discriminates information and suppresses reconnection to a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for identifying one NW slice. Specifically, the twelfth behavior is that the UE identifies another NW slice related to the information to identify the NW slice notified in the first PDU session establishment request rejection based on the network slice association rule. It may be a behavior that derives information for doing so.
- the network slice association rule may be set in the UE in advance, or may be notified from the network by a notification of refusal to establish a PDU session.
- the thirteenth behavior is that if multiple different congestion managements are invoked for establishing one or more PDU sessions by the same UE and multiple timers are provided by the network, the UE will be in the priority management rule of the backoff timer. Based on this, the behavior may be to manage the timer. For example, the first PDU session establishment request of the combination of DNN_1 and slice_1 by the UE is targeted for congestion management based on both the DNN and the slice information, and the UE receives the first timer # 1. Further, the UE makes a second PDU session establishment request for the combination of DNN_1 and slice_2, is subject to congestion management based only on DNN, and receives the first timer # 2.
- the UE may manage the behavior of the UE's PDU session reestablishment by the superior first timer # 2 based on the priority management rule of the backoff timer. Specifically, the timer value held by the UE may be overwritten by the timer value generated by the priority congestion control.
- the 14th behavior is that when multiple different congestion managements are applied to the establishment of one or more PDU sessions by the same UE and multiple timers are provided from the network, timers are used for each session management instance (PDU session unit). It may be a behavior to manage. For example, if the UE establishes a first PDU session for a combination of DNN # 1 and slice # 1 that is subject to congestion based on both DNN and slice information, the UE sets the target backoff timer value to the first. It is managed as timer # 1. After that, when the UE attempts to establish a PDU session for the combination of DNN # 1 and slice # 2 as the second PDU session, and the UE is targeted for congestion based only on the DNN, the UE is targeted.
- the backoff timer value of is managed as the first timer # 2.
- the UE manages a plurality of timers (here, the first timer # 1 and the first timer # 2) at the same time. Specifically, the UE manages timers on a session management instance / PDU session basis. Further, when the UE receives a plurality of timers at the same time in one session management procedure, the UE simultaneously manages the target backoff timer in the congestion management unit identified by the UE.
- the fifteenth behavior corresponds to the first identification process that identifies which type of congestion management is applied by UE_A10 from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management, and the congestion management to be applied. It may be the behavior of executing a second identification process for identifying the attached DNN and / or S-NSSAI.
- the first identification process at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information and / or at least one or more identification information from the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. It may be identified based on the identification information.
- the second identification process includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one or more of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. It may be identified based on the identification information of.
- the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the first congestion management.
- the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
- the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
- the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 1st congestion management.
- the 17th identification information contains only DNN and does not include S-NSSAI.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used.
- UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
- the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the second congestion management.
- the fifteenth identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
- the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
- the 14th identification information contains information indicating the second congestion management.
- the 17th identification information contains only S-NSSAI and does not include DNN.
- the 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- the 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information.
- UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
- the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the third congestion management.
- the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
- the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
- the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 3rd congestion management.
- the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 3rd congestion management and not including the 4th congestion management
- the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information.
- UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
- the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the fourth congestion management.
- the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
- the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
- the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 4th congestion management.
- the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 4th congestion management and not including the 3rd congestion management
- the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- the 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information.
- the 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information.
- -The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used.
- UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information, or may be identified by using other means.
- the type of congestion management may be identified by the first identification process.
- the second identification process may be a process for identifying the corresponding DNN and / or S-NSSAI for the type of congestion management identified by the first identification process.
- the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the twelfth identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the second identification information.
- the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN indicated by the twelfth identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN included in the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN indicated by the second identification information.
- the S-NSSAI corresponding to the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the first identification information.
- the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the S-NSSAI indicated by the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the S-NSSAI included in the first identification information.
- UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information, or may be identified by using other means.
- UE_A10 may identify the congestion management that core network_B190 applies to UE_A10. In other words, UE_A10 may identify the corresponding congestion management type and the corresponding S-NSSAI and / or DNN as the applied congestion management based on the fifteenth behavior. In addition, UE_A10 stores one or more identification information among the first identification information to the fourth identification information and the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information in association with the applied congestion management. , May be managed. Here, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information may be stored and managed as information for identifying the congestion management to be applied.
- the 16th behavior is the behavior of stopping the 1st timer when the NW-led session management procedure is executed while the UE is activating the 1st timer.
- the first timer to be stopped is determined from the plurality of activated first timers based on the 21st identification information, and the timer is stopped. It may be a behavior that does. And / or may be the behavior of stopping the first timer associated with the congestion management identified by the 17th behavior. If there are a plurality of congestion managements identified by the 17th behavior, the timers associated with each congestion management may be stopped.
- the 17th behavior is the behavior of the UE that identifies the congestion management to be stopped from among one or more congestion managements applied by the UE based on the reception of the control message transmitted by the core network. Good.
- the UE may identify congestion management that suspends or modifies application based on the 21st identification information.
- the UE stores the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information as the information for identifying the congestion management in the fourth process. Therefore, the congestion management in which the identification information and the thirteenth identification information included in the twenty-first identification information match may be identified as the congestion management for which the application is stopped.
- the UE may identify the congestion management to be decommissioned based on one or more combinations of the eleventh identification information contained in the twenty-first identification information to the eighteenth identification information. ..
- the details of the identification method may be the same as the identification process in the fifteenth behavior described in the fourth process in the PDU session establishment procedure example described later. That is, the UE may identify the congestion management to be stopped in the same manner as the method of identifying the congestion management to be applied.
- the UE may identify a plurality of congestion managements to be stopped from being applied.
- a method of identifying the second congestion management, which is different from the first congestion management will be described, with the congestion management identified by the above-mentioned method as the first congestion management.
- the UE may identify the congestion management associated with the same DNN as the DNN associated with the first congestion management as the second congestion management. And / or, the UE may identify the congestion management associated with the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the first congestion management as the second congestion management. It should be noted that the identification of a plurality of congestion managements to be stopped may be set to be executed only when the first congestion management and / or the second congestion management is a specific type of congestion management.
- the UE may identify the second congestion management. And / or, in identifying the second congestion management, the UE identifies the second congestion management when the congestion management to be searched is one of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. May be good. It should be noted that in which type the first congestion management and / or the second identification information can identify a plurality of congestion managements may be preset in the core network and / or the UE. It should be noted that it is not necessary to specify one specific type of congestion management for which identification is permitted, and a plurality of specific types may be set.
- the first identification information is information that identifies that it belongs to the first NW slice.
- the first identification information may be information indicating that the UE wants to establish a PDU session belonging to the first NW slice.
- the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice.
- the slice information may be identification information indicating a specific S-NSSAI.
- the first identification information may be information for identifying a specific NW slice in the operator A network, or the same NW slice is commonly identified in the operator B (other operators other than the operator A). It may be information to be used.
- the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice set from the HPLMN, or for identifying the first NW slice obtained from the AMF in the registration procedure. It may be information, or it may be information for identifying the first NW slice permitted from the network. Further, the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice stored for each PLMN.
- the second identification information is DNN (Data Network Name) and may be information used to identify DN (Data Network).
- the third identification information may be a PDU session ID (PDU Session ID), which may be information used to identify the PDU session (PDU Session).
- PDU Session ID PDU session ID
- the fourth identification information is PTI (Procedure transaction identity), which is information that identifies the transmission and reception of a series of messages of a specific session management procedure as one group, and further, of other series of session management related messages. It may be information used to identify and / or distinguish between transmission and reception.
- PTI Provide transaction identity
- the eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing a PDU session or the request for changing a PDU session (PDU session modification) is rejected.
- the request for establishing a PDU session or the request for changing a PDU session is a request made by the UE, and includes DNN and / or S-NSSAI. That is, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the NW rejects the establishment request or the change request for the PDU session corresponding to these DNNs and / or S-NSSAs.
- the eleventh identification information may be information indicating re-attempt (Re-attempt) information.
- the NW may indicate congestion management to the UE by transmitting at least one identification information of the twelfth identification information to the eighteenth identification information to the UE together with the eleventh identification information.
- the NW may notify the UE of congestion management corresponding to the combination of one or more of the 12th to 18th identifications.
- the UE may identify the congestion management corresponding to the combination of one or a plurality of identification information of the 18th identification information from the 12th identification information, and execute the process based on the identified congestion management.
- the UE may start counting the first timer associated with the identified congestion management.
- the timer value of the first timer may be determined by using the 14th identification information, or a timer value set by another method such as using a value saved by the UE in advance is set. Alternatively, a random value may be set.
- the twelfth identification information may be a DNN that is not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the DNN identified by the second identification information is not permitted. .. Further, the twelfth identification information may be the same DNN as the second identification information.
- the thirteenth identification information may be a PDU Session ID and / or PTI, which may be a PDU session ID and / or PTI not permitted by the network, or a PDU session ID identified by the third identification information. And / or information indicating that PTI is not permitted. Further, the PDU Session ID of the thirteenth identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the third identification information. Further, the PTI of the thirteenth identification information may be the same PTI as the fourth identification information.
- the thirteenth identification information may be used as information for identifying the congestion management notified by the NW to the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session.
- the UE may store and manage the thirteenth identification information in association with the congestion management executed based on the fifteenth behavior, and may use it as information for identifying the executed congestion management.
- the information for identifying congestion management may be composed of a combination of one or more identification information of the 14th to 18th identification information in addition to the 13th identification information.
- the 14th identification information may be information indicating the value of the backoff timer.
- the backoff timer may be a value indicating the lifetime of congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish a PDU session.
- the UE may use the 14th identification information as the value of the timer in the 15th behavior executed in response to the reception of the 14th identification information.
- the 14th identification information may include information for identifying the type of congestion management in addition to the timer value. Specifically, it may include information that identifies which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is.
- the information that identifies the congestion management type may be a timer name that identifies each congestion management, or may be a flag that identifies each congestion management. Not limited to this, it may be identified by another method such as being identified by a position stored in a control message or the like.
- the fifteenth identification information is information indicating one or more reason values (Cause Value) indicating the reason why this procedure was rejected.
- the reason value may be information indicating congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure, or information indicating a reason value for rejecting this procedure applied by NW other than congestion management. Good.
- the reason value is information for identifying which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management the congestion management notified to the UE by the NW based on the refusal to establish the PDU session indicates. May be.
- the NW may send a different value to the UE as a reason value according to each congestion management from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is congestion management.
- the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management, the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying which of the above is the congestion management. In this case, the NW is different for the UE depending on whether it is the first congestion management or one of the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management.
- the value may be sent as the reason value.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be possible to distinguish between the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management.
- the reason value is whether the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management or the second congestion management, or the third congestion management and the third. It may be information for identifying which of the four congestion managements is the congestion management. In this case, depending on whether it is the first congestion management, the second congestion management, or the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management, the NW May send a different value to the UE as the reason value.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is, or it is one of the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management.
- the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management or the second congestion management, or the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not.
- the NW sends a different value to the UE as a reason value depending on whether it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management and the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management. May be good.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is a third congestion management or a fourth congestion management.
- the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the second congestion management or the third congestion management, or the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not.
- the NW sends a different value to the UE as a reason value depending on whether it is the second congestion management or the third congestion management and the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management. May be good.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the second congestion management or the third congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management.
- the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management, or the first congestion management or the third congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not.
- the NW sends a different value to the UE as the reason value depending on whether it is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management and the first congestion management or the third congestion management. May be good.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is the first congestion management or the third congestion management.
- the reason value may be information indicating that the NW performs congestion management for the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session.
- the reason value may be information for causing the UE to execute any of the fourth congestion management from the first congestion management.
- the reason value does not have to be information that can identify a particular congestion management.
- the external DN is a DNN whose DNN information is not included in this procedure or is unknown. It may be the reason value (Missing or unknown DNN) notified to the UE by the NW indicating that the procedure has been rejected as a reason. In addition, the reason value (Unknown PDU session type) that the NW notifies the UE that the external DN rejected this procedure because the PDU session type of this procedure is unidentifiable or not permitted. Good.
- the NW will notify the UE that the external DN has rejected this procedure due to the failure of user authentication and authorization in this procedure, the revocation of authentication and authorization by the external DN, or the revocation of authentication and authorization by NW. It may be a reason value (User authentication or authorization failed). It may also be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the requested service, operation, or resource reservation request has been rejected for a non-specific reason (Request rejected, unspecified). Further, it may be a reason value (Service option temporary out of order) for the NW to notify the UE that the NW cannot temporarily receive the service request from the UE.
- the NW may also be the reason why the NW notifies the UE that it does not hold the target PDU session when the UE transfers the PDU session from non 3GPP access to 3GPP access or from EPS to 5GS ( PDU session does not exist). It may also be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the NW does not support the SSC mode requested by the UE (Not supported SSC mode). In addition, the reason value that the NW notifies the UE that the external DN rejected this procedure because the procedure via a specific slice does not contain DNN information or is an unknown DNN ( It may be Missing or unknown DNN in a slice).
- the reason value in the fifteenth identification information described above does not need to have a meaning corresponding to the third congestion management, and the reason value in the fifteenth identification information is , Third congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
- the meaning corresponding to the fourth congestion management in the reason value in the fifteenth identification information described above is unnecessary, and the reason value in the fifteenth identification information is , Fourth congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
- the fifteenth identification information that identifies the first congestion management may be a reason value indicating that resources are insufficient (Insufficient resources).
- the fifteenth identification information that identifies the second congestion management may be a reason value indicating that the resources for a specific slice are insufficient (Insufficient resources for specific slice).
- the fifteenth identification information that identifies the third congestion management may be a reason value indicating that the resources for a specific slice and the DNN are insufficient (Insufficient resources for specific slice and DNN).
- the fifteenth identification information may be information that can identify the type of congestion management, and further, the back-off timer and / or the back-off timer value indicated by the fourteenth identification information is which congestion management. It may be information indicating whether or not it corresponds to the type of.
- UE_A10 may identify the type of congestion management based on the fifteenth identification information. Further, based on the fifteenth identification information, it may be determined which congestion management type the backoff timer and / or the backoff timer value indicated by the fourteenth identification information corresponds to.
- the 16th identification information is one or more identifier information indicating that this procedure has been rejected.
- the Indication information may be information indicating the congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure.
- the NW may indicate the congestion management applied by the NW based on the 16th identification information.
- the Indication information may be information indicating which congestion management the NW regulates to the UE in two or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. .. Therefore, the NW may send the value corresponding to the regulatory control applied to the UE as Indication information.
- the UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as Indication information in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is based on at least the 16th identification information. It may be identified whether it is congestion management.
- two or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management are congestion managements that can be identified by using Indication information, and all four congestion managements to be identified are all four. It may be the congestion management of, the first congestion management and the second congestion management, the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management, or the second. It may be the fourth congestion management from the congestion management of the above, or it may be any other combination.
- the Indication information does not necessarily require a corresponding value for all of the congestion management to be identified. For example, if the value of the Indication information is associated and assigned to each of the congestion management except the congestion management A, it is not always necessary to set the value of the Indication information for the congestion management A. In this case, the NW and the UE can identify that it is the first congestion management by not transmitting and receiving the Indication information.
- the congestion management A may be any of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management.
- Identification may or may not be included depending on the type of congestion management from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. You can.
- the NW may use identification information as information indicating congestion management depending on the type of congestion management, or may use other identification information without using identification information depending on the type of congestion management. It may be used as information to indicate.
- the meaning corresponding to the third congestion management in the Indication information in the 16th identification information described above is unnecessary, and the Indication information in the 16th identification information is , Third congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
- the meaning corresponding to the fourth congestion management in the Indication information in the 16th identification information described above is unnecessary, and the Indication information in the 16th identification information is , Fourth congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
- the 17th identification information is one or more Value information indicating that this procedure has been rejected.
- the Value information may be information indicating the congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure.
- the 17th identification information may be information including at least one of the identification information for identifying one or a plurality of NW slices included in the 18th identification information and / or the 12th identification information. ..
- the NW may indicate the congestion management applied by the NW based on the 17th identification information.
- the NW may indicate which of the first congestion management and the fourth congestion management is applied based on the 17th identification information.
- the NW may indicate the DNN and / or S-NSSAI subject to congestion management applied to the UE based on the transmission of the PDU session establishment rejection message based on the 17th identification information. For example, if the 17th identification information is only DNN # 1, it may indicate that the first congestion management for DNN # 1 is applied. If the 17th identification information is only S-NSSAI # 1, it may indicate that the second congestion management for S-NSSAI # 1 is applied. If the 17th information is composed of DNN # 1 and S-NSSAI # 1, a third congestion management targeting at least one of DNN # 1 and / or S-NSSAI # 1, or a fourth It may be shown that the congestion management of is applied.
- the 17th identification information does not necessarily have to be information that can identify which congestion management is applied from the 1st congestion management to the 4th congestion management, and the 17th identification information does not necessarily have to be. May be information indicating a DNN and / or S-NSSAI subject to congestion management identified by other means, such as being identified based on other identification information.
- the 18th identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice has been rejected, the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice, or the PDU session. It may be information indicating that the request for change (PDU session modification) is not permitted.
- the first NW slice may be a NW slice determined by the first identification information, or may be a different NW slice.
- the 18th identification information may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the 1st NW slice is not permitted in the DN identified by the 12th identification information, or the 13th identification information. It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is not permitted in the PDU session identified by.
- the eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is not permitted in the registration area and / or the tracking area to which the UE_A10 currently belongs, or the UE_A10. It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is not permitted in the access network to which is connected. Further, the eleventh identification information may be identification information for identifying one or more NW slices to which the rejected PDU session request belongs. Further, the 18th identification information may be identification information indicating auxiliary information for the wireless access system to select an appropriate MME when the UE switches the connection destination to EPS. The auxiliary information may be information indicating the DCN ID. Further, the 18th identification information may be a network slice association rule which is a rule for associating a plurality of slice information.
- the 21st identification information may be information for stopping one or a plurality of first timers in which the UE is running, and among the first timers in which the UE is running, the first timer to be stopped. It may be information indicating. Specifically, the 21st identification information may be information indicating the 13th identification information stored in the UE in association with the first timer. Further, the 21st identification information may be information indicating at least one of the 12th to 18th identification information stored in the UE in association with the first timer.
- the 21st identification information may be information that changes the association between the 1st timer stored in the UE and the information indicating at least one of the 13th to 17th identification information. For example, it contains a 21st identity that allows connection to DNN # A when the 1st timer that suppresses UE-driven session management of the combination of DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A is running.
- the UE When receiving a NW-led session management request, the UE changes the association target of the running timer to S-NSSAI # A only, and recognizes that the UE-led session management request to DNN # A is permitted. You may.
- the 21st identification information is information indicating that the congestion management applied at the time of receiving the 21st identification information is changed to another congestion management among the 1st to 4th congestion managements. May be good.
- the initial procedure is also referred to as this procedure, and this procedure includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a UE-led PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and a network-led session management procedure. Details of the registration procedure, PDU session establishment procedure, and network-led session management procedure will be described later.
- Registration procedure Registration procedure
- PDU session establishment procedure UE-led PDU session establishment procedure
- network-led session management procedure Details of the registration procedure, PDU session establishment procedure, and network-led session management procedure will be described later.
- each device executes the registration procedure (S900)
- UE_A10 transitions to the state registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state).
- each device executes the PDU session establishment procedure (S902), so that UE_A10 establishes a PDU session with DN_A5, which provides the PDU connection service, via the core network_B190, and between the devices. Transitions to the first state (S904).
- this PDU session is established via the access network, UPF_A235, but it is not limited to this. That is, there may be a UPF (UPF_C239) different from the UPF_A235 between the UPF_A235 and the access network.
- each device in the first state may execute the session management procedure at any time (S906).
- the session management procedure may be a network-led session management procedure or a UE-led session management procedure.
- each device may exchange various capability information and / or various request information of each device in the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the network-led session management procedure.
- the exchange of various information and / or negotiation of various requests is performed in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the network-led session management procedure. It may or may not be carried out at.
- each device does not exchange various information and / or negotiate various requests in the registration procedure, exchange various information and / or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or network-led session. It may be carried out by the management procedure.
- the exchange of various information and / or negotiation of various requests is performed in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or network-led session management. It may be carried out by the procedure.
- each device may execute the PDU session establishment procedure in the registration procedure or after the registration procedure is completed. Also, when the PDU session establishment procedure is executed during the registration procedure, the PDU session establishment request message may be included in the registration request message and sent / received, and the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be included in the registration acceptance message and sent / received. The PDU session establishment completion message may be included in the registration completion message and sent / received, and the PDU session establishment rejection message may be included in the registration rejection message and sent / received. Further, when the PDU session establishment procedure is executed in the registration procedure, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the registration procedure, or the PDU session is established between the devices. You may make a transition.
- each device involved in this procedure sends and receives one or more identification information included in each control message by transmitting and receiving each control message described in this procedure, and stores each transmitted and received identification information as a context. May be good.
- the registration procedure is a procedure for UE_A10 to take the lead in registering with the network (access network and / or core network_B190 and / or DN_A5).
- UE_A10 can execute this procedure at any time, such as when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network.
- UE_A10 may start this procedure at any time as long as it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). Further, each device may transition to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
- this procedure updates the location registration information of UE_A10 in the network and / or periodically notifies the network of the status of UE_A10 from UE_A10 and / or updates specific parameters regarding UE_A10 in the network. It may be the procedure of.
- UE_A10 may start this procedure when it has mobility across TAs. In other words, UE_A10 may start this procedure when it moves to a TA different from the TA shown in the held TA list. In addition, UE_A10 may start this procedure when the running timer expires. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation (also referred to as deactivation) of the PDU session. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure if there is a change in capability information and / or preferences regarding UE_A10's PDU session establishment. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure on a regular basis. UE_A10 is not limited to these, and this procedure can be executed at any timing as long as the PDU session is established.
- UE_A10 performs the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to AMF_A240 via NR node (also called gNB) _A122 and / or ng-eNB (S1000) (S1002) (S1004).
- UE_A10 sends an SM (Session Management) message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or sends an SM message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message.
- SM Session Management
- the procedure for session management (SM) such as the PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
- UE_A10 sends an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message including a registration request message to NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB (S1000).
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB receives the RRC message including the registration request message, it extracts the registration request message from the RRC message and selects AMF_A240 as the NF or shared CP function to which the registration request message is routed.
- NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB may select AMF_A240 based on the information contained in the RRC message.
- NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB sends or forwards a registration request message to the selected AMF_A240 (S1004).
- the registration request message is a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent and received on the N1 interface.
- the RRC message is a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB.
- NAS messages are processed in the NAS layer
- RRC messages are processed in the RRC layer
- the NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
- UE_A10 may send a registration request message for each NSI when there are multiple NSIs requesting registration, or may send a plurality of registration request messages by including them in one or more RRC messages. Good. Further, the above-mentioned plurality of registration request messages may be included in one or more RRC messages as one registration request message and transmitted.
- AMF_A240 When AMF_A240 receives a registration request message and / or a control message different from the registration request message, it executes the first condition determination.
- the first conditional determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A240 accepts the request of UE_A10. In the first condition determination, AMF_A240 determines whether the first condition determination is true or false.
- AMF_A240 initiates procedure (A) during this procedure if the first condition determination is true (ie, if the network accepts the request for UE_A10) and if the first condition determination is false (ie). , If the network does not accept the request of UE_A10), start the procedure (B) during this procedure.
- AMF_A240 executes the fourth condition determination and starts the procedure (A) during this procedure.
- the fourth condition determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A240 sends and receives SM messages to and from SMF_A230.
- the fourth condition determination may determine whether or not AMF_A240 is in the process of performing the PDU session establishment procedure.
- AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 and sends and receives SM messages to and from the selected SMF_A230 when the fourth condition determination is true (that is, when AMF_A240 sends and receives SM messages to and from SMF_A230).
- AMF_A240 may cancel the procedure (A) during this procedure and start the procedure (B) during this procedure.
- AMF_A240 sends a Registration Accept message to UE_A10 via NR node_A122 based on the receipt of the registration request message from UE_A10 and / or the completion of sending and receiving SM messages to and from SMF_A230. (S1008). For example, if the fourth condition determination is true, AMF_A240 may send a registration acceptance message based on the receipt of the registration request message from UE_A10. Further, if the fourth condition determination is false, the AMF_A240 may send a registration acceptance message based on the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF_A230. Here, the registration acceptance message may be sent as a response message to the registration request message.
- the registration acceptance message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface.
- AMF_A240 sends to NR node_A122 as a control message for N2 interface, and NR node_A122 that receives this is an RRC message to UE_A10. You may include it in and send it.
- the AMF_A240 may send the registration acceptance message including the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment acceptance message), or together with the registration acceptance message, the SM message (eg, PDU).
- a session establishment acceptance message may be sent.
- This transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true.
- AMF_A240 may indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted by performing such a transmission method.
- UE_A10 receives the registration acceptance message via NR node_A122 (S1008). UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the registration acceptance message by receiving the registration acceptance message.
- UE_A10 sends a Registration Complete message to AMF_A240 based on the receipt of the registration acceptance message (S1010).
- UE_A10 may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM is completed.
- the registration completion message may be sent as a response message to the registration acceptance message.
- the registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface.
- UE_A10 sends it to NR node_A122 by including it in the RRC message, and NR node_A122 that receives this is sent to AMF_A240 on the N2 interface. It may be sent as a control message.
- AMF_A240 receives a registration completion message (S1010).
- each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
- AMF_A240 starts the procedure (B) during this procedure by sending a Registration Reject message to UE_A10 via NR node_A122 (S1012).
- the registration refusal message may be sent as a response message to the registration request message.
- the registration refusal message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface.
- AMF_A240 sends to NR node_A122 as a control message for N2 interface, and NR node_A122 that receives this is an RRC message to UE_A10. You may include it in and send it.
- the registration refusal message transmitted by AMF_A240 is not limited to this as long as it is a message that rejects the request of UE_A10.
- AMF_A240 may send the registration refusal message including an SM message indicating refusal such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or reject the registration.
- the inclusion of the meaning SM message may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
- UE_A10 may further receive an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
- UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected by receiving the registration refusal message or by not receiving the registration acceptance message.
- Each device completes the procedure (B) during this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
- Each device completes this procedure (registration procedure) based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) during this procedure.
- Each device may transition to the state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or the procedure (B) during this procedure.
- UE_A10 may remain unregistered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state) based on the completion of. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of this procedure, or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
- each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
- the first condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the registration request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the first condition determination may be true if the network allows the request for UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be true if the network to which UE_A10 is registered and / or the device in the network supports the function required by UE_A10, and false if it does not support it. Good. Further, the first condition determination may be true if the network determines that it is in a congested state, and may be false if it is determined that it is not in a congested state. The condition for determining the truth of the first condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether or not AMF_A240 has received the SM, and may be executed based on whether or not the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, the fourth condition determination may be true if AMF_A240 receives SM and / or if the registration request message contains an SM message, if AMF_A240 does not receive SM, and / Or it may be false if the registration request message does not contain the SM message.
- the condition for determining the truth of the fourth condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is also referred to as this procedure.
- This procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session.
- each device may execute this procedure in a state where the registration procedure is completed, or may execute this procedure in the registration procedure. Further, each device may start the main procedure in the registered state, or may start the main procedure at an arbitrary timing after the registration procedure.
- each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing this procedure a plurality of times.
- UE_A10 starts the PDU session establishment procedure by sending a PDU session establishment request (PDU Session Establishment Request) message to the core network_B via the access network_B (S1100).
- PDU Session Establishment Request PDU Session Establishment Request
- the UE sends a PDU session establishment request message to SMF_A230 in the core network_B190 and initiates the PDU session establishment procedure.
- UE_A10 uses the N1 interface to send a PDU session establishment request message to AMF_A240 in the core network_B190 via NR node_A122 (S1100).
- AMF_A receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition determination.
- the third condition determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A accepts the request of UE_A10.
- AMF_A determines whether the fifth condition determination is true or false. If the third condition determination is true, the core network_B starts processing # 1 in the core network (S1101), and if the third condition determination is false, the procedure (B) in this procedure is performed. Start. The step when the third condition determination is false will be described later.
- the process # 1 in the core network may be SMF selection by AMF_A in the core network_B190 and / or transmission / reception of a PDU session establishment request message between AMF_A and SMF_A.
- Core network_B190 starts processing # 1 in the core network.
- AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 as the routing destination NF for the PDU session establishment request message, and uses the N11 interface to send or forward the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF_A230. May be good.
- AMF_A240 may select the routing destination SMF_A230 based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment request message. More specifically, the AMF_A240 is an identification information and / or a subscriber information acquired based on the reception of a PDU session establishment request message, and / or a network capability information, and / or an operator policy, and / or a network.
- the routing destination SMF_A230 may be selected based on the state and / or the context already held by AMF_A240.
- the PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message may be any message that requests the establishment of the PDU session, and is not limited to this.
- UE_A10 may include one or more identification information among the first to fourth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message, and by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 is indicated. May be good.
- two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- UE_A10 transmits the first and / or second identification and / or third identification and / or fourth identification by including it in the PDU session establishment request message.
- UE_A10 is a network in a PDU session established for a DN identified by the second identification by transmitting the first identification and the second identification in association with each other. It may request the establishment of a PDU session that belongs to the slice, it may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, as requested by UE_A10, or it may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
- UE_A10 may make a request combining the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information among the first to fourth identification information. It should be noted that what UE_A10 indicates by transmitting each identification information does not have to be limited to these.
- UE_A10 determines which identification information to be included in the PDU session establishment request message among the first to fourth identification information, the capability information of UE_A10 and / or the policy such as UE policy, and / or the application of UE_A10. It may be determined based on the reference and / or the application (upper layer). Note that UE_A10 is not limited to determining which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment request message.
- SMF_A230 in core network_B190 receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition determination.
- the third condition determination is for determining whether or not SMF_A230 accepts the request of UE_A10.
- SMF_A230 determines whether the third condition determination is true or false.
- SMF_A230 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the third condition judgment is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the third condition judgment is false. The step when the third condition determination is false will be described later.
- SMF_A230 selects UPF_A235 to establish the PDU session and executes the eleventh condition determination.
- the eleventh condition determination is for determining whether or not each device executes the process # 2 in the core network.
- process # 2 in the core network is the start and / or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication procedure by each device, and / or the session establishment request between SMF_A and UPF_A in the core network_B190 (Session Establishment request). Sending and receiving messages and / or sending and receiving Session Establishment response messages, etc. may be included (S1103).
- SMF_A230 determines whether the eleventh condition determination is true or false. SMF_A230 starts the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure when the eleventh condition determination is true, and omits the PDU session establishment authentication approval approval procedure when the eleventh condition determination is false. The details of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure for process # 2 in the core network will be described later.
- SMF_A230 sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF_A235 based on the completion of the eleventh condition determination and / or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure, and starts the procedure (A) during this procedure. To do.
- SMF_A230 may start the procedure (B) in this procedure without starting the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure.
- SMF_A230 is the identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the capability information of the network, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the operator policy, and / or the state of the network. And / or one or more UPF_A235s may be selected based on the context already held by SMF_A230. When a plurality of UPF_A235s are selected, SMF_A230 may send a session establishment request message to each UPF_A235.
- UPF_A235 receives the session establishment request message and creates a context for the PDU session.
- UPF_A235 receives a session establishment request message and / or sends a session establishment response message to SMF_A230 based on creating a context for the PDU session.
- SMF_A230 receives a session establishment response message.
- the session establishment request message and the session establishment response message may be control messages sent and received on the N4 interface. Further, the session establishment response message may be a response message to the session establishment request message.
- SMF_A230 may assign an address to be assigned to UE_A10 based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of UPF_A235 and / or the reception of the session establishment response message. Note that SMF_A230 may assign the address assigned to UE_A10 during the PDU session establishment procedure or after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
- the address when SMF_A230 assigns an IPv4 address without using DHCPv4, the address may be assigned during the PDU session establishment procedure, or the assigned address may be transmitted to UE_A10. Furthermore, when SMF_A230 assigns an IPv4 address and / or an IPv6 address and / or an IPv6 prefix using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6 or SLAAC (Stateless Address Autoconfiguration), the address may be assigned after the PDU session establishment procedure. The assigned address may be sent to UE_A10.
- the address allocation performed by SMF_A230 is not limited to these.
- SMF_A230 may include the assigned address in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and send it to UE_A10 based on the completion of address assignment of the address assigned to UE_A10, or send it to UE_A10 after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed. You may.
- SMF_A230 sends to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 based on the receipt of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of UPF_A235 and / or the reception of the session establishment response message and / or the completion of address assignment of the address assigned to UE_A10.
- SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to AMF_A240 using the N11 interface
- AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
- SMF_A230 may include the PDU session ID and / or DNN and / or S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different PDU session ID. Further, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the PDU session ID selected by the network.
- the DNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the DNN included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different DNN.
- the DNN contained in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the DNN selected by the network or the default DNN.
- the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different S-NSSAI. Further, the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the S-NSSAI selected by the network or the default S-NSSAI.
- SMF_A230 may include mapped S-NSSAI (mapped S-NSSAI) in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- SMF_A230 may include the mapped S-NSSAI along with the S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the mapped S-NSSAI may be the mapped S-NSSAI of the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the mapped S-NSSAI may be the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN associated with the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be associated with each other, and the mapped S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN may be associated with each other. ..
- the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a PDN connectivity accept message. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this, and may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been accepted.
- UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message from SMF_A230. UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message by receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- UE_A10 sends a PDU session establishment complete message to SMF_A230 via AMF_A240 based on the completion of receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message (S1114).
- SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment completion message and executes the second condition determination.
- UE_A10 uses the N1 interface to send a PDU session establishment completion message to AMF_A240, and AMF_A240, which receives the PDU session establishment completion message, sends a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
- the PDU session establishment completion message may be a PDN connection completion (PDN Connectivity complete) message or a default EPS bearer context activation acceptance (Activate default EPS bearer context accept) message.
- PDN connection completion PDN Connectivity complete
- Activate default EPS bearer context accept PDN connection completion
- the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface.
- the PDU session establishment completion message may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
- the second condition determination is for SMF_A230 to determine the type of message sent and received on the N4 interface. If the second condition determination is true, processing # 3 in the core network may be started (S1115). Here, the process # 3 in the core network may include transmission / reception of a session modification request message and / or transmission / reception of a session modification response message. SMF_A230 sends a session change request message to UPF_A235, and further receives a session change acceptance message sent by UPF_A235 that received the session change request message. If the second condition determination is false, SMF_A230 executes process # 2 in the core network. That is, SMF_A sends a session establishment request message to UPF_A235, and further receives a session change acceptance message sent by UPF_A235 that has received the session establishment request message.
- Each device is in the process of this procedure based on sending and receiving PDU session establishment completion messages, / or sending and receiving session change response messages, and / or sending and receiving session establishment response messages, and / or sending and receiving RA (Router Advertisement).
- PDU session establishment completion messages / or sending and receiving session change response messages
- RA Send and receiving session establishment response messages
- RA Send and receiving RA
- SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment reject message to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 (S1122), and starts the procedure (B) during this procedure.
- SMF_A230 uses the N11 interface to send a PDU session establishment rejection message to AMF_A240, and AMF_A240, which receives the PDU session establishment request message, sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
- the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a PDN connectivity reject message. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message is not limited to this, and may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been rejected.
- SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the 11th to 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message, and by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 is rejected. You may show that.
- two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- SMF_A230 contains the eleventh identification information and / or the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information and / or the fourteenth identification information and / or the fifteenth identification information and / or.
- the request to establish a PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected by sending the 16th identification information and / or the 17th identification information and / or the 18th identification information by including it in the PDU session establishment refusal message. It may indicate that it has been done, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
- the SMF_A230 transmits the 18th identification information and the 12th identification information in association with each other, so that the network can be used in a PDU session established for the DN identified by the 12th identification information. It may indicate that the request to establish a PDU session belonging to the slice has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
- SMF_A230 sends the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message to allow the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the registration area and / or tracking area to which UE_A10 currently belongs. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
- SMF_A230 rejected the request to establish a PDU session belonging to the network slice in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected by sending the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message. It may indicate that, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
- SMF_A230 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the eleventh identification information and / or the fourteenth identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message and transmitting it, or after the completion of this procedure. , May indicate whether or not the same procedure as this procedure should be carried out again.
- SMF_A230 may make a request combining the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information out of the eleventh to eighteenth identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by SMF_A230 by transmitting each identification information are not limited to these.
- SMF_A230 indicates which of the 11th to 18th identification information is to be included in the PDU session establishment refusal message, the received identification information and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, etc. It may be decided based on the policy of the above and / or the state of the network.
- the twelfth identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the second identification information.
- the thirteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the third identification information.
- the eighteenth identification information may be information transmitted when the first identification information is received and / or when the network slice indicated by the first identification information is not permitted by the network. The decision by SMF_A230 as to which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment refusal message is not limited to this.
- the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management applied to UE_A10 by sending a PDU session establishment refusal message. It should be noted that this indicates that the core network_B190 applies congestion management to UE_A10 and / or performs congestion management to UE_A10, and / or information that identifies the type of congestion management to be applied. , And / or notify the information that identifies the target of congestion management such as DNN and / or S-NSSAI corresponding to the applied congestion management, and / or the value of the timer associated with the applied congestion management. May be good.
- each of the above-mentioned information may be information identified by one or more identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the PDU session establishment refusal message received by UE_A10 from SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- UE_A10 performs the fourth process based on the reception of the PDU session establishment refusal message (S1124). In addition, UE_A10 may carry out the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure.
- the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. .. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been rejected.
- the fourth process is the process in which UE_A10 sets the value indicated by the 14th identification information as the first timer value. Alternatively, it may be a process of starting the first timer for which a timer value is set. Further, when UE_A10 receives the eleventh identification information, the fourth process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
- the fourth process is that the UE_A10 identifies the NW slice included in the 18th identification information and the 18th identification information. It may be a process of executing the twelfth behavior based on the network slice association rule included in the above or the network slice association rule held and set in advance by UE_A10.
- the fourth process is that the UE_A10 has a plurality of first timers included in each of the 14th identification information, and the UE_A10 It may be a process of executing the thirteenth behavior based on the priority management rule of the backoff timer to be held.
- the fourth process is that the UE_A10 is based on the plurality of first timers contained in each of the 14th identification information. It may be a process for executing the 14th behavior.
- the twelfth to fifteenth behaviors may be congestion management led by UE_A10 based on the rules and / or policies inside UE_A10.
- UE_A10 has a policy (UE policy; UE policy) and / or rule, a policy and / or rule management function, and a policy and / in the internal storage unit and / or control unit of UE_A10.
- a policy enforcer that runs UE_A10 based on rules, one or more applications, and a session management instance (session) for managing one or more PDU sessions that try to establish or establish based on requests from each application.
- congestion management led by UE_A10 may be realized by executing any of the twelfth to fifteenth behaviors as the fourth process.
- the policy and / or the rule may include any one or more of the network slice association rule, and / or the priority management rule of the backoff timer, and / or NSSP (Network Slice Selection Policy), and further. , These may be preset in UE_A10 or may have been received from the network.
- the policy enforcer may be NSSP enforcer.
- the application may be an application layer protocol, and may try to establish or establish a PDU session based on a request from the application layer protocol.
- the session management instance may be a software element dynamically generated for each PDU session.
- S-NSSAI may be grouped, or processing based on the grouping of S-NSSAI may be executed.
- the internal configuration and processing of UE_A10 are not limited to these, and each element may be realized by software, or may be executed as software processing inside UE_A10.
- UE_A10 may switch to EPS in the fourth process or based on the completion of the fourth process, or may start location registration in EPS based on the DCN ID contained in the 18th identification information. Good.
- the switching of UE_A10 to EPS may be based on the handover procedure, or may be RAT switching led by UE_A10.
- UE_A10 may execute switching to EPS during the 4th process or after the completion of the 4th process.
- the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 starts this procedure again after a certain period of time, or a process in which the request of UE_A10 transitions to a limited or restricted state.
- UE_A10 may transition to the first state when the fourth process is completed.
- the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. ..
- a process of identifying application of congestion management may be executed based on one or more of the identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the fourth process which of the first to fourth congestion management types is used, based on one or more of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- the process of identifying whether to apply and the process of identifying the DNN and / or S-NSSAI associated with the congestion management to be applied may be executed. More specifically, this process may be the process described in the fifteenth behavior.
- the value to be set in may be identified and set, and the count of the first timer may be started. More specifically, this process may be the process described in the eighth behavior.
- one or more of the first to seventh actions may be executed with the start or completion of any of the above-mentioned processes.
- one or more of the ninth to fifteenth actions may be executed with the start or completion of any of the above-mentioned processes.
- UE_A10 may transition to the first state when the fourth process is completed.
- the fourth process is a process in which a part of the plurality of detailed processes described in the first example and a part of the plurality of detailed processes described in the second example are combined. May be good.
- UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected by receiving the PDU session establishment rejection message or by not receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- Each device completes the procedure (B) during this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) during this procedure.
- each device may transition to the state in which the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or based on the completion of the procedure (B) during this procedure. , You may recognize that this procedure has been rejected, you may transition to a state where the PDU session has not been established, or you may transition to the first state.
- each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
- UE_A10 may carry out the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure, or may transition to the first state after the completion of the fourth process.
- the third condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the third condition determination may be true if the network allows the request for UE_A10. Further, the third condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the request of UE_A10. Furthermore, the third condition determination may be true if the network to which UE_A10 is connected and / or the device in the network supports the function required by UE_A10, and false if it does not support it. Good. Further, the third condition determination may be true if the network determines that it is in a congested state, and may be false if it is determined that it is not in a congested state. The condition for determining the truth of the third condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the second condition determination may be executed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established. For example, the second condition determination may be true if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established and false if it is not.
- the condition for determining the truth of the second condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the eleventh condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the eleventh condition determination may be true if the network allows authentication and / or approval by DN_A5 to be performed during this procedure. In addition, the eleventh condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the authentication and / or approval by DN_A5 to be carried out during this procedure. In addition, the eleventh condition determination is true if the network to which UE_A10 is connected and / or devices within the network support that DN_A5 authentication and / or approval be performed during this procedure. If you don't support it, you can fake it.
- the eleventh condition determination may be true if the 61st identification information is received, and may be false if it is not received. In other words, the eleventh condition determination may be true if a container containing information such as SM PDU DN Request Container and / or a plurality of information is received, and false if it is not received. Good.
- the condition for determining the truth of the eleventh condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the core network_B190 By sending and receiving the PDU session establishment refusal message in the above procedure, the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management to be applied to the UE_A10, and the UE_A10 can apply the congestion management instructed by the core network_B190.
- the core networks B190 and UE_A10 may apply a plurality of congestion managements by executing the procedures and processes described in this procedure a plurality of times. Note that each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
- This procedure is a procedure for session management that is executed by the network for the established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
- UE_A10 may stop applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure.
- the core network_B190 stops applying congestion management that can be identified using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information of this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
- this procedure may be a network-led PDU session change (PDU session modification) procedure and / or a network-led PDU session release (PDU session release) procedure, etc., and is not limited to these. You may perform the session management procedure of.
- Each device may send and receive a PDU session change message in the network-led PDU session change procedure, and may send and receive a PDU session release message in the network-led PDU session release procedure.
- each device in UE_A10 and core network_B190 that has transitioned to the first state (S1200) based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure is network-driven session management at any time.
- the device in the core network_B190 that initiates this procedure may be SMF_A and / or AMF_A, and UE_A may send and receive messages in this procedure via AMF_A and / or access network_B. ..
- the device in the core network_B190 sends a network-driven session management request message to UE_A (S1202).
- the device in the core network_B190 may include the 21st identification information in the network-driven session management request message, or may indicate the request of the core network_B190 by including this identification information. ..
- the device in core network_B190 may include the PDU session ID in the network-driven session management request message, or by including the PDU session ID, it can be modified for the PDU session identified by the PDU session ID. May be required to do.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message may be the PDU session ID of the established PDU session. Furthermore, when this procedure is executed based on the UE-led session management procedure, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU included in the PDU session change request message or the PDU session release request message. It may be the same as the session ID.
- UE_A which receives the network-led session management request message, sends a network-led session management completion message (S1204). Further, UE_A may execute the fifth process (S1206) based on the 21st identification information received from the core network_B190, and complete this procedure. In addition, UE_A10 may carry out the fifth process based on the completion of this procedure.
- UE_A10 may include the PDU session ID in the network-led session management completion message.
- the PDU session ID included in the network-driven session management completion message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the network-driven session management request message.
- the fifth processing example will be described below.
- the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the core network_B190, or may be a process in which the request of the core network_B190 is recognized. Further, the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. ..
- the message sent / received by the network-driven session management request may be a PDU session change command (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND), a PDU session release command (PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND), or these. Not limited to.
- the UE_A10 may perform the congestion management identification process applied by the UE_A10 based on the received 21st identification information in the fifth process.
- the congestion management identification process may be the 17th behavior.
- the 5th process may be the 16th behavior. Specifically, for example, it may be a process of stopping one or a plurality of timers executed based on the above-mentioned fourth process.
- the UE_A10 that received the 21st identification information identifies the congestion management that makes the stop or change instructed by the network by executing the 17th action, and then executes the 16th action. By doing so, the identified congestion management is stopped or changed.
- each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
- UE_A10 may carry out the fifth process based on the completion of this procedure, or may complete this procedure after the completion of the fifth process.
- the core network_B190 can instruct UE_A10 to stop or change the congestion management that UE_A10 has already applied.
- UE_A10 can suspend or change the congestion management applied by UE_A10 based on the network-driven session management request message.
- the congestion management that implements the stop or change is identified based on the reception of the identification information contained in the network-driven session management request message from the core network_B190. You may.
- each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
- each device performs a first network-driven session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or transmission / reception of a network-driven session management request message and / or a network-driven session management completion message. Complete.
- UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the first network-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the transmission and reception of the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management completion message.
- the procedure explained in the first network-driven session management procedure example explained in Chapter 1.3.3.1 may be a procedure executed according to congestion management.
- congestion management For example, among one or more congestion managements applied by UE_A10, it is a procedure executed for congestion management classified into the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management. Good.
- UE_A10 may stop the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the congestion management corresponding to the fourth congestion management by the fifth process.
- UE_10 receives a network-driven session management request message for the second congestion management while executing the count of the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management, the UE_A10 will be the second. It is also possible to respond to the core network_B190 without stopping the backoff timer associated with congestion management.
- UE_A10 received a network-driven session management request message for congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN while the backoff timer count associated with S-NSSAI # A was running. In some cases, UE_A10 may also respond to core network_B190 without stopping the backoff timer associated with S-NSSAI # A.
- UE_A10 in receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190, but congestion management. May continue. Therefore, the transmission of UE-led session management request messages regulated by the second congestion management may continue to be suppressed.
- the network-driven session management request message in this procedure may be a PDU session change command (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND) message in the network-driven PDU session modification (PDU session modification) procedure.
- PDU session modification PDU session modification
- PDU session release command PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND
- the network-driven session management request message in this procedure may include the PDU session ID.
- the PDU session ID may be the same as the PDU session ID described in the first network-driven session management procedure described in Section 1.3.3.1.
- the network-led session management completion message that responds to the PDU session change command message in this procedure may be a PDU session change completion message (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE), and may be a PDU session release command message.
- the network-led session management completion message that responds to the response may be a PDU session release completion message (PDU SESSION RELEASE COMPLETE).
- PDU SESSION RELEASE COMPLETE PDU SESSION RELEASE COMPLETE
- the network-led session management completion message in this procedure may include the PDU session ID.
- the PDU session ID may be the same as the PDU session ID described in the first network-driven session management procedure described in Section 1.3.3.1.
- the process may be executed as follows.
- the information indicating the reactivation request (Reactivation Required) is the information indicating that the activation is requested, and a specific example is the 5G session management reason value # 39 (5GSM Cause # 39). Good.
- UE_A10 When UE_A10 receives a network-driven session management request message containing information indicating a reactivation request, it re-leads the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure immediately after completing the network-driven session management procedure. Instead, wait for congestion management to be released and re-lead the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure.
- this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session.
- PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
- waiting for the release of congestion management may be executed after the timer associated with the second congestion management has expired. In other words, it may be executed after the timer value associated with the second congestion management is completed and / or after the timer value associated with the second congestion management becomes zero.
- UE_A10 may include the following supplementary information in the network-led session management completion message.
- the supplementary information may be information indicating that the timer is waiting to expire and / or information indicating the remaining timer value.
- the timer may be a timer associated with the second congestion management. Further, waiting for the expiration of the timer may be executed after the timer has expired (Expire). In other words, it may be executed after the timer value associated with the second congestion management is completed and / or after the timer value associated with the second congestion management becomes zero.
- the core network B_190 may receive a network-led session management completion message containing supplementary information and recognize the value of the remaining timer. Furthermore, it may be recognized that the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure is led after the time indicated by the remaining timer has elapsed.
- the remaining timer recognized by the core network_B190 may be the value indicated by the received supplementary information, or the offset between the transmission time of UE_A10 and the reception time of the core network_B190 of the network-led session management completion message. May be a value in consideration of the value indicated by the received supplementary information.
- the first process and procedure example when the information indicating the reactivation request is received is not limited to the second process and procedure example when the information indicating the reactivation request is received as follows. It may be executed.
- UE_A10 in receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190. , Congestion management may be continued. Therefore, while the transmission of UE-led session management request messages regulated by the second congestion management continues to be suppressed, UE_A10 and / or core network_B190 goes through the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure. It may be set to be acceptable as long as it leads again.
- UE_A10 if UE_A10 receives a network-driven session management request message that contains information indicating a reactivation request, the UE_A10 will have a UE-led PDU session after the network-driven network-driven session management procedure is complete. Lead the establishment procedure again.
- this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session. PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
- UE_A10 and core network B190 may execute and complete the procedures allowed as an exception to this exception, but UE_A10 is suppressed by the second congestion management.
- Other UE-led session management procedures may be deterred.
- the process is not limited to the first and second processes and procedure examples when the information indicating the reactivation request is received, and the third process and the procedure when the information indicating the reactivation request is received are as follows.
- a procedure example may be executed.
- UE_A10 when receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190. In addition, UE_A10 may stop applying the second congestion management when it receives a network-driven session management request message that contains information indicating a reactivation request.
- UE_A10 may continue congestion management if the network-driven session management request message does not contain information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required). In this case, the transmission of the UE-led session management request message regulated by the second congestion management may continue to be suppressed.
- this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session.
- PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
- the information indicating the reactivation request is transmitted by the core network_B190 as shown below. It may be set not to be performed.
- the core network_B190 should include information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required) when sending a network-driven session management request message to UE_A10 to which congestion management is applied. It may be set to suppress.
- the core network_B190 suppresses the inclusion of information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required) when sending a network-driven session management request message to UE_A10 to which the second congestion management is applied. May be set to.
- core network_B190 The processing and procedures of UE_A10 and core network B190 have been explained above, but the processing of core network_B190 described in this chapter is more specifically the devices in core network_B190, SMF_A230 and /. Alternatively, it may be a process executed by a control device such as AMF_A240. Therefore, when the core network B190 sends and receives a control message, it may mean that a control device such as SMF_A230 and / or AMF_A240, which is a device in the core network_B190, sends and receives a control message.
- a control device such as SMF_A230 and / or AMF_A240, which is a device in the core network_B190, sends and receives a control message.
- canceling the application to congestion management or stopping congestion management may include a process of stopping the backoff timer associated with congestion management, and for congestion management.
- Continuing application, or continuing congestion management may include continuing counting of backoff timers associated with congestion management.
- the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management procedure Has explained that UE_A10 is for congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN.
- this congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN are associated with the network-driven session management request messages in this chapter and / or the PDU session targeted by the network-driven session management procedure. It can be NSSAI # A and any DNN.
- UE_A10 and core network_B190 may execute the anchor relocation procedure of SSC mode 2 including the procedure of this chapter, and switch to the anchor of the PDU session or the PDU session with a different anchor to continue the communication.
- the anchor relocation procedure in SSC mode 2 is a procedure initiated by the core network_B190, and the procedure associated with the transmission of the PDU session release command executed within this procedure is one of the procedures described in this chapter. May be.
- UE_A10 and core network_B190 may execute the anchor relocation procedure of SSC mode 3 including the procedure of this chapter, and switch to the anchor of the PDU session or the PDU session with a different anchor to continue the communication.
- the anchor relocation procedure in SSC mode 3 is a procedure initiated by the core network_B190, and the procedure associated with the transmission of the PDU session change command executed within this procedure is one of the procedures described in this chapter. May be.
- the processing when UE_A10 changes the PLMN will be described, especially when the first congestion management is applied.
- the first congestion management and the processing regulated when the first congestion management is applied may be as described above.
- the first congestion management may be DNN-based congestion management.
- the NW receives a UE-led session management request using DNN # A from UE_A10 and the NW detects congestion for a specific DNN, for example, DNN # A.
- It may be congestion management applied by NW to UE_A10 based on the message rejecting the UE-led session management request.
- UE_A10 starts counting the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management received from the NW, and DNN # A until the backoff timer expires. It may be set not to send UE-led session management requests using.
- DNN may mean including DNN information in a UE-led session management request such as a PDU session establishment request message.
- first congestion management is referred to as "first congestion management for a specific DNN”.
- the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and set it as the congestion management target even if the UE-led session management request does not include the DNN information.
- the first congestion management is UE-driven session management when the NW receives a UE-driven session management request without DNN information from UE_A10 and the NW detects congestion for the default DNN. It may be the congestion management that the NW applies to UE_A10 based on the message rejecting the request.
- UE_A10 starts counting the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management received from the NW and uses the DNN until the backoff timer expires. It may be configured not to send UE-led session management requests.
- DNN may mean that DNN information is not included in the UE-led session management request such as the PDU session establishment request message.
- the first congestion management for the default DNN is distinguished from the first congestion management for a specific DNN because it is applied based on the UE-led session management request that does not use the DNN information. Therefore, it is expressed as "congestion management for No DNN".
- a UE-led session management request such as a PDU session establishment request message that does not use DNN is expressed as a UE-led session management request that uses No DNN.
- the PDU session establishment request message using No DNN is a PDU session establishment request message not using DNN.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN in the PLMN change, or the back associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN. If the off-timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN to be able to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
- UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
- the first congestion management for a specific DNN may be associated with the PLMN.
- the UE will start counting by associating the backoff timer with the PLMN and the particular DNN and back if the backoff timer is not zero or deactivated.
- the PLMN associated with the off-timer does not establish a PDU session using the specific DNN associated with the back-off timer.
- the backoff timer is deactivated, the PDU using the specific DNN associated with the backoff timer in the PLMN associated with the backoff timer until the terminal is turned off or the USIM is taken out. Do not establish a session.
- the PLMN associated with the backoff timer may establish a PDU session using a specific DNN associated with the backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the specific DNN and the PLMN before the change, or when the specific DNN and the PLMN before the change are counted. If the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the PLMN is deactivated, then the count of the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the specific DNN and the modified PLMN If you have not done so and the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the particular DNN and the modified PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be in this particular PLMN in the new PLMN. It may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message using the DNN. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message with this particular DNN based on this setting.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN in the PLMN change, or the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured to send PDU session establishment request messages without DNN in the new PLMN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
- UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
- the first congestion management for NoDNN may be associated with PLMN.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN, which is associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change.
- the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN is deactivated, the count of the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the modified PLMN. If the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be PDUped in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send session establishment request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
- UE_A10 may perform the same processing regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN.
- the UE_A10 when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, it counts the backoff timer of the first congestion management associated with the PLMN before the change, or the first PLMN associated with the change. When the congestion management backoff timer is deactivated, the first congestion management backoff timer associated with the changed PLMN is not counted, and the changed PLMN is used. If the associated first congestion management backoff timer is not deactivated, the UE_A10 will be regulated by the congestion management associated with the old PLMN in the new PLMN, the specific DNN. It may be configured to be able to send a PDU session establishment request message using the and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using the DNN.
- UE_A10 may execute different processing depending on whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN in the PLMN change, or the back associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN. If the off-timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN.
- UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
- the first congestion management for a particular DNN may be applied to different PLMNs.
- UE_A10 is associated with the count of the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN in the change of PLMN, or is associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured to send PDU session establishment request messages without DNN in the new PLMN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
- UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
- the first congestion management for NoDNN may be associated with PLMN.
- the UE will start counting by associating the backoff timer with PLMN and NoDNN, and if the backoff timer is not zero or deactivated, the backoff timer In the PLMN associated with, do not establish a PDU session using the No DNN associated with the backoff timer. Also, if the backoff timer is deactivated, the PLMN associated with the backoff timer will have a PDU session using the NoDNN associated with the backoff timer until the terminal is turned off or the USIM is taken out. Do not establish. When the backoff timer is zero, the PLMN associated with the backoff timer may establish a PDU session using the No DNN associated with the backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN, which is associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change.
- the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN When the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN is deactivated, the count of the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the modified PLMN. If the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be PDUped in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send session establishment request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
- the processing associated with the above-mentioned PLMN change whether the same processing or different processing is performed regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN is determined in advance in UE_A10. It may be set based on the set information, but it may be determined by whether or not the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change. For example, if the second PLMN after the change is not an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, the same processing may be applied. Further, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, different processing may be executed.
- UE_A10 may determine its behavior based not only on whether or not it is an equal PLMN, but also on the basis of further detailed conditions. For example, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change, and when the second PLMN after the change is changed. UE_A10 may be set to perform different behavior depending on whether it is an equal PLMN with respect to the previous first PLMN and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- the behavior of UE_A10 executed in each case may be one of the behaviors at the time of PLMN change described so far.
- the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN, or is associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN, or backoff associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If the timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send a PDU session establishment request message without a DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages without using DNN.
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change.
- the first congestion management backoff timer for NoDNN is deactivated, the first congestion management backoff timer for NoDNN associated with the changed PLMN is further counted.
- the UE_A10 will establish a PDU session in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change
- the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 is associated with the PLMN before the change when counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for a specific DNN associated with the PLMN before the change in such a PLMN change.
- the first congestion management backoff timer for a specific DNN is deactivated
- the first congestion management backoff timer for the specific DNN associated with the modified PLMN is also If the count is not done and the first congestion management backoff timer for the particular DNN associated with the PLMN is not deactivated, the UE_A10 will generate the particular DNN in the new PLMN. It may be configured to send the PDU session establishment request message used. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message with a particular DNN based on this setting.
- UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN and / or NoDNN in these PLMN changes. Thereby, UE_A10 may be set so that UE_A10 can send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific DNN and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific DNN in the new PLMN. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific DNN and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific DNN.
- whether the same processing or different processing is performed regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN may be set based on the information set in UE_A10 in advance. However, as mentioned above, it may be determined by whether or not the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, but regardless of the first congestion management, the second It may be set so that different processes are executed also for the fourth congestion management. For example, if the second PLMN after the change is not an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, the same processing may be applied. Further, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, different processing may be executed.
- UE_A10 may determine its behavior based not only on whether or not it is an equal PLMN, but also on the basis of further detailed conditions. For example, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change, and when the second PLMN after the change is changed. UE_A10 may be set to perform different behavior depending on whether it is an equal PLMN with respect to the previous first PLMN and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- the behavior of UE_A10 executed in each case may be one of the behaviors at the time of PLMN change described so far.
- the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI in these PLMN changes, or for the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI. If the associated backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular S-NSSAI. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular S-NSSAI.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management for No. S-NSSAI, or corresponds to the first congestion management for No. S-NSSAI. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send a PDU session establishment request message without using the S-NSSAI. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages without using S-NSSAI.
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the second congestion management for No. S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN before the change, or associates it with the PLMN before the change.
- the second congestion management back-off timer for the No. S-NSSAI is deactivated, the second congestion management back for the No. S-NSSAI associated with the changed PLMN.
- the UE_A10 will be in the new PLMN. It may be set so that the PDU session establishment request message can be sent without using S-NSSAI. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without using S-NSSAI.
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN before the change, or corresponds to the PLMN before the change. If the attached second congestion management backoff timer for the specific S-NSSAI is deactivated, then the second congestion for the specific S-NSSAI associated with the modified PLMN.
- UE_A10 is new if the management backoff timer is not counting and the second congestion management backoff timer for a particular S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN is not deactivated.
- the PLMN may be configured to be able to send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI.
- UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with a second congestion management for a particular S-NSSAI and / or No S-NSSAI in these PLMN changes.
- UE_A10 is set so that UE_A10 can send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific S-NSSAI in the new PLMN.
- UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific S-NSSAI.
- the following is an example when the third congestion management is applied.
- the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes, or the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN]. If the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for] is deactivated, the UE_A10 will use this particular [S-NSSAI, DNN] to send a PDU session establishment request message in the new PLMN. May be set not to do. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular [S-NSSAI, DNN].
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes, or for [No S-NSSAI, DNN].
- UE_A10 is set to not send the PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. You can. Therefore, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] based on this setting.
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change
- the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the third congestion management for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN before the change, or before the change.
- UE_A10 may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN].
- the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
- UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the third congestion management for a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN before the change, or before the change.
- the third congestion management backoff timer for the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN of the is deactivated, the specific PLMN associated with the modified PLMN is further deactivated.
- the third congestion management backoff timer for the [S-NSSAI, DNN] is not counted, and the third congestion management for the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN. If the backoff timer has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message with a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN].
- UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with a third congestion management for a particular [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes. ..
- UE_A10 sends a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. It may be set so that it can be done. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or a PDU session establishment request message for [No S-NSSAI, DNN]. .
- the deactivation of the backoff timer may mean that the congestion management associated with the backoff timer and / or the backoff timer has transitioned to the deactivated state.
- UE_A10 may deactivate the backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer when it receives a timer value indicating deactivation.
- the congestion management associated with the deactivated backoff timer and / or the backoff timer may be associated with congestion management types 1 to 4.
- the congestion management type associated with the deactivated backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer may be similarly determined and recognized when the backoff timer value is received.
- UE_A10 receives the 14th and 15th identification information from the NW indicating that the backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer is deactivated. You may deactivate the backoff timer for the type of congestion management indicated by the fifteenth identification.
- the application of congestion management may be continued until the power of the terminal is turned off or USIM is taken out.
- the processing regulated at that time may be the same as the processing regulated when the backoff timer is counted according to each type of congestion management.
- each device performs a second network-driven session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or transmission / reception of a network-driven session management request message and / or a network-driven session management completion message. Complete.
- UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the second network-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the transmission and reception of the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management completion message.
- This procedure is a procedure for session management that the UE takes the initiative in executing an established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
- UE_A10 may stop applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure.
- the core network_B190 stops applying congestion management that can be identified using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information of this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
- UE_A10 may start applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure.
- the core network_B190 initiates the application of identifiable congestion management using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information for this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
- this procedure may be a UE-led PDU session change (PDU session modification) procedure and / or a UE-led PDU session release (PDU session release) procedure, etc., and is not limited to these. You may perform the session management procedure of.
- each device sends and receives a PDU session change request message and / or a PDU session change command message and / or a PDU session change completion message and / or a PDU session change rejection message. You may.
- each device completes the UE-led session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led session management request message and / or the UE-led session management completion message.
- UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may execute the UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer described later based on the transmission / reception of the UE-led session management request message and / or the UE-led session management completion message.
- UE_A10 that has transitioned to the first state (S1300) based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure at any time. It can. In other words, UE_A10 may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure for the established PDU session at any time. In other words, UE_A10 may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure using the same PDU session ID as the established PDU session at any time.
- UE_A10 starts the UE-led PDU session change procedure by sending a PDU session change request message to SMF_A230 (S1302).
- UE_A10 may include the PDU session ID in the PDU session change request message, or requests that the PDU session identified by the PDU session ID be changed by including the PDU session ID. May be good.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message may be the PDU session ID of the established PDU session. Further, when the backoff timer associated with the DNN is executed, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU session ID for identifying the PDU session not associated with the DNN. It may be there. Further, when the backoff timer associated with S-NSSAI is executed, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is used to identify the PDU session not associated with S-NSSAI. It may be a PDU session ID.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU not associated with the DNN and S-NSSAI. It may be a PDU session ID for identifying the session.
- SMF_A230 receives the PDU session change request message sent by UE_A10. If SMF_A230 accepts the request of UE_A10, it initiates the network-led PDU session change procedure. Conversely, if SMF_A230 rejects the request of UE_A10, it sends a PDU session change refusal message to UE_A10. The case where SMF_A230 rejects the request of UE_A10 will be described below.
- SMF_A230 sends a PDU session change refusal message to UE_A10 based on the acceptance of the PDU session establishment request message (S1304).
- SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the 11th to 18th identification information in the PDU session change refusal message, may include the PDU session ID, and may include these identification information. Inclusion may indicate that the request for UE_A10 has been rejected.
- two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change refusal message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message.
- the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change refusal message may be the same as the PDU session ID provided by UE_A10 during this procedure.
- SMF_A230 may notify the congestion management applied to UE_A10 by sending a PDU session change refusal message.
- this indicates that the core network_B190 applies congestion management to UE_A10 and / or performs congestion management on UE_A10, and / or information that identifies the type of congestion management to apply.
- each of the above-mentioned information may be information identified by one or more identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
- UE_A10 receives the PDU session change refusal message.
- each device completes this procedure based on sending and receiving PDU session change rejection messages and / or completing network-driven PDU session change procedures.
- UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected based on the reception of the PDU session change refusal message.
- UE_A10 may perform a fourth process based on the receipt of the PDU session change rejection message. The fourth process may be carried out based on the completion of this procedure.
- the fourth process may be the same process as the behavior when UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. .. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been rejected.
- UE_A10 may recognize the congestion management to be applied by receiving the PDU session change refusal message. Note that the UE_A10 may thereby recognize that it applies congestion management and / or performs congestion management, information that identifies the type of congestion management that is applied, and / or DNN and / Or information that identifies the target of the applied congestion management such as S-NSSAI and / or the value of the timer associated with the applied congestion management may be stored and recognized.
- the UE_A10 when UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information and / or the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information, the UE_A10 sets the value indicated by the 14th identification information as the value of the backoff timer. Alternatively, a back-off timer with a timer value may be started. In other words, UE_A10 is the value indicated by the 14th identification information based on the receipt of the PDU session change rejection message containing the 11th identification information and / or the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information. May be set to the value of the backoff timer, or the backoff timer with the timer value set may be started.
- the back-off timer may be a back-off timer associated with the second congestion management, or may be a back-off timer associated with the third congestion management.
- the core network_B190 By sending and receiving the PDU session change refusal message in the above procedure, the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management to be applied to the UE_A10, and the UE_A10 can apply the congestion management instructed by the core network_B190.
- the core networks B190 and UE_A10 may apply a plurality of congestion managements by executing the procedures and processes described in this procedure a plurality of times. Note that each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
- each device completes the UE-led PDU session change procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led PDU session change refusal message.
- UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led PDU session change procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer described later based on the reception of the PDU session change refusal message.
- the UE-led PDU session release procedure may be the same procedure as the PDU session change procedure described above.
- the above-mentioned PDU session change request message may be read as a PDU session release request message.
- the above-mentioned PDU session change behavior message may be read as a PDU session release behavior message.
- this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure
- the behavior of SMF_A230 performed based on the reception of the PDU session release request message is the behavior of SMF_A230 performed based on the reception of the above-mentioned PDU session change request message. May be similar to.
- the behavior of UE_A10 performed based on the reception of the PDU session release refusal message is the behavior of UE_A10 performed based on the reception of the above-mentioned PDU session change rejection message. May be similar to.
- SMF_A230 may initiate a network-driven PDU session release procedure based on the receipt of the PDU session release request message, or release the PDU session to UE_A10. A rejection message may be sent.
- each device completes the UE-led PDU session release procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led PDU session release refusal message.
- UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led PDU session release procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer described later based on the reception of the PDU session release refusal message.
- UE processing example related to execution of backoff timer This chapter describes the UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer.
- the UE processing described in this chapter may be implemented based on the completion of the network-led session management procedure and / or the UE-led session management procedure.
- the UE processing described in this chapter is to receive a PDU session change command message and / or a PDU session release command message and / or a PDU session change rejection message and / or a PDU session release rejection message. It may be carried out based on the reception of.
- the processing of UE_A10 and NW due to the change of PLMN described so far has been described for the first congestion management and / or the backoff timer for the first congestion management, but the second congestion management has been described.
- the same processing may be performed for the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management.
- the PDU session establishment request message whose transmission is restricted or permitted may be a message according to each type.
- the backoff timer associated with congestion management and / or congestion management may be associated with the PLMN regardless of the type of congestion management.
- the backoff timer associated with arbitrary congestion management and / or congestion management may be set to be associated with the PLMN. Therefore, for the first congestion management, the second congestion management, and the third congestion management, the backoff timer associated with the congestion management and / or the congestion management is set to be associated with the PLMN. Good.
- the backoff timer associated with the congestion management and / or the congestion management can be associated with the PLMN. The first congestion management for a particular DNN that is set does not have to be associated with the PLMN.
- the processing when each congestion management is made compatible with PLMN and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to each congestion management is the above-mentioned first congestion management associated with PLMN.
- the first congestion management in the description of the processing and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management associated with the PLMN described above is the congestion management of each of the second to fourth types. It may be replaced with.
- the processing when each congestion management is not compatible with PLMN and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to each congestion management is the first processing not associated with PLMN as described above.
- the PDU session establishment request message whose transmission is restricted or permitted may be a message according to each type.
- the behavior at the time of PLMN change when executing the count of the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management and / or the third congestion management is executed as follows in addition to the above-mentioned processing. You may.
- the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management may be a backoff timer for slice-based congestion management as described above. Further, the backoff timer for slice-based congestion management may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in S-NSSAI and / or PLMN units.
- the slice-based backoff timer may be a timer that is associated with a specific S-NSSAI and prohibits the transmission of SM request messages using that specific S-NSSAI.
- UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using that particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the SM request message that was prohibited by the PLMN before the change is allowed to be sent, the SM request message using the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be sent. It may mean that it is acceptable.
- UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using noS-NSSAI during the counting of this timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. ..
- it when it is expressed that the transmission of the SM request message prohibited by the PLMN before the change is permitted, it may mean that the transmission of the SM request message using no S-NSSAI is permitted.
- the back-off timer associated with the third congestion management may be a back-off timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN, as described above.
- the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in units of S-NSSAI and / or DNN and / or PLMN.
- the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of a specific S-NSSA and a specific DNN, and the specific S-NSSAI and the specific DNN are assigned. It may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of the SM request message used.
- UE_A10 may be configured not to send SM request messages with that particular S-NSSAI and that particular DNN while this timer is counting.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. ..
- the SM request message that was prohibited by the PLMN before the change is allowed to be sent, it is associated with the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and the backoff timer. It may mean that the transmission of the SM request message using the same DNN as the DNN is allowed.
- the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of no S-NSSA and a specific DNN, and the SM request message using no S-NSSAI and a specific DNN. It may be a timer for prohibiting transmission.
- UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages including no S-NSSAI and a specific DNN during the counting of this timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. ..
- the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of specific S-NSSA and noDNN, and the SM request message using the specific S-NSSAI and noDNN It may be a timer for prohibiting transmission.
- UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using a particular S-NSSAI and noDNN during this timer count.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the transmission of SM request messages prohibited by PLMN before the change is allowed, SM using the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and no DNN It may mean that the request message is allowed to be sent.
- the back-off timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of no S-NSSAI and no DNN, and sends SM request messages using no S-NSSAI and no DNN. It may be a timer for prohibiting.
- UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using noS-NSSAI and noDNN during the counting of this timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. ..
- it is expressed that the transmission of SM request message prohibited by PLMN before the change is permitted it means that the transmission of SM request message using no S-NSSAI and no DNN is permitted. You may.
- the SM request message may be transmitted without including the specific S-NSSAI. Since the network that received such an SM request message does not include S-NSSAI, it may be recognized as a request for the default S-NSSAI and / or the default network slice. Therefore, no S-NSSAI may be information indicating that the SM request message does not include S-NSSAI and / or information indicating that a default network slice is requested.
- the SM request message when it is expressed that the SM request message is transmitted using no DNN, the SM request message may be transmitted without including the specific DNN.
- the network that receives such an SM request message may be recognized as a request for the default DNN because it does not contain a DNN. Therefore, no DNN may be information indicating that the SM request message does not include S-NSSAI and / or information indicating that a default DNN is requested.
- UE_A10 may start a backoff timer associated with the second congestion management based on the reception of the fifteenth identification information. Further, UE_A10 may set the 14th identification information to the timer value of the backoff timer based on the reception of the 14th identification information. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI with the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI is provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. On the contrary, UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI is not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure.
- UE_A10 uses S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network and S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network based on the reception of the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information.
- a second congestion management may be implemented.
- UE_A10 provides the S-NSSAI that UE_A10 provides to the network to the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management based on the receipt of the 14th and / or 15th identification information.
- UE_A10 may be associated with S-NSSAI provided by the network.
- the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management may be associated with the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network and the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network.
- the fifteenth identification information may be the 69th 5GSM (Session Management) reason value. Further, the fifteenth identification information may be a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a specific slice.
- 5GSM Session Management
- the backoff timer may be associated with no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment procedure, the backoff timer is associated with no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. You may attach it.
- the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. May be associated with.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be the attached S-NSSAI.
- UE_A10 in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 associates the backoff timer with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
- the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message and is transmitted / received. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will accept no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the message and sent / received.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with the included S-NSSAI sent and received.
- the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. May be associated with.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be the attached S-NSSAI.
- UE_A10 when noS-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, UE_A10 associates the backoff timer with the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
- the backoff timer is included in the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message and is transmitted / received. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer accepts no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the message and sent / received.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with the included S-NSSAI sent and received.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be a mapped S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, or a mapped S-NSSAI of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. You may.
- the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a mapped S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and sent and received, or may be included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be a mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI sent and received.
- UE_A10 sends SM request messages using no S-NSSAI and / or PDUs. Transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI associated with the session may be prohibited. In other words, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, the SM request message using no S-NSSAI of UE_A10. Transmission and / or transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be prohibited.
- UE_A10 may start a backoff timer associated with a third congestion management based on the reception of the fifteenth identification information. Further, UE_A10 may set the 14th identification information to the timer value of the backoff timer based on the reception of the 14th identification information. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI and the DNN with the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI and the DNN are provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI and noDNN with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI is provided and DNN is not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure.
- UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI with the DNN in the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI is not provided and the DNN is provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI and no DNN with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI and DNN are not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure.
- UE_A10 includes S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network, S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network, and DNN based on the reception of the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information.
- a third congestion management may be performed using.
- UE_A10 provides the S-NSSAI that UE_A10 provides to the network to the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management based on the receipt of the 14th and / or 15th identification information.
- UE_A10 may associate DNN with S-NSSAI provided by the network.
- the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management is associated with the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network, the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network, and the DNN.
- the DNN may be a DNN provided by UE_A10 to the network and / or a DNN provided by UE_A10 from the network.
- the fifteenth identification information may be the 67th 5GSM (Session Management) reason value.
- the fifteenth identifying information may be a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a particular slice and DNN.
- the backoff timer includes no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session and the DNN. May be associated. Furthermore, when UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and provides DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, S-NSSAI and S- sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message are included in the backoff timer. NSSAI may be associated with the DNN.
- the backoff timer is associated with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with the S-NSSAI and the DNN.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and PDU.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the session may be associated with the DNN.
- the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the S-NSSAI included and transmitted / received may be associated with the DNN.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI.
- the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and PDU.
- the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the session establishment acceptance message may be associated with the DNN.
- the backoff timer is S associated with noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. - May be associated with NSSAI and the DNN.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI associated with the session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN.
- UE_A10 when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session.
- the associated S-NSSAI may be associated with the DNN.
- the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the S-NSSAI transmitted and received may be associated with the DNN.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN.
- UE_A10 when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer and establishes the PDU session with no S-NSSAI.
- the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the acceptance message may be associated with the DNN.
- the SM request message using the noS-NSSAI and the DNN of UE_A10. And / or the transmission of the SM request message using the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session and the DNN may be prohibited.
- UE_A10 transmission of SM request message using no S-NSSAI and the DNN, and / or transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI and the DNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. May be banned.
- the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI and no DNN associated with the PDU session. It may be associated. Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, S-NSSAI sent and received included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message in the backoff timer. And no DNN may be associated.
- the backoff timer is set to S associated with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. - May be associated with NSSAI and noDNN.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be S-NSSAI associated with the session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with the associated S-NSSAI and no DNN.
- the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN sent and received.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the session establishment acceptance message and sent / received, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and establishes the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI sent / received included in the acceptance message and no DNN.
- the backoff timer is associated with noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and no DNN.
- NOS-NSSAI and noDNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer becomes noS-NSSAI. It may be S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN associated with.
- the backoff timer is included in the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN sent and received.
- the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer becomes noS-NSSAI. It may be the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN.
- UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI sent / received included in the establishment acceptance message and no DNN.
- the transmission of messages and / or the transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and noDNN associated with a PDU session may be prohibited.
- UE_A10 during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and no DNN included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message, UE_A10, no S-NSSAI and no DNN
- the transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and / or the transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and noDNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be prohibited.
- the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session establishment refusal message transmitted / received in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session change refusal message transmitted / received in the PDU session change procedure. Further, the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session release command message transmitted / received in the PDU session release procedure.
- the above-mentioned behavior may be performed when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated.
- UE_A10 may perform the above behavior when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated.
- the update of S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the change of PLMN. More specifically, the update of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the PLMN change of UE_A10.
- UE_A10 may be set to execute any of the processes from the first process example to the eighth process example shown below.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
- the S-NSSAI-based congestion management may be a second congestion management or a third congestion management.
- the twentieth identification information is information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN, or S-NSSAI-based only in the current PLMN. Information may be included to indicate that congestion management is applied. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
- the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied only in the current PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not the backoff timer to be counted is valid in all PLMNs.
- the back-off timer may be a back-off timer used in S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
- the twentieth identification information indicates that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs, or the counted backoff timer is valid only in the current PLMN. Information indicating that may be included.
- the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the backoff timer being counted is valid only in the current PLMN.
- the 20th identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not the home PLMN is congested.
- the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the slices in the home PLMN are congested. Further, the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the home PLMN is performing S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
- the twentieth identification information may include information indicating that the home PLMN is congested or information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested.
- the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is congested. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested.
- the 20th identification information is information indicating whether the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN or the S-NSSAI of the visit PLMN. There may be.
- the 20th identification information includes information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN, or S-NSSAI-based congestion management. It may include information indicating that the associated S-NSSAI is a visited PLMN S-NSSAI. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
- the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the visited PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may execute the first processing example regardless of whether or not the 20th identification information described later is received at the time of receiving the backoff timer. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the first processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
- the S-NSSAI-based congestion management may be a second congestion management or a third congestion management.
- the 20th identification information may include information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot include information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied only in the current PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating that the backoff timer to be counted is valid in all PLMNs.
- the back-off timer may be a back-off timer used in S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
- the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot contain information indicating that the backoff timer being counted is valid only in the current PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs.
- the 20th identification information may be an information element indicating that the home PLMN is congested.
- the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the slices in the home PLMN are congested. Further, the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the home PLMN is performing S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
- the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the home PLMN is congested.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot contain information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested.
- the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is congested.
- the 20th identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
- the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot include information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the visited PLMN.
- the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
- the 20th identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may execute the second processing example regardless of whether or not the 20th identification information described later is received when the backoff timer is received. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the second processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the SM described in each example is explained according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of request messages. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When UE_A10 changes the PLMN, when the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, and / or when UE_A10 changes the PLMN, If the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, in each example, depending on the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of the described SM request message. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received.
- the 20th identification information is not received, and / or when the 20th identification information including the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, and / or when the backoff timer is received.
- the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts back in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and sets the 20th identification information set as the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and if the 21st identification information is received together with the value of the backoff timer, the counting back is performed.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the situation, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received.
- the PLMN at the destination counts When the 20th identification information including the 22nd identification information is sometimes received, and / or when the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, the PLMN at the destination counts.
- it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 changed the PLMN when the PLMN before the change was the home PLMN and the 21st identification information was received when the backoff timer was received, and / or UE_A10 changed the PLMN.
- the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received
- each of the PLMNs at the destination is counted according to the backoff timer.
- the restrictions on the transmission of SM request messages described in the example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and sets the 20th identification information set as the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and if the 21st identification information is received together with the value of the backoff timer, the counting back is performed.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the 20th identification information and the 21st identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 changed the PLMN
- the PLMN before the change was the home PLMN and did not receive the 20th identification information when the backoff timer was received
- / or UE_A10 changed the PLMN.
- the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information that does not include the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received
- the backoff counted in the destination PLMN is counted.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received. If the 20th identification information is not received at times, and / or if the 20th identification information that does not include the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, the PLMN at the destination counts. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts back in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and performs the 20th identification information and / or the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When changing the PLMN, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts on the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the backoff timer count is not executed on the destination PLMN. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the twentieth identification information and the twenty-first identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When changing the PLMN, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts on the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the backoff timer count is not executed on the destination PLMN. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- UE_A10 when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 allows the SM request message described in each example to be sent in the destination PLMN according to the backoff timer being counted. May be set. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the twentieth identification information and the twenty-first identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
- the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
- the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- UE_A10 When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 may execute the eighth processing example regardless of whether or not the twentieth identification information described later is received when the backoff timer is received. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the eighth processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
- the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described.
- the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
- the SM described in each example is explained according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of request messages. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and performs the 20th identification information and / or the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer.
- the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well.
- the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued.
- UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
- the SM request message explained in each example will be sent according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. May be set to allow transmission of.
- UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted.
- UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
- the above-mentioned behavior may be performed when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated.
- UE_A10 may perform the above behavior when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated.
- the update of S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the change of PLMN. More specifically, the update of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the PLMN change of UE_A10.
- NW network
- AMF or SMF may transmit to UE_A10
- UE_A10 when NW expresses that it transmits to NW, UE_A10 transmits to AMF or SMF. It may be to do.
- NW expresses that it receives from UE_A10 AMF or SMF may receive from UE_A10
- UE_A10 when UE_A10 expresses that it receives from NW, UE_A10 may receive from AMF or SMF. It may be there.
- the program that operates in the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls the Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate the computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention.
- the program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
- volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
- the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it.
- the "computer system” as used herein is a computer system built into a device, and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices.
- the "computer-readable recording medium” is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. Is also good.
- each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed in an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits.
- Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein are general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or a combination thereof.
- the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine.
- the electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or more aspects of the present invention can also use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
- the invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment.
- an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other living equipment.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Provided is a communication control method which, when a UE receives a congestion management reason value and a back-off timer value in a state in which network slice information associated with an established PDU session has the potential of being updated, realizes congestion management by using a back-off timer associated with network slice information that the UE has transmitted to a device within a core network and network slice information that the UE has received from a device within a core network, in the state in which the network slice information associated with the established PDU session has the potential of being updated.
Description
本出願は、UE、及び通信制御方法に関する。本出願は、2019年12月26日に出願された日本国特許出願である特願2019-236463号に対して優先権の利益を主張するものであり、それを参照することにより、その内容の全てが本願に含まれる。
This application relates to UE and communication control method. This application claims the benefit of priority to Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-236463, which is a Japanese patent application filed on December 26, 2019, and by referring to it, the content of the application is claimed. All are included in this application.
近年の移動通信システムの標準化活動を行う3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project)は、LTE(Long Term Evolution)のシステムアーキテクチャであるSAE(System Architecture Evolution)の検討を行っている。3GPPは、オールIP(Internet Protocol)化を実現する通信システムとしてEPS(Evolved Packet System)の仕様化を行っている。尚、EPSを構成するコアネットワークはEPC(Evolved Packet Core)と呼ばれる。
3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is engaged in standardization activities for mobile communication systems in recent years, is studying SAE (System Architecture Evolution), which is the system architecture of LTE (Long Term Evolution). 3GPP is specifying EPS (Evolved Packet System) as a communication system that realizes all IP (Internet Protocol). The core network that makes up EPS is called EPC (Evolved Packet Core).
また、近年3GPPでは、次世代移動通信システムである5G(5th Generation)移動通信システムの次世代通信技術やシステムアーキテクチャの検討も行っており、特に、5G移動通信システムを実現するシステムとして、5GS(5G System)の仕様化を行っている(非特許文献1及び非特許文献2参照)。5GSでは、多種多様な端末をセルラーネットワークに接続する為の技術課題を抽出し、解決策を仕様化している。
In recent years, 3GPP has also been studying the next-generation communication technology and system architecture of 5G (5th Generation) mobile communication systems, which are next-generation mobile communication systems. 5G System) is being specified (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2). 5GS extracts technical issues for connecting a wide variety of terminals to cellular networks and specifies solutions.
例えば、多種多様なアクセスネットワークをサポートする端末に応じた、継続的な移動通信サービスをサポートする為の通信手続きの最適化及び多様化や、通信手続きの最適化及び多様化に合わせたシステムアーキテクチャの最適化等も要求条件として挙げられている。
For example, the optimization and diversification of communication procedures to support continuous mobile communication services according to terminals that support a wide variety of access networks, and the system architecture that matches the optimization and diversification of communication procedures. Optimization is also mentioned as a requirement.
5GSでは、輻輳管理に相当する機能を提供する仕組みに加えて、さらに、輻輳管理以外の理由に基づく制御信号管理について検討が行われている (非特許文献1及び非特許文献2及び非特許文献3参照)。
In 5GS, in addition to the mechanism that provides the function equivalent to congestion management, control signal management based on reasons other than congestion management is being studied (Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document). 3).
さらに、5GSでは、UEがPLMNの変更を行った際に、確立しているPDUセッションに対応付けられたネットワークスライス情報を更新する技術についても検討が行われている。
Furthermore, in 5GS, a technology for updating the network slice information associated with the established PDU session when the UE changes the PLMN is also being studied.
しかし、確立しているPDUセッションに対応付けられたネットワークスライス情報が、更新される可能性がある状態において、輻輳管理を実現する方法が明確になっていない。
However, it is not clear how to realize congestion management in a state where the network slice information associated with the established PDU session may be updated.
本発明は、このような事情を鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたネットワークスライス情報が、更新される可能性がある状態において、輻輳管理を実現するための仕組みや通信制御方法を提供することである。
The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize congestion management in a state where network slice information associated with a PDU session may be updated. It is to provide a mechanism and a communication control method.
本発明のUE(User Equipment;端末装置)は、PDU(Protocol Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージを、制御装置に送信し、PDUセッションIDと、第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)とを含むPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信し、前記PDUセッションIDを含むPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを、制御装置から受信する、送受信部と、前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、バックオフタイマーを開始する制御部とを備え、前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとDNN(Data Network Name)とが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに対応付けられ、前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIとno DNNとに対応付けられる、ことを特徴とする。
The UE (User Equipment; terminal device) of the present invention sends a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the control device, and the PDU session ID and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information). Based on the transmission / reception unit that receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message including the above from the control device and the PDU session change rejection message including the PDU session ID from the control device, and the reception of the PDU session change rejection message. When the UE provides noS-NSSAI and DNN (Data Network Name) together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is provided with a control unit for starting the backoff timer. When no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and the DNN are associated with each other, and the UE provides the no S-NSSAI and the no DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff is performed. The timer is characterized in that it is associated with no S-NSSAI and the first S-NSSAI and no DNN.
本発明のUE(User Equipment;端末装置)の通信制御方法は、PDU(Protocol Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージを、制御装置に送信するステップと、PDUセッションIDと、第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)を含むPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信するステップと、前記PDUセッションIDと、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信するステップと、前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、バックオフタイマーを開始するステップとを有し、前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとDNN(Data Network Name)とが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに対応付けられ、前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIとno DNNとに対応付けられる、ことを特徴とする。
The UE (User Equipment; terminal device) communication control method of the present invention includes a step of transmitting a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the control device, a PDU session ID, and a first S-NSSAI (Single). A step of receiving a PDU session establishment acceptance message including Network Slice Selection Assistance information) from the control device, a step of receiving the PDU session ID and a PDU session change refusal message from the control device, and the PDU session change. If it has a step of initiating a backoff timer based on the receipt of a rejection message, and the UE provides no S-NSSAI and DNN (Data Network Name) along with the PDU session establishment request message. The back-off timer is associated with the no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and the DNN, and the UE provides the no S-NSSAI and the no DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message. In this case, the back-off timer is characterized in that it is associated with no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and no DNN.
本発明の一態様によれば、5GSを構成する端末装置や、コアネットワーク内の装置は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたネットワークスライス情報が、更新される可能性がある状態においても、ネットワークスライス及び/又はDNN毎に、輻輳管理等の管理処理を実施する、ことを特徴とする。
According to one aspect of the present invention, the terminal device constituting the 5GS and the device in the core network can perform the network slice and the network slice information even in a state where the network slice information associated with the PDU session may be updated. / Or, it is characterized in that management processing such as congestion management is performed for each DNN.
以下、図面を参照して本発明を実施する為に最良の形態について説明する。尚、本実施形態では1例として、本発明を適用した場合の移動通信システムの実施形態について説明する。
Hereinafter, the best mode for carrying out the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, as an example, an embodiment of a mobile communication system to which the present invention is applied will be described.
[1.システム概要]
移動通信システムの概略について、図1、図2、図3、図4を用いて説明する。図2は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、アクセスネットワークの詳細を記載した図である。図3は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、主にコアネットワーク_A90の詳細を記載した図である。図4は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、主にコアネットワーク_B190の詳細を記載した図である。図1に示すように、移動通信システム1は、端末装置(ユーザ装置、移動端末装置とも称する)UE(User Equipment)_A10、アクセスネットワーク(AN; Access Network)_A、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク(CN; Core Network)_A90、コアネットワーク_B190、パケットデータネットワーク(PDN; Packet Data Network)_A6、及びデータネットワーク(DN; Data Network)_A5により構成されている。尚、アクセスネットワーク_Aとコアネットワーク_A90の組み合わせをEPS(Evolved Packet System;4G移動通信システム)と称してもよいし、アクセスネットワーク_Bとコアネットワーク_B190とUE_A10の組み合わせを5GS(5G System;5G移動通信システム)と称してもよいし、5GSとEPSの構成はこれらに限らなくてもよい。尚、簡単化のため、コアネットワーク_A90、コアネットワークB又はこれらの組み合わせをコアネットワークとも称することがあり、アクセスネットワーク_A、アクセスネットワーク_B又はこれらの組み合わせをアクセスネットワーク又は無線アクセスネットワークとも称することがあり、DN_A5、PDN_A6又はこれらの組み合わせをDNとも称することがある。 [1. System overview]
The outline of the mobile communication system will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 3, and 4. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an access network among the mobile communication systems of FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of the core network_A90 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of the core network_B190 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, themobile communication system 1 includes a terminal device (also referred to as a user device or mobile terminal device) UE (User Equipment) _A10, an access network (AN; Access Network) _A, an access network_B, and a core network ( It is composed of CN; Core Network) _A90, Core Network_B190, Packet Data Network (PDN) _A6, and Data Network (DN) _A5. The combination of access network_A and core network_A90 may be called EPS (Evolved Packet System; 4G mobile communication system), and the combination of access network_B, core network_B190 and UE_A10 is 5GS (5G System). It may be referred to as (5G mobile communication system), and the configuration of 5GS and EPS is not limited to these. For simplification, core network_A90, core network B, or a combination thereof may also be referred to as a core network, and access network_A, access network_B, or a combination thereof may also be referred to as an access network or a wireless access network. Sometimes DN_A5, PDN_A6 or a combination thereof may also be referred to as DN.
移動通信システムの概略について、図1、図2、図3、図4を用いて説明する。図2は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、アクセスネットワークの詳細を記載した図である。図3は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、主にコアネットワーク_A90の詳細を記載した図である。図4は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、主にコアネットワーク_B190の詳細を記載した図である。図1に示すように、移動通信システム1は、端末装置(ユーザ装置、移動端末装置とも称する)UE(User Equipment)_A10、アクセスネットワーク(AN; Access Network)_A、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク(CN; Core Network)_A90、コアネットワーク_B190、パケットデータネットワーク(PDN; Packet Data Network)_A6、及びデータネットワーク(DN; Data Network)_A5により構成されている。尚、アクセスネットワーク_Aとコアネットワーク_A90の組み合わせをEPS(Evolved Packet System;4G移動通信システム)と称してもよいし、アクセスネットワーク_Bとコアネットワーク_B190とUE_A10の組み合わせを5GS(5G System;5G移動通信システム)と称してもよいし、5GSとEPSの構成はこれらに限らなくてもよい。尚、簡単化のため、コアネットワーク_A90、コアネットワークB又はこれらの組み合わせをコアネットワークとも称することがあり、アクセスネットワーク_A、アクセスネットワーク_B又はこれらの組み合わせをアクセスネットワーク又は無線アクセスネットワークとも称することがあり、DN_A5、PDN_A6又はこれらの組み合わせをDNとも称することがある。 [1. System overview]
The outline of the mobile communication system will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 3, and 4. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an access network among the mobile communication systems of FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of the core network_A90 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of the core network_B190 mainly in the mobile communication system of FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the
ここで、UE_A10は、3GPPアクセス(3GPP access又は3GPP access networkとも称する)及び/又はnon-3GPPアクセス(non-3GPP access又はnon-3GPP access networkとも称する)を介して、ネットワークサービスに対して接続可能な装置であってよい。また、UE_A10は、UICC(Universal Integrated Circuit Card)やeUICC(Embedded UICC)を備えてもよい。また、UE_A10は無線接続可能な端末装置であってもよく、ME(Mobile Equipment)、MS(Mobile Station)、又はCIoT(Cellular Internet of Things)端末(CIoT UE)等であってもよい。
Here, UE_A10 can connect to network services via 3GPP access (also referred to as 3GPP access or 3GPP access network) and / or non-3GPP access (also referred to as non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network). It may be a device. In addition, UE_A10 may be provided with UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or eUICC (Embedded UICC). Further, UE_A10 may be a terminal device capable of wireless connection, or may be a ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile Station), CIoT (Cellular Internet of Things) terminal (CIoT UE), or the like.
また、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はコアネットワークと接続することができる。また、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はコアネットワークを介して、DN_A及び/又はPDN_Aと接続することができる。UE_A10は、DN_A及び/又はPDN_Aとの間で、PDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション及び/又はPDN (Packet Data Network)接続(PDNコネクションとも称する)を用いて、ユーザデータを送受信(通信)する。さらに、ユーザデータの通信は、IP(Internet Protocol)通信(IPv4又はIPv6)に限らず、例えば、EPSではnon-IP通信であってもよいし、5GSではEthernet(登録商標)通信又はUnstructured通信であってもよい。
Also, UE_A10 can be connected to the access network and / or the core network. UE_A10 can also connect to DN_A and / or PDN_A via the access network and / or core network. UE_A10 sends and receives (communicate) user data with DN_A and / or PDN_A using a PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session and / or PDN (Packet Data Network) connection (also referred to as PDN connection). ). Furthermore, the communication of user data is not limited to IP (Internet Protocol) communication (IPv4 or IPv6), for example, EPS may be non-IP communication, and 5GS may be Ethernet (registered trademark) communication or Unstructured communication. There may be.
ここで、IP通信とは、IPを用いたデータの通信のことであり、IPヘッダが付与されたIPパケットの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信のことである。尚、IPパケットを構成するペイロード部にはUE_A10が送受信するユーザデータが含まれてよい。また、non-IP通信とは、IPを用いないデータの通信のことであり、IPヘッダが付与されていないデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信のことである。例えば、non-IP通信は、IPアドレスが付与されていないアプリケーションデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信でもよいし、マックヘッダやEthernet(登録商標)フレームヘッダ等の別のヘッダを付与してUE_A10が送受信するユーザデータを送受信してもよい。
Here, IP communication is data communication using IP, and is data communication realized by sending and receiving IP packets to which an IP header is added. The payload portion constituting the IP packet may include user data sent and received by UE_A10. Further, non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and is data communication that is realized by sending and receiving data to which an IP header is not added. For example, non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP address is not assigned, or UE_A10 may be provided with another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
また、PDUセッションとは、PDU接続サービスを提供する為に、UE_A10とDN_A5との間で確立される接続性である。より具体的には、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と外部ゲートウェイとの間で確立する接続性でよい。ここで、外部ゲートウェイは、UPFやPGW(Packet Data Network Gateway)等であってもよい。また、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と、コアネットワーク及び/又はDNとの間でユーザデータを送受信する為に確立される通信路でもよく、PDUを送受信する為の通信路でもよい。さらに、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と、コアネットワーク及び/又はDNとの間で確立されるセッションでもよく、移動通信システム1内の各装置間の1以上のベアラ等の転送路で構成される論理的な通信路でもよい。より具体的には、PDUセッションは、UE_A10が、コアネットワーク_B190、及び/又は外部ゲートウェイとの間に確立するコネクションでもよく、UE_A10とUPFとの間に確立するコネクションでもよい。また、PDUセッションは、NR node_A122を介したUE_A10とUPF_A235との間の接続性及び/又はコネクションでもよい。さらに、PDUセッションは、PDUセッションID及び/又はEPSベアラIDで識別されてもよい。
A PDU session is a connectivity established between UE_A10 and DN_A5 to provide a PDU connection service. More specifically, the PDU session may be the connectivity established between UE_A10 and the external gateway. Here, the external gateway may be UPF, PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway), or the like. Further, the PDU session may be a communication path established for transmitting / receiving user data between UE_A10 and the core network and / or DN, or may be a communication path for transmitting / receiving PDU. Further, the PDU session may be a session established between UE_A10 and the core network and / or DN, and is a logical configuration consisting of one or more bearers and other transfer paths between each device in the mobile communication system 1. Communication path may be used. More specifically, the PDU session may be a connection established by UE_A10 between the core network_B190 and / or an external gateway, or may be a connection established between UE_A10 and UPF. The PDU session may also be connectivity and / or connection between UE_A10 and UPF_A235 via NR node_A122. In addition, the PDU session may be identified by a PDU session ID and / or an EPS bearer ID.
尚、UE_A10は、DN_A5に配置するアプリケーションサーバ等の装置と、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を実行することができる。言い換えると、PDUセッションは、UE_A10とDN_A5に配置するアプリケーションサーバ等の装置との間で送受信されるユーザデータを転送することができる。さらに、各装置(UE_A10、アクセスネットワーク内の装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク内の装置、及び/又はデータネットワーク内の装置)は、PDUセッションに対して、1以上の識別情報を対応づけて管理してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報には、APN(Access Point Name)、TFT(Traffic Flow Template)、セッションタイプ、アプリケーション識別情報、DN_A5の識別情報、NSI(Network Slice Instance)識別情報、及びDCN(Dedicated Core Network)識別情報、及びアクセスネットワーク識別情報のうち、少なくとも1つが含まれてもよいし、その他の情報がさらに含まれてもよい。さらに、PDUセッションを複数確立する場合には、PDUセッションに対応づけられる各識別情報は、同じ内容でもよいし、異なる内容でもよい。さらに、NSI識別情報は、NSIを識別する情報であり、以下NSI ID又はSlice Instance IDであってもよい。
Note that UE_A10 can send and receive user data using a device such as an application server located in DN_A5 and a PDU session. In other words, the PDU session can transfer user data transmitted and received between the device such as the application server arranged in UE_A10 and DN_A5. In addition, each device (UE_A10, device in the access network, and / or device in the core network, and / or device in the data network) manages one or more identifications associated with each PDU session. You may. These identification information includes APN (Access Point Name), TFT (Traffic Flow Template), session type, application identification information, DN_A5 identification information, NSI (Network Slice Instance) identification information, and DCN (Dedicated Core Network). ) At least one of the identification information and the access network identification information may be included, and other information may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents. Further, the NSI identification information is information that identifies NSI, and may be NSI ID or Slice Instance ID below.
また、アクセスネットワーク_A及びアクセスネットワーク_Bとしては、図2に示すように、UTRAN(Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)_A20、E-UTRAN(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)_A80、NG-RAN(5G-RAN)_A120のいずれであってもよい。尚、以下、UTRAN_A20及び/又はE-UTRAN_A80及び/又はNG-RAN_A120は3GPPアクセス又は3GPPアクセスネットワークと称し、無線LANアクセスネットワークやnon-3GPP ANは、はnon-3GPPアクセス又はnon-3GPPアクセスネットワークと称することがある。各無線アクセスネットワークには、UE_A10が実際に接続する装置(例えば、基地局装置やアクセスポイント)等が含まれている。
As the access network_A and access network_B, as shown in Fig. 2, UTRAN (Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) _A20, E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) _A80, NG-RAN (5G-) It may be any of RAN) _A120. Hereinafter, UTRAN_A20 and / or E-UTRAN_A80 and / or NG-RAN_A120 are referred to as 3GPP access or 3GPP access network, and wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN are referred to as non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network. Sometimes referred to. Each radio access network includes a device (for example, a base station device or an access point) to which the UE_A10 actually connects.
例えば、E-UTRAN_A80は、LTEのアクセスネットワークであり、1以上のeNB_A45を含んで構成される。eNB_A45はE-UTRA(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access)でUE_A10が接続する無線基地局である。また、E-UTRAN_A80内に複数のeNBがある場合、各eNBは互いに接続してよい。
For example, E-UTRAN_A80 is an LTE access network, and is configured to include one or more eNB_A45. eNB_A45 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by E-UTRA (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access). Further, when there are a plurality of eNBs in E-UTRAN_A80, each eNB may be connected to each other.
また、NG-RAN_A120は、5Gのアクセスネットワークであり、図4に記載の(R)ANであってよく、1以上のNR node(New Radio Access Technology node)_A122及び/又はng-eNBを含んで構成される。尚、NR node_A122は、5Gの無線アクセス(5G Radio Access)でUE_A10が接続する無線基地局であり、gNBとも称する。尚、ng-eNBは、5Gのアクセスネットワークを構成するeNB(E-UTRA)であってよく、NR node_A経由でコアネットワーク_B190に接続されていてもよいし、コアネットワーク_B190に直接接続されていてもよい。また、NG-RAN_A120内に複数のNR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBがある場合、各NR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBは互いに接続してよい。
Further, the NG-RAN_A120 is a 5G access network, which may be the (R) AN shown in FIG. 4, and includes one or more NR nodes (New Radio Access Technology node) _A122 and / or ng-eNB. It is composed. Note that NR node_A122 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by 5G radio access (5G Radio Access), and is also referred to as gNB. The ng-eNB may be an eNB (E-UTRA) that constitutes a 5G access network, may be connected to the core network_B190 via NR node_A, or may be directly connected to the core network_B190. You may be. Further, when there are a plurality of NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB in NG-RAN_A120, each NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB may be connected to each other.
尚、NG-RAN_A120は、E-UTRA及び/又は5G Radio Accessで構成されるアクセスネットワークであってもよい。言い換えると、NG-RAN_A120には、eNB_A45が含まれてもよいし、NR node_A122が含まれてもよいし、その両方が含まれてもよい。この場合、eNB_A45とNR node_A122とは同様の装置であってもよい。従って、NR node_A122は、eNB_A45と置き換えことができる。
Note that NG-RAN_A120 may be an access network composed of E-UTRA and / or 5G Radio Access. In other words, NG-RAN_A120 may contain eNB_A45, NR node_A122, or both. In this case, eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 may be similar devices. Therefore, NR node_A122 can be replaced with eNB_A45.
UTRAN_A20は、3G移動通信システムのアクセスネットワークであり、RNC(Radio Network Controller)_A24とNB(Node B)_A22とを含んで構成される。NB_A22は、UTRA(Universal Terrestrial Radio Access)でUE_A10が接続する無線基地局であり、UTRAN_A20には1又は複数の無線基地局が含まれて構成されてよい。またRNC_A24は、コアネットワーク_A90とNB_A22とを接続する制御部であり、UTRAN_A20には1又は複数のRNCが含まれて構成されてよい。また、RNC_A24は1又は複数のNB_A22と接続されてよい。
UTRAN_A20 is an access network for 3G mobile communication systems, and is composed of RNC (Radio Network Controller) _A24 and NB (Node B) _A22. NB_A22 is a radio base station to which UE_A10 is connected by UTRA (Universal Terrestrial Radio Access), and UTRAN_A20 may be configured to include one or more radio base stations. Further, RNC_A24 is a control unit that connects the core network_A90 and NB_A22, and UTRAN_A20 may be configured to include one or more RNCs. Also, RNC_A24 may be connected to one or more NB_A22s.
尚、本明細書において、UE_A10が各無線アクセスネットワークに接続されるということは、各無線アクセスネットワークに含まれる基地局装置やアクセスポイント等に接続されることであり、送受信されるデータや信号等も、基地局装置やアクセスポイントを経由するということである。尚、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190間で送受信する制御メッセージは、アクセスネットワークの種類によらず、同じ制御メッセージでもよい。従って、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190とがNR node_A122を介してメッセージを送受信するということは、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190とがeNB_A45を介してメッセージを送信することと同じであってよい。
In this specification, the fact that UE_A10 is connected to each radio access network means that it is connected to a base station device, an access point, or the like included in each radio access network, and data, signals, etc. to be transmitted and received. It also means that it goes through a base station device or an access point. The control message sent / received between UE_A10 and the core network_B190 may be the same control message regardless of the type of access network. Therefore, sending and receiving messages between UE_A10 and core network_B190 via NR node_A122 may be the same as sending and receiving messages between UE_A10 and core network_B190 via eNB_A45.
さらに、アクセスネットワークは、UE_A10及び/又はコアネットワークと接続した無線ネットワークのことである。アクセスネットワークは、3GPPアクセスネットワークでもよく、non-3GPPアクセスネットワークでもよい。尚、3GPPアクセスネットワークは、UTRAN_A20、E-UTRAN_A80、NG-RAN(Radio Access Network)_A120でもよく、non-3GPPアクセスネットワークは、無線LANアクセスポイント(WLAN AN)でもよい。尚、UE_A10はコアネットワークに接続する為に、アクセスネットワークに接続してもよく、アクセスネットワークを介してコアネットワークに接続してもよい。
Furthermore, the access network is a wireless network connected to UE_A10 and / or the core network. The access network may be a 3GPP access network or a non-3GPP access network. The 3GPP access network may be UTRAN_A20, E-UTRAN_A80, NG-RAN (Radio Access Network) _A120, and the non-3GPP access network may be a wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN). In addition, UE_A10 may be connected to the access network in order to connect to the core network, or may be connected to the core network via the access network.
また、DN_A5及びPDN_A6は、UE_A10に通信サービスを提供するデータネットワーク(Data Network)であり、パケットデータサービス網として構成されてもよいし、サービス毎に構成されてもよい。さらに、DN_A5は、接続された通信端末を含んでもよい。従って、DN_A5と接続することは、DN_A5に配置された通信端末やサーバ装置と接続することであってもよい。さらに、DN_A5との間でユーザデータを送受信することは、DN_A5に配置された通信端末やサーバ装置とユーザデータを送受信することであってもよい。また、DN_A5は、図1ではコアネットワークの外にあるが、コアネットワーク内にあってもよい。
Further, DN_A5 and PDN_A6 are data networks (Data Networks) that provide communication services to UE_A10, and may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, DN_A5 may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to DN_A5 may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from DN_A5 may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5. Further, although DN_A5 is outside the core network in FIG. 1, it may be inside the core network.
また、コアネットワーク_A90及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190は、1以上のコアネットワーク内の装置として構成されてもよい。ここで、コアネットワーク内の装置は、コアネットワーク_A90及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190に含まれる各装置の処理又は機能の一部又は全てを実行する装置であってよい。尚、コアネットワーク内の装置は、コアネットワーク装置と称してもよい。
Further, the core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190 may be configured as devices in one or more core networks. Here, the device in the core network may be a device that executes a part or all of the processing or function of each device included in the core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190. The device in the core network may be referred to as a core network device.
さらに、コアネットワークは、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はDNと接続した移動体通信事業者(MNO; Mobile Network Operator)が運用するIP移動通信ネットワークのことである。コアネットワークは、移動通信システム1を運用、管理する移動通信事業者の為のコアネットワークでもよいし、MVNO(Mobile Virtual Network Operator)、MVNE(Mobile Virtual Network Enabler)等の仮想移動通信事業者や仮想移動体通信サービス提供者の為のコアネットワークでもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_A90は、EPS(Evolved Packet System)を構成するEPC(Evolved Packet Core)でもよく、コアネットワーク_B190は、5GSを構成する5GC(5G Core Network)でもよい。さらに、コアネットワーク_B190は、5G通信サービスを提供するシステムのコアネットワークでもよい。逆に、EPCはコアネットワーク_A90であってもよく、5GCはコアネットワーク_B190であってもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_A90及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190は、これに限らず、モバイル通信サービスを提供するためのネットワークでもよい。
Furthermore, the core network is an IP mobile communication network operated by a mobile network operator (MNO; Mobile Network Operator) connected to an access network and / or DN. The core network may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages the mobile communication system 1, or a virtual mobile communication operator such as MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) or MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler) or virtual. It may be a core network for mobile communication service providers. The core network_A90 may be an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) that constitutes an EPS (Evolved Packet System), and the core network_B190 may be a 5GC (5G Core Network) that constitutes a 5GS. Further, the core network_B190 may be the core network of the system that provides the 5G communication service. Conversely, the EPC may be the core network_A90 and the 5GC may be the core network_B190. The core network_A90 and / or the core network_B190 is not limited to this, and may be a network for providing a mobile communication service.
次に、コアネットワーク_A90について説明する。コアネットワーク_A90には、HSS(Home Subscriber Server)_A50、AAA(Authentication Authorization Accounting)、PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function)、PGW_A30、ePDG、SGW_A35、MME(Mobility Management Entity)_A40、SGSN(Serving GPRS Support Node)、SCEFのうち、少なくとも1つが含まれてよい。そして、これらはNF(Network Function)として構成されてもよい。NFとは、ネットワーク内に構成される処理機能を指してもよい。また、コアネットワーク_A90は、複数の無線アクセスネットワーク(UTRAN_A20、E-UTRAN_A80)に接続することができる。
Next, the core network_A90 will be explained. The core network_A90 includes HSS (Home Subscriber Server) _A50, AAA (Authentication Authorization Accounting), PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), PGW_A30, ePDG, SGW_A35, MME (Mobility Management Entity) _A40, SGSN (Serving GPRS Support). Node), SCEF, at least one may be included. Then, these may be configured as NF (Network Function). NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network. In addition, the core network_A90 can be connected to a plurality of radio access networks (UTRAN_A20, E-UTRAN_A80).
図3には、簡単化のために、これらのうち、HSS(HSS_A50)、PGW(PGW_A30)、SGW(SGW_A35)及びMME(MME_A40)についてのみ記載されているが、これら以外の装置及び/又はNFが含まれないということを意味するものではない。尚、簡単化のため、UE_A10はUEと、HSS_A50はHSSと、PGW_A30はPGWと、SGW_A35はSGWと、MME_A40はMMEと、DN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6はDN又はPDNとも称する。
For simplicity, Figure 3 shows only HSS (HSS_A50), PGW (PGW_A30), SGW (SGW_A35) and MME (MME_A40), but other devices and / or NFs. Does not mean that is not included. For simplification, UE_A10 is also referred to as UE, HSS_A50 is referred to as HSS, PGW_A30 is referred to as PGW, SGW_A35 is referred to as SGW, MME_A40 is referred to as MME, and DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 is also referred to as DN or PDN.
以下、コアネットワーク_A90内に含まれる各装置の簡単な説明をする。
Below is a brief description of each device included in the core network_A90.
PGW_A30は、DNとSGW_A35とePDGとWLAN ANa70とPCRFとAAAとに接続されており、DN(DN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6)とコアネットワーク_A90とのゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置である。尚、PGW_A30は、IP通信及び/又はnon-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。さらに、PGW_A30は、IP通信を転送する機能を持っていてもよく、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。尚、こうしたゲートウェイはコアネットワーク_A90に複数配置されてよい。さらに複数配置されるゲートウェイは、コアネットワーク_A90と単一のDNを接続するゲートウェイでもよい。
PGW_A30 is a relay device that is connected to DN, SGW_A35, ePDG, WLAN ANa70, PCRF, and AAA, and transfers user data as a gateway between DN (DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6) and core network_A90. The PGW_A30 may be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication. Further, the PGW_A30 may have a function of transferring IP communication, and may have a function of converting between non-IP communication and IP communication. A plurality of such gateways may be arranged in the core network_A90. Further, the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_A90 and a single DN.
尚、U-Plane(User Plane; UP)とは、ユーザデータを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。さらに、C-Plane(Control Plane; CP)とは、制御メッセージを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。
Note that the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers. Further, the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving a control message, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
さらに、PGW_A30は、SGW及びDN及びUPF (User plane function)及び/又はSMF(Session Management Function)と接続されてもよいし、U-Planeを介してUE_A10と接続されてもよい。さらに、PGW_A30は、UPF_A235及び/又はSMF_A230と一緒に構成されてもよい。
Furthermore, PGW_A30 may be connected to SGW and DN and UPF (User plane function) and / or SMF (Session Management Function), or may be connected to UE_A10 via U-Plane. In addition, PGW_A30 may be configured with UPF_A235 and / or SMF_A230.
SGW_A35は、PGW_A30とMME_A40とE-UTRAN_A80とSGSNとUTRAN_A20とに接続されており、コアネットワーク_A90と3GPPのアクセスネットワーク(UTRAN_A20、GERAN、E-UTRAN_A80)とのゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置である。
SGW_A35 is connected to PGW_A30, MME_A40, E-UTRAN_A80, SGSN and UTRAN_A20, and is a relay that transfers user data as a gateway between core network_A90 and 3GPP access networks (UTRAN_A20, GERAN, E-UTRAN_A80). It is a device.
MME_A40は、SGW_A35とアクセスネットワークとHSS_A50とSCEFとに接続されており、アクセスネットワークを経由してUE_A10のモビリティ管理を含む位置情報管理と、アクセス制御を行う制御装置である。さらに、MME_A40は、UE_A10が確立するセッションを管理するセッション管理装置としての機能を含んでもよい。また、コアネットワーク_A90には、こうした制御装置を複数配置してもよく、例えば、MME_A40とは異なる位置管理装置が構成されてもよい。MME_A40とは異なる位置管理装置は、MME_A40と同様に、SGW_A35とアクセスネットワークとSCEFとHSS_A50と接続されてよい。さらにMME_A40はAMF(Access and Mobility Management Function)と接続されていてもよい。
MME_A40 is a control device that is connected to SGW_A35, an access network, HSS_A50, and SCEF, and performs location information management including mobility management of UE_A10 and access control via the access network. Further, the MME_A40 may include a function as a session management device that manages the sessions established by the UE_A10. Further, a plurality of such control devices may be arranged in the core network_A90, and for example, a position management device different from the MME_A40 may be configured. A location management device different from the MME_A40 may be connected to the SGW_A35, the access network, the SCEF, and the HSS_A50, similar to the MME_A40. Furthermore, MME_A40 may be connected to AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function).
また、コアネットワーク_A90内に複数のMMEが含まれている場合、MME同士が接続されてもよい。これにより、MME間で、UE_A10のコンテキストの送受信が行われてもよい。このように、MME_A40は、UE_A10とモビリティ管理やセッション管理に関連する制御情報を送受信する管理装置であり、言い換えるとコントロールプレーン(Control Plane;C-Plane;CP)の制御装置であればよい。
Also, if multiple MMEs are included in the core network_A90, the MMEs may be connected to each other. As a result, the context of UE_A10 may be sent and received between MMEs. In this way, the MME_A40 is a management device that transmits and receives control information related to mobility management and session management to and from the UE_A10, in other words, it may be a control plane (Control Plane; C-Plane; CP) control device.
さらに、MME_A40はコアネットワーク_A90に含まれて構成される例を説明したが、MME_A40は1又は複数のコアネットワーク又はDCN又はNSIに構成される管理装置でもよいし、1又は複数のコアネットワーク又はDCN又はNSIに接続される管理装置でもよい。ここで、複数のDCN又はNSIは単一の通信事業者によって運用されてもよいし、それぞれ異なる通信事業者によって運用されてもよい。
Further, although the example in which MME_A40 is configured to be included in core network_A90 has been described, MME_A40 may be one or more core networks or a management device composed of DCN or NSI, or one or more core networks or. It may be a management device connected to a DCN or NSI. Here, a plurality of DCNs or NSIs may be operated by a single telecommunications carrier or may be operated by different telecommunications carriers.
また、MME_A40は、コアネットワーク_A90とアクセスネットワークとの間のゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置でもよい。なお、MME_A40がゲートウェイとなって送受信されるユーザデータは、スモールデータでもよい。
Further, MME_A40 may be a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway between the core network_A90 and the access network. The user data transmitted / received using MME_A40 as a gateway may be small data.
さらに、MME_A40は、UE_A10等のモビリティ管理の役割を担うNFでもよく、1又は複数のNSIを管理するNFでもよい。また、MME_A40は、これらの1又は複数の役割を担うNFでよい。なお、NFは、コアネットワーク_A90内に1又は複数配置される装置でもよく、制御情報及び/又は制御メッセージの為のCPファンクション(以下、CPF(Control Plane Function)、又はControl Plane Network Functionとしても称される)でもよく、複数のネットワークスライス間で共有される共有CPファンクションでもよい。
Furthermore, MME_A40 may be an NF that plays a role of mobility management such as UE_A10, or an NF that manages one or more NSIs. Further, MME_A40 may be an NF that plays one or more of these roles. The NF may be one or more devices arranged in the core network_A90, and may also be a CP function for control information and / or a control message (hereinafter, CPF (Control Plane Function) or Control Plane Network Function). It may be a shared CP function shared between multiple network slices.
ここで、NFとは、ネットワーク内に構成される処理機能である。つまり、NFは、MMEやSGWやPGWやCPFやAMFやSMFやUPF等の機能装置でもよいし、MM(Mobility Management)やSM(Session Management)等の機能や能力capability情報でもよい。また、NFは、単一の機能を実現する為の機能装置でもよいし、複数の機能を実現する為の機能装置でもよい。例えば、MM機能を実現する為のNFと、SM機能を実現する為のNFとが別々に存在してもよいし、MM機能とSM機能との両方の機能を実現する為のNFが存在してもよい。
Here, NF is a processing function configured in the network. That is, the NF may be a functional device such as MME, SGW, PGW, CPF, AMF, SMF, UPF, or functional or capability information such as MM (Mobility Management) or SM (Session Management). Further, the NF may be a functional device for realizing a single function, or may be a functional device for realizing a plurality of functions. For example, an NF for realizing the MM function and an NF for realizing the SM function may exist separately, or there is an NF for realizing both the MM function and the SM function. You may.
HSS_A50は、MME_A40とAAAとSCEFとに接続されており、加入者情報の管理を行う管理ノードである。HSS_A50の加入者情報は、例えばMME_A40のアクセス制御の際に参照される。さらに、HSS_A50は、MME_A40とは異なる位置管理装置と接続されていてもよい。例えば、HSS_A50は、CPF_A140と接続されていてもよい。
HSS_A50 is a management node that is connected to MME_A40, AAA, and SCEF and manages subscriber information. The subscriber information of HSS_A50 is referred to when the access control of MME_A40 is performed, for example. Further, the HSS_A50 may be connected to a position management device different from that of the MME_A40. For example, HSS_A50 may be connected to CPF_A140.
さらに、HSS_A50は、UDM(Unified Data Management)_A245は、異なる装置及び/又はNFとして構成されていてもよいし、同じ装置及び/又はNFとして構成されていてもよい。
Further, HSS_A50 and UDM (Unified Data Management) _A245 may be configured as different devices and / or NFs, or may be configured as the same device and / or NFs.
AAAは、PGW30とHSS_A50とPCRFとWLAN ANa70とに接続されており、WLAN ANa70を経由して接続するUE_A10のアクセス制御を行う。
AAA is connected to PGW30, HSS_A50, PCRF and WLAN ANa70, and controls access to UE_A10 connected via WLAN ANa70.
PCRFは、PGW_A30とWLAN ANa75とAAAとDN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6とに接続されており、データ配送に対するQoS管理を行う。例えば、UE_A10とDN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6間の通信路のQoSの管理を行う。さらに、PCRFは、各装置がユーザデータを送受信する際に用いるPCC(Policy and Charging Control)ルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを作成、及び/又は管理する装置でもよい。
PCRF is connected to PGW_A30, WLAN ANa75, AAA, DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6, and performs QoS management for data delivery. For example, it manages the QoS of the communication path between UE_A10 and DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6. Further, the PCRF may be a device that creates and / or manages PCC (Policy and Charging Control) rules and / or routing rules that each device uses when transmitting and receiving user data.
また、PCRFは、ポリシーを作成及び/又は管理するPCFでもよい。より詳細には、PCRFは、UPF_A235に接続されていてもよい。
The PCRF may also be a PCF that creates and / or manages policies. More specifically, the PCRF may be connected to UPF_A235.
ePDGは、PGW30とWLAN ANb75とに接続されており、コアネットワーク_A90とWLAN ANb75とのゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの配送を行う。
The ePDG is connected to PGW30 and WLAN ANb75, and delivers user data as a gateway between core network _A90 and WLAN ANb75.
SGSNは、UTRAN_A20とGERANとSGW_A35とに接続されており、3G/2Gのアクセスネットワーク(UTRAN/GERAN)とLTE(4G)のアクセスネットワーク(E-UTRAN)との間の位置管理の為の制御装置である。さらに、SGSNは、PGW及びSGWの選択機能、UE_A10のタイムゾーンの管理機能、及びE-UTRANへのハンドオーバー時のMME_A40の選択機能を持つ。
SGSN is connected to UTRAN_A20, GERAN and SGW_A35, and is a control device for position management between 3G / 2G access network (UTRAN / GERAN) and LTE (4G) access network (E-UTRAN). Is. Furthermore, the SGSN has a PGW and SGW selection function, a UE_A10 time zone management function, and an MME_A40 selection function at the time of handover to E-UTRAN.
SCEFは、DN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6とMME_A40とHSS_A50とに接続されており、DN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6とコアネットワーク_A90とを繋ぐゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置である。なお、SCEFは、non-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。さらに、SCEFは、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。また、こうしたゲートウェイはコアネットワーク_A90に複数配置されてよい。さらに、コアネットワーク_A90と単一のDN_A5及び/又はPDN_A6及び/又はDNを接続するゲートウェイも複数配置されてよい。なお、SCEFはコアネットワークの外側に構成されてもよいし、内側に構成されてもよい。
SCEF is a relay device that is connected to DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6, MME_A40 and HSS_A50, and transfers user data as a gateway connecting DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 and core network_A90. SCEF may be a gateway for non-IP communication. In addition, SCEF may have the ability to convert between non-IP communication and IP communication. In addition, a plurality of such gateways may be arranged in the core network_A90. Further, a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_A90 and a single DN_A5 and / or PDN_A6 and / or DN may be arranged. The SCEF may be configured outside the core network or inside the core network.
次に、コアネットワーク_B190について説明する。コアネットワーク_B190には、AUSF(Authentication Server Function)、AMF(Access and Mobility Management Function)_A240、UDSF(Unstructured Data Storage Function)、NEF(Network Exposure Function)、NRF(Network Repository Function)、PCF(Policy Control Function)、SMF(Session Management Function)_A230、UDM(Unified Data Management)、UPF(User Plane Function)_A235、AF(Application Function)、N3IWF(Non-3GPP InterWorking Function)のうち、少なくとも1つが含まれてよい。そして、これらはNF(Network Function)として構成されてもよい。NFとは、ネットワーク内に構成される処理機能を指してもよい。
Next, the core network_B190 will be explained. The core network_B190 includes AUFF (Authentication Server Function), AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function) _A240, UDSF (Unstructured Data Storage Function), NEF (Network Exposure Function), NRF (Network Repository Function), PCF (Policy Control). Function), SMF (Session Management Function) _A230, UDM (Unified Data Management), UPF (User Plane Function) _A235, AF (Application Function), N3IWF (Non-3GPP InterWorking Function) may be included. .. Then, these may be configured as NF (Network Function). NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network.
図4には、簡単化のために、これらのうち、AMF(AMF_A240)、SMF(SMF_A230)、及びUPF(UPF_A235)についてのみ記載されているが、これら以外のもの(装置及び/又はNF(Network Function))が含まれないということを意味するものではない。尚、簡単化のため、UE_A10はUEと、AMF_A240はAMFと、SMF_A230はSMFと、UPF_A235はUPFと、DN_A5はDNとも称する。
For simplicity, Figure 4 shows only AMF (AMF_A240), SMF (SMF_A230), and UPF (UPF_A235), but others (devices and / or NF (Network)). It does not mean that Function)) is not included. For simplicity, UE_A10 is also referred to as UE, AMF_A240 is referred to as AMF, SMF_A230 is referred to as SMF, UPF_A235 is referred to as UPF, and DN_A5 is also referred to as DN.
また、図4には、N1インターフェース(以下、参照点、reference pointとも称する)、N2インターフェース、N3インターフェース、N4インターフェース、N6インターフェース、N9インターフェース、N11インターフェースが記載されている。ここで、N1インターフェースはUEとAMFとの間のインターフェースであり、N2インターフェースは(R)AN(アクセスネットワーク)とAMFとの間のインターフェースであり、N3インターフェースは(R)AN(アクセスネットワーク)とUPFとの間のインターフェースであり、N4インターフェースはSMFとUPFとの間のインターフェースであり、N6インターフェースはUPFとDNとの間のインターフェースであり、N9インターフェースはUPFとUPFとの間のインターフェースであり、N11インターフェースはAMFとSMFとの間のインターフェースである。これらのインターフェースを利用して、各装置間は通信を行うことができる。ここで、(R)ANは、以下NG RANとも称する。
In addition, FIG. 4 shows the N1 interface (hereinafter, also referred to as a reference point or reference point), the N2 interface, the N3 interface, the N4 interface, the N6 interface, the N9 interface, and the N11 interface. Here, the N1 interface is the interface between the UE and AMF, the N2 interface is the interface between (R) AN (access network) and AMF, and the N3 interface is (R) AN (access network). The interface between UPF, the N4 interface is the interface between SMF and UPF, the N6 interface is the interface between UPF and DN, and the N9 interface is the interface between UPF and UPF. , N11 interface is the interface between AMF and SMF. Communication can be performed between the devices by using these interfaces. Here, (R) AN is also referred to as NG RAN below.
以下、コアネットワーク_B190内に含まれる各装置の簡単な説明をする。
The following is a brief description of each device included in the core network_B190.
まず、AMF_A240は、他のAMF、SMF(SMF_A230)、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)、UDM、AUSF、PCFに接続される。AMF_A240は、登録管理(Registration management)、接続管理(Connection management)、到達可能性管理(Reachability management)、UE_A10等の移動性管理(Mobility management)、UEとSMF間のSM(Session Management)メッセージの転送、アクセス認証(Access Authentication、Access Authorization)、セキュリティアンカー機能(SEA; Security Anchor Function)、セキュリティコンテキスト管理(SCM; Security Context Management)、N3IWFに対するN2インターフェースのサポート、N3IWFを介したUEとのNAS信号の送受信のサポート、N3IWFを介して接続するUEの認証、RM状態(Registration Management states)の管理、CM状態(Connection Management states)の管理等の役割を担ってもよい。また、AMF_A240は、コアネットワーク_B190内に1以上配置されてもよい。また、AMF_A240は、1以上のNSI(Network Slice Instance)を管理するNFでもよい。また、AMF_A240は、複数のNSI間で共有される共有CPファンクション(CCNF; Common CPNF(Control Plane Network Function))でもよい。
First, AMF_A240 is connected to other AMF, SMF (SMF_A230), access network (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120), UDM, AUSF, PCF. AMF_A240 is used for registration management (Registration management), connection management (Connection management), reachability management (Reachability management), mobility management such as UE_A10 (Mobility management), and transfer of SM (Session Management) messages between UE and SMF. , Access Authentication, Access Authorization, Security Anchor Function (SEA; Security Anchor Function), Security Context Management (SCM), N2 Interface Support for N3IWF, NAS Signals with UE via N3IWF It may play a role of support of transmission / reception, authentication of UE connected via N3IWF, management of RM state (Registration Management states), management of CM state (Connection Management states), and the like. Further, one or more AMF_A240s may be arranged in the core network_B190. In addition, AMF_A240 may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances). Further, AMF_A240 may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
また、RM状態としては、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)と、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)がある。RM-DEREGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されていないため、AMFにおけるUEコンテキストが、そのUEに対して有効な場所の情報やルーティングの情報を持っていない為、AMFはUEに到達できない状態である。また、RM-REGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されているため、UEはネットワークとの登録が必要なサービスを受信することができる。
In addition, the RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state). In the RM-DEREGISTERED state, the UE is not registered in the network, so the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE. is there. Also, in the RM-REGISTERED state, the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network.
また、CM状態としては、非接続状態(CM-IDLE state)と、接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state)がある。CM-IDLE状態では、UEはRM-REGISTERED状態にあるが、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っていない。また、CM-IDLE状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及びN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていない。一方、CM-CONNECTED状態では、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っている。また、CM-CONNECTED状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及び/又はN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていてもよい。
In addition, there are two types of CM states: a non-connected state (CM-IDLE state) and a connected state (CM-CONNECTED state). In the CM-IDLE state, the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state, but does not have a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface. Also, in the CM-IDLE state, the UE does not have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and an N3 interface connection (N3 connection). On the other hand, in the CM-CONNECTED state, it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface. Further, in the CM-CONNECTED state, the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
また、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション等のセッション管理(Session Management;SM;セッションマネジメント)機能、UEに対するIPアドレス割り当て(IP address allocation)及びその管理機能、UPFの選択と制御機能、適切な目的地へトラフィックをルーティングする為のUPFの設定機能、下りリンクのデータが到着したことを通知する機能(Downlink Data Notification)、AMFを介してANに対してN2インターフェースを介して送信される、AN特有の(ANごとの)SM情報を提供する機能、セッションに対するSSCモード(Session and Service Continuity mode)を決定する機能、ローミング機能、等を有してよい。また、SMF_A230は、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCFに接続されてもよい。
In addition, SMF_A230 has session management (Session Management; SM; session management) functions such as PDU sessions, IP address allocation to UEs and its management functions, UPF selection and control functions, and traffic to appropriate destinations. UPF setting function for routing, function to notify that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), and AN-specific (AN) transmitted to AN via AMF via N2 interface. It may have a function of providing SM information (for each session), a function of determining an SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for a session, a roaming function, and the like. In addition, SMF_A230 may be connected to AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF.
また、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、SMF_A230、他のUPF、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)に接続される。UPF_A235は、intra-RAT mobility又はinter-RAT mobilityに対するアンカー、パケットのルーティングと転送(Packet routing & forwarding)、1つのDNに対して複数のトラフィックフローのルーティングをサポートするUL CL(Uplink Classifier)機能、マルチホームPDUセッション(multi-homed PDU session)をサポートするBranching point機能、user planeに対するQoS処理、上りリンクトラフィックの検証(verification)、下りリンクパケットのバッファリング、下りリンクデータ通知(Downlink Data Notification)のトリガ機能等の役割を担ってもよい。また、UPF_A235は、DN_A5とコアネットワーク_B190との間のゲートウェイとして、ユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置でもよい。尚、UPF_A235は、IP通信及び/又はnon-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。さらに、UPF_A235は、IP通信を転送する機能を持っていてもよく、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。さらに複数配置されるゲートウェイは、コアネットワーク_B190と単一のDNを接続するゲートウェイでもよい。尚、UPF_A235は、他のNFとの接続性を備えてもよく、他のNFを介して各装置に接続してもよい。
Also, UPF_A235 is connected to DN_A5, SMF_A230, other UPFs, and access networks (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120). UPF_A235 is an anchor for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, packet routing & forwarding, UL CL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, Routing point function that supports multi-homed PDU session, QoS processing for userplane, verification of uplink traffic, buffering of downlink packet, downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification) It may play a role such as a trigger function. Further, UPF_A235 may be a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway between DN_A5 and core network_B190. UPF_A235 may be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication. Further, UPF_A235 may have a function of transferring IP communication, and may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication. Further, the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_B190 and a single DN. The UPF_A235 may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
尚、UPF_A235とアクセスネットワークとの間に、UPF_A235とは異なるUPFである、UPF_C239(branching point又はuplink classifierとも称する)が装置又はNFとして存在してもよい。UPF_C239が存在する場合、UE_A10とDN_A5との間のPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_C239、UPF_A235を介して確立されることになる。
Note that UPF_C239 (also referred to as branching point or uplink classifier), which is a UPF different from UPF_A235, may exist as a device or NF between UPF_A235 and the access network. If UPF_C239 is present, the PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_A5 will be established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_A235.
また、AUSFは、UDM、AMF_A240に接続されている。AUSFは、認証サーバとして機能する。
Also, AUSF is connected to UDM and AMF_A240. AUSF acts as an authentication server.
UDSFは、全てのNFが、構造化されていないデータ(unstructured data)として、情報を保存したり、取得したりするための機能を提供する。
UDSF provides a function for all NFs to store and retrieve information as unstructured data.
NEFは、3GPPネットワークによって提供されるサービス・能力を安全に提供する手段を提供する。他のNFから受信した情報を、構造化されたデータ(structured data)として保存する。
NEF provides a means to safely provide the services and capabilities provided by the 3GPP network. Information received from other NFs is saved as structured data.
NRFは、NFインスタンスからNF発見要求(NF Discovery Request)を受信すると、そのNFに対して、発見したNFインスタンスの情報を提供したり、利用可能なNFインスタンスや、そのインスタンスがサポートするサービスの情報を保持したりする。
When NRF receives an NF discovery request (NF Discovery Request) from an NF instance, it provides information on the discovered NF instance to that NF, information on available NF instances, and information on services supported by that instance. Or hold.
PCFは、SMF(SMF_A230)、AF、AMF_A240に接続されている。ポリシールール(policy rule)等を提供する。
PCF is connected to SMF (SMF_A230), AF, AMF_A240. Provide policy rules, etc.
UDMは、AMF_A240、SMF(SMF_A230)、AUSF、PCFに接続される。UDMは、UDM FE(application front end)とUDR(User Data Repository)を含む。UDM FEは、認証情報(credentials)、場所管理(location management)、加入者管理(subscription management)等の処理を行う。UDRは、UDM FEが提供するのに必要なデータと、PCFが必要とするポリシープロファイル(policy profiles)を保存する。
UDM is connected to AMF_A240, SMF (SMF_A230), AUSF, PCF. UDM includes UDM FE (application front end) and UDR (User Data Repository). UDM FE processes authentication information (credentials), location management (location management), subscription management (subscription management), and the like. UDR stores the data required by UDMFE and the policy profiles required by PCF.
AFは、PCFに接続される。AFは、トラフィックルーティングに対して影響を与えたり、ポリシー制御に関与したりする。
AF is connected to PCF. AF influences traffic routing and is involved in policy control.
N3IWFは、UEとのIPsecトンネルの確立、UEとAMF間のNAS(N1)シグナリングの中継(relaying)、SMFから送信されAMFによってリレーされたN2シグナリングの処理、IPsec Security Association(IPsec SA)の確立、UEとUPF間のuser planeパケットの中継(relaying)、AMF選択等の機能を提供する。
N3IWF establishes IPsec tunnel with UE, relays NAS (N1) signaling between UE and AMF, processes N2 signaling transmitted from SMF and relayed by AMF, and establishes IPsec Security Association (IPsec SA). , Provides functions such as relaying userplane packets between UE and UPF, and AMF selection.
また、S1モードは、S1インターフェースを用いたメッセージの送受信が可能なUEモードである。尚、S1インターフェースは、S1-MMEインターフェース及びS1-Uインターフェース及び無線基地局間を接続するX2インターフェースで構成されて良い。
In addition, S1 mode is a UE mode that allows sending and receiving of messages using the S1 interface. The S1 interface may be composed of an S1-MME interface, an S1-U interface, and an X2 interface that connects radio base stations.
S1モードのUEは、例えば、E-UTRA機能を提供するeNB経由のEPCへのアクセスや、NR機能を提供するen-gNB経由のEPCへのアクセスが可能である。
The UE in S1 mode can access the EPC via eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and the EPC via en-gNB that provides the NR function, for example.
尚、E-UTRA機能を提供するeNB経由のEPCへのアクセスとNR機能を提供するen-gNB経由のEPCへのアクセスをS1モードとしているが、それぞれ個別の異なるモードとして構成されていても良い。
Access to the EPC via eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and access to the EPC via en-gNB that provides the NR function are set to S1 mode, but they may be configured as different modes individually. ..
また、N1モードは、UEが、5Gアクセスネットワークを介した5GCへのアクセスができるUEモードである。また、N1モードは、N1インターフェースを用いたメッセージの送受信が可能なUEモードであってもよい。尚、N1インターフェースは、N1インターフェース及び無線基地局間を接続するXnインターフェースで構成されて良い。
In addition, N1 mode is a UE mode in which the UE can access 5GC via a 5G access network. Further, the N1 mode may be a UE mode capable of transmitting and receiving messages using the N1 interface. The N1 interface may be composed of an N1 interface and an Xn interface that connects radio base stations.
N1モードのUEは、例えば、E-UTRA機能を提供するng-eNB経由の5GCへのアクセスや、NR機能を提供するgNB経由の5GCへのアクセスが可能である。
The UE in N1 mode can access 5GC via ng-eNB, which provides the E-UTRA function, and 5GC via gNB, which provides the NR function, for example.
尚、E-UTRA機能を提供するng-eNB経由の5GCへのアクセスとNR機能を提供するgNB経由の5GCへのアクセスをN1モードとしているが、それぞれ個別の異なるモードとして構成されていても良い。
The access to 5GC via ng-eNB that provides the E-UTRA function and the access to 5GC via gNB that provides the NR function are set to N1 mode, but they may be configured as different modes individually. ..
[1.2.各装置の構成]
以下、各装置の構成について説明する。尚、下記各装置及び各装置の各部の機能の一部又は全部は、物理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよいし、汎用的なハードウェア上に仮想的に構成された論理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよい。 [1.2. Configuration of each device]
Hereinafter, the configuration of each device will be described. Note that some or all of the following devices and the functions of each part of each device may operate on physical hardware, or logical hardware virtually configured on general-purpose hardware. It may be the one that operates on the hardware.
以下、各装置の構成について説明する。尚、下記各装置及び各装置の各部の機能の一部又は全部は、物理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよいし、汎用的なハードウェア上に仮想的に構成された論理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよい。 [1.2. Configuration of each device]
Hereinafter, the configuration of each device will be described. Note that some or all of the following devices and the functions of each part of each device may operate on physical hardware, or logical hardware virtually configured on general-purpose hardware. It may be the one that operates on the hardware.
[1.2.1.UEの構成]
まず、UE_A10の装置構成例を、図5に示す。図5に示すように、UE_A10は、制御部_A500、送受信部_A520、記憶部_A540で構成される。送受信部_A520及び記憶部_A540は、制御部_A500とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_A520には、外部アンテナ410が接続されている。 [1.2.1. UE Configuration]
First, an example of the device configuration of UE_A10 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, UE_A10 is composed of a control unit_A500, a transmission / reception unit_A520, and a storage unit_A540. The transmission / reception unit_A520 and the storage unit_A540 are connected to the control unit_A500 via a bus. An external antenna 410 is connected to the transmitter / receiver _A520.
まず、UE_A10の装置構成例を、図5に示す。図5に示すように、UE_A10は、制御部_A500、送受信部_A520、記憶部_A540で構成される。送受信部_A520及び記憶部_A540は、制御部_A500とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_A520には、外部アンテナ410が接続されている。 [1.2.1. UE Configuration]
First, an example of the device configuration of UE_A10 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, UE_A10 is composed of a control unit_A500, a transmission / reception unit_A520, and a storage unit_A540. The transmission / reception unit_A520 and the storage unit_A540 are connected to the control unit_A500 via a bus. An external antenna 410 is connected to the transmitter / receiver _A520.
制御部_A500は、UE_A10全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_A540に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、UE_A10全体の各種処理を実現する。
The control unit_A500 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UE_A10, and realizes various processes of the entire UE_A10 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_A540.
送受信部_A520は、UE_A10がアクセスネットワーク内の基地局(UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)及び/又は無線LANアクセスポイント(WLAN AN)に接続し、アクセスネットワークへ接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、UE_A10は、送受信部_A520に接続された外部アンテナ410を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントと接続することができる。具体的には、UE_A10は、送受信部_A520に接続された外部アンテナ410を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The transmitter / receiver_A520 is a functional unit for UE_A10 to connect to the base stations (UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) and / or wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN) in the access network and to connect to the access network. is there. In other words, the UE_A10 can be connected to a base station and / or an access point in the access network via an external antenna 410 connected to the transmitter / receiver_A520. Specifically, the UE_A10 transmits / receives user data and / or control information to / from a base station and / or an access point in the access network via an external antenna 410 connected to the transmission / reception unit_A520. Can be done.
記憶部_A540は、UE_A10の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部であり、例えば、半導体メモリ、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)、SSD(Solid State Drive)等により構成されている。記憶部_A540は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ、ルール、ポリシー等を記憶している。
The storage unit_A540 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of UE_A10, and is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like. The storage unit_A540 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, rules, policies, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later.
[1.2.2. eNB/NR node]
次に、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122の装置構成例を、図6に示す。図6に示すように、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122は、制御部_B600、ネットワーク接続部_B620、送受信部_B630、記憶部_B640で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_B620、送受信部_B630及び記憶部_B640は、制御部_B600とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_B630には、外部アンテナ510が接続されている。 [1.2.2. eNB / NR node]
Next, Fig. 6 shows an example of the device configuration of eNB_A45 and NR node_A122. As shown in FIG. 6, the eNB_A45 and the NR node_A122 are composed of a control unit_B600, a network connection unit_B620, a transmission / reception unit_B630, and a storage unit_B640. The network connection unit_B620, the transmission / reception unit_B630, and the storage unit_B640 are connected to the control unit_B600 via a bus. Anexternal antenna 510 is connected to the transmitter / receiver _B630.
次に、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122の装置構成例を、図6に示す。図6に示すように、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122は、制御部_B600、ネットワーク接続部_B620、送受信部_B630、記憶部_B640で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_B620、送受信部_B630及び記憶部_B640は、制御部_B600とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_B630には、外部アンテナ510が接続されている。 [1.2.2. eNB / NR node]
Next, Fig. 6 shows an example of the device configuration of eNB_A45 and NR node_A122. As shown in FIG. 6, the eNB_A45 and the NR node_A122 are composed of a control unit_B600, a network connection unit_B620, a transmission / reception unit_B630, and a storage unit_B640. The network connection unit_B620, the transmission / reception unit_B630, and the storage unit_B640 are connected to the control unit_B600 via a bus. An
制御部_B600は、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_B640に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122全体の各種処理を実現する。
The control unit_B600 is a functional unit for controlling the entire eNB_A45 and NR node_A122, and by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_B640, the entire eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 Realize various processes.
ネットワーク接続部_B620は、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122が、コアネットワーク内のAMF_A240やUPF_A235と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122は、ネットワーク接続部_B620を介して、コアネットワーク内のAMF_A240やUPF_A235と接続することができる。具体的には、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122は、ネットワーク接続部_B620を介して、AMF_A240及び/又はUPF_A235との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The network connection part_B620 is a functional part for eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 to connect with AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network. In other words, eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can be connected to AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network via the network connection part_B620. Specifically, eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from AMF_A240 and / or UPF_A235 via the network connection unit_B620.
送受信部_B630は、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122が、UE_A10と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122は、送受信部_B630を介して、UE_A10との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The transmission / reception unit_B630 is a functional unit for eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 to connect to UE_A10. In other words, the eNB_A45 and NR node_A122 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the UE_A10 via the transmission / reception unit_B630.
記憶部_B640は、eNB_A45及びNR node_A122の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。記憶部_B640は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。記憶部_B640は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。記憶部_B640は、これらの情報をコンテキストとしてUE_A10毎に記憶してもよい。
The storage unit_B640 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of eNB_A45 and NR node_A122. The storage unit_B640 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like. The storage unit_B640 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later. The storage unit_B640 may store this information as a context for each UE_A10.
[1.2.3.MME/AMFの構成]
次に、MME_A40又はAMF_A240の装置構成例を、図7に示す。図7に示すように、MME_A40又はAMF_A240は、制御部_C700、ネットワーク接続部_C720、記憶部_C740で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_C720及び記憶部_C740は、制御部_C700とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_C740は、コンテキスト642を記憶している。 [1.2.3. MME / AMF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is composed of a control unit_C700, a network connection unit_C720, and a storage unit_C740. The network connection unit_C720 and the storage unit_C740 are connected to the control unit_C700 via a bus. In addition, the storage unit_C740 stores the context 642.
次に、MME_A40又はAMF_A240の装置構成例を、図7に示す。図7に示すように、MME_A40又はAMF_A240は、制御部_C700、ネットワーク接続部_C720、記憶部_C740で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_C720及び記憶部_C740は、制御部_C700とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_C740は、コンテキスト642を記憶している。 [1.2.3. MME / AMF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is composed of a control unit_C700, a network connection unit_C720, and a storage unit_C740. The network connection unit_C720 and the storage unit_C740 are connected to the control unit_C700 via a bus. In addition, the storage unit_C740 stores the context 642.
制御部_C700は、MME_A40又はAMF_A240全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_C740に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、AMF_A240全体の各種処理を実現する。
The control unit_C700 is a functional unit for controlling the entire MME_A40 or AMF_A240, and realizes various processes of the entire AMF_A240 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_C740. To do.
ネットワーク接続部_C720は、MME_A40又はAMF_A240が、他のMME_A40、AMF_240、SMF_A230、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局(UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)及び/又は無線LANアクセスポイント(WLAN AN)、UDM、AUSF、PCFと接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、MME_A40又はAMF_A240は、ネットワーク接続部_C720を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイント、UDM、AUSF、PCFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
In the network connection part_C720, MME_A40 or AMF_A240 is another MME_A40, AMF_240, SMF_A230, base stations in the access network (UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) and / or wireless LAN access point (WLAN AN), UDM. , AUSF, a functional part for connecting to PCF. In other words, the MME_A40 or AMF_A240 sends and receives user data and / or control information to and from the base station and / or access point, UDM, AUSF, PCF in the access network via the network connection_C720. Can be done.
記憶部_C740は、MME_A40又はAMF_A240の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。記憶部_C740は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。記憶部_C740は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。記憶部_C740に記憶されているコンテキスト642としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキスト、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキスト、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってもよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、IMSI、MSISDN、MM State、GUTI、ME Identity、UE Radio Access Capability、UE Network Capability、MS Network Capability、Access Restriction、MME F-TEID、SGW F-TEID、eNB Address、MME UE S1AP ID、eNB UE S1AP ID、NR node Address、NR node ID、WAG Address、WAG IDを含んでもよい。また、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、APN in Use、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、PGW F-TEID、SCEF ID、Default bearerを含んでもよい。また、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、EPS Bearer ID、TI、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、MME F-TEID、eNB Address、NR node Address、WAG Address、eNB ID、NR node ID、WAG IDを含んでもよい。
The storage unit_C740 is a functional unit that stores programs and data required for each operation of MME_A40 or AMF_A240. The storage unit_C740 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like. The storage unit_C740 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later. The context 642 stored in the storage unit_C740 may include a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer. The contexts stored for each UE include IMSI, MSISDN, MMState, GUTI, MEIdentity, UERadioAccessCapability, UENetworkCapability, MSNetworkCapability, AccessRestriction, MMEF-TEID, SGWF-TEID, eNBAddress. , MMEUES1APID, eNBUES1APID, NRnodeAddress, NRnodeID, WAGAddress, WAGID may be included. Further, the context stored for each PDU session may include APN in Use, Assigned Session Type, IP Address (es), PGW F-TEID, SCEF ID, and Default bearer. The contexts stored for each bearer are EPSBearerID, TI, TFT, SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, MMEF-TEID, eNBAddress, NRnodeAddress, WAGAddress, eNBID, NRnode. ID and WAG ID may be included.
[1.2.4.SMFの構成]
次に、SMF_A230の装置構成例を、図8に示す。図8に示すように、SMF_A230は、それぞれ、制御部_D800、ネットワーク接続部_D820、記憶部_D840で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D820及び記憶部_D840は、制御部_D800とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D840は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。 [1.2.4. SMF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of SMF_A230 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the SMF_A230 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively. The network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus. The storage unit_D840 stores thecontext 742.
次に、SMF_A230の装置構成例を、図8に示す。図8に示すように、SMF_A230は、それぞれ、制御部_D800、ネットワーク接続部_D820、記憶部_D840で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D820及び記憶部_D840は、制御部_D800とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D840は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。 [1.2.4. SMF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of SMF_A230 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the SMF_A230 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively. The network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus. The storage unit_D840 stores the
SMF_A230の制御部_D800は、SMF_A230全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_D840に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、SMF_A230全体の各種処理を実現する。
The control unit_D800 of SMF_A230 is a functional unit for controlling the entire SMF_A230, and realizes various processes of the entire SMF_A230 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D840. To do.
また、SMF_A230のネットワーク接続部_D820は、SMF_A230が、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCFと接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、SMF_A230は、ネットワーク接続部_D820を介して、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCF との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
Also, the network connection part_D820 of SMF_A230 is a functional part for SMF_A230 to connect with AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF. In other words, the SMF_A230 can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF via the network connection _D820.
また、SMF_A230の記憶部_D840は、SMF_A230 の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。SMF_A230の記憶部_D840は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。SMF_A230の記憶部_D840は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。また、SMF_A230の記憶部_D840で記憶されるコンテキスト742としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、IMSI、ME Identity、MSISDN、RAT typeを含んでもよい。APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、APN in useを含んでもよい。尚、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Data Network Identifierごとに記憶されてもよい。PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、Default Bearerを含んでもよい。ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、EPS Bearer ID、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEIDを含んでもよい。
The storage unit_D840 of SMF_A230 is a functional unit that stores programs, data, etc. required for each operation of SMF_A230. The storage unit_D840 of the SMF_A230 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like. The storage unit_D840 of the SMF_A230 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later. The context 742 stored in the storage unit_D840 of SMF_A230 includes a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each APN, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer. There may be a context. The context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype. The context stored for each APN may include APN in use. The context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier. The context stored for each PDU session may include AssignedSessionType, IPAddress (es), SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, DefaultBearer. The context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
[1.2.5.PGW/UPFの構成]
次に、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235の装置構成例を、図8に示す。図8に示すように、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235は、それぞれ、制御部_D800、ネットワーク接続部_D820、記憶部_D840で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D820及び記憶部_D840は、制御部_D800とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D840は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。 [1.2.5. PGW / UPF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively. The network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus. The storage unit_D840 stores thecontext 742.
次に、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235の装置構成例を、図8に示す。図8に示すように、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235は、それぞれ、制御部_D800、ネットワーク接続部_D820、記憶部_D840で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D820及び記憶部_D840は、制御部_D800とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D840は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。 [1.2.5. PGW / UPF configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is composed of a control unit_D800, a network connection unit_D820, and a storage unit_D840, respectively. The network connection unit _D820 and the storage unit _D840 are connected to the control unit _D800 via a bus. The storage unit_D840 stores the
PGW_A30又はUPF_A235の制御部_D800は、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_D840に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235全体の各種処理を実現する。
The control unit_D800 of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 is a functional unit for controlling the entire PGW_A30 or UPF_A235, and by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D840, PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 Realize various processing as a whole.
また、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235のネットワーク接続部_D820は、PGW_A30又はUPF_A235が、DN(つまり、DN_A5)、SMF_A230、他のUPF_A235、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、UPF_A235は、ネットワーク接続部_D820を介して、DN(つまり、DN_A5)、SMF_A230、他のUPF_A235、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、UTRAN_A20とE-UTRAN_A80とNG-RAN_A120)との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
In addition, the network connection part_D820 of PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 connects PGW_A30 or UPF_A235 to DN (that is, DN_A5), SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and access networks (that is, UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120). It is a functional part to do. In other words, UPF_A235 is between the DN (ie DN_A5), SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and the access network (ie UTRAN_A20 and E-UTRAN_A80 and NG-RAN_A120) via the network connection_D820. User data and / or control information can be sent and received.
また、UPF_A235の記憶部_D840は、UPF_A235の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。UPF_A235の記憶部_D840は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。UPF_A235の記憶部_D840は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。また、UPF_A235の記憶部_D840で記憶されるコンテキスト742としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、IMSI、ME Identity、MSISDN、RAT typeを含んでもよい。APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、APN in useを含んでもよい。尚、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Data Network Identifierごとに記憶されてもよい。PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、Default Bearerを含んでもよい。ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、EPS Bearer ID、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEIDを含んでもよい。
In addition, the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 is a functional unit that stores programs, data, etc. required for each operation of UPF_A235. The storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 is composed of, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like. The storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in the control messages transmitted and received in the communication procedure described later. The context 742 stored in the storage unit_D840 of UPF_A235 includes a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each APN, a context stored for each PDU session, and a context stored for each bearer. There may be a context. The context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype. The context stored for each APN may include APN in use. The context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier. The context stored for each PDU session may include AssignedSessionType, IPAddress (es), SGWF-TEID, PGWF-TEID, DefaultBearer. The context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
[1.2.6.上記各装置の記憶部に記憶される情報]
次に、上記各装置の記憶部で記憶される各情報について、説明する。 [1.2.6. Information stored in the storage unit of each of the above devices]
Next, each information stored in the storage unit of each of the above devices will be described.
次に、上記各装置の記憶部で記憶される各情報について、説明する。 [1.2.6. Information stored in the storage unit of each of the above devices]
Next, each information stored in the storage unit of each of the above devices will be described.
IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)は、加入者(ユーザ)の永久的な識別情報であり、UEを使用するユーザに割り当てられる識別情報である。UE_A10及びMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A2400及びSGW_A35が記憶するIMSIは、HSS_A50が記憶するIMSIと等しくてよい。
IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) is the permanent identification information of the subscriber (user), and is the identification information assigned to the user who uses the UE. The IMSI stored by UE_A10 and MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A2400 and SGW_A35 may be equal to the IMSI stored by HSS_A50.
EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10又はMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240の移動管理(Mobility management)状態を示す。例えば、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10がネットワークに登録されているEMM-REGISTERED状態(登録状態)、及び/又はUE_A10がネットワークに登録されていないEMM-DEREGISTERD状態(非登録状態)でもよい。また、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10とコアネットワーク間の接続が維持されているECM-CONNECTED状態、及び/又は接続が解放されているECM-IDLE状態でもよい。尚、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10がEPCに登録されている状態と、NGC又は5GCに登録されている状態とを、区別できる情報であってもよい。
EMM State / MM State indicates the mobility management state of UE_A10 or MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. For example, the EMM State / MM State may be an EMM-REGISTERED state (registered state) in which UE_A10 is registered in the network, and / or an EMM-DEREGISTERD state (unregistered state) in which UE_A10 is not registered in the network. Further, the EMM State / MM State may be an ECM-CONNECTED state in which the connection between UE_A10 and the core network is maintained, and / or an ECM-IDLE state in which the connection is released. The EMM State / MM State may be information that can distinguish between the state in which UE_A10 is registered in the EPC and the state in which it is registered in the NGC or 5GC.
GUTI(Globally Unique Temporary Identity)は、UE_A10の一時的な識別情報である。GUTIは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240の識別情報(GUMMEI(Globally Unique MME Identifier))と特定MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240内でのUE_A10の識別情報(M-TMSI(M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity))とにより構成される。ME Identityは、UE_A10又はMEのIDであり、例えば、IMEI(International Mobile Equipment Identity)やIMEISV(IMEI Software Version)でもよい。MSISDNは、UE_A10の基本的な電話番号を表す。MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240が記憶するMSISDNはHSS_A50の記憶部により示された情報でよい。尚、GUTIには、CPF_140を識別する情報が含まれてもよい。
GUTI (Globally Unique Temporary Identity) is temporary identification information of UE_A10. GUTI is composed of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 identification information (GUMMEI (Globally Unique MME Identifier)) and UE_A10 identification information (M-TMSI (M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity)) within the specific MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. Will be done. MEIdentity is UE_A10 or ME ID, and may be, for example, IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) or IMEISV (IMEI Software Version). MSISDN represents the basic telephone number of UE_A10. The MSISDN stored by MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 may be the information indicated by the storage unit of HSS_A50. The GUTI may include information that identifies CPF_140.
MME F-TEIDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報である。MME F-TEIDには、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のTEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)が含まれてもよいし、これらの両方が含まれてもよい。また、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスとMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のTEIDは独立して記憶されてもよい。また、MME F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。
MME F-TEID is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. The MME F-TEID may include the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240, the TEID (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier) of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240, or both of them. May be good. Further, the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 and the TEID of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 may be stored independently. Further, the MME F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
SGW F-TEIDは、SGW_A35を識別する情報である。SGW F-TEIDには、SGW_A35のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、SGW_A35のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これら両方が含まれてもよい。また、SGW_A35のIPアドレスとSGW_A35のTEIDとは、独立して記憶されてもよい。また、SGW F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。
SGW F-TEID is information that identifies SGW_A35. The SGW F-TEID may include the IP address of SGW_A35, the TEID of SGW_A35, or both. Further, the IP address of SGW_A35 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the SGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
PGW F-TEIDは、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235を識別する情報である。PGW F-TEIDには、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これらの両方が含まれてもよい。また、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のIPアドレスとPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のTEIDは独立して記憶されてもよい。また、PGW F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。
PGW F-TEID is information that identifies PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235. The PGW F-TEID may include the IP address of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235, the TEID of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235, or both. Good. Further, the IP address of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 and the TEID of PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 may be stored independently. Further, the PGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
eNB F-TEIDはeNB_A45を識別する情報である。eNB F-TEIDには、eNB_A45のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、eNB_A45のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これら両方が含まれてもよい。また、eNB_A45のIPアドレスとSGW_A35のTEIDとは、独立して記憶されてもよい。また、eNB F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。
The eNB F-TEID is information that identifies eNB_A45. The eNB F-TEID may include the IP address of eNB_A45, the TEID of eNB_A45, or both of them. Further, the IP address of eNB_A45 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the eNB F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
また、APNは、コアネットワークとDN等の外部ネットワークとを識別する識別情報でよい。さらに、APNは、コアネットワークA_90を接続するPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。尚、APNは、DNN(Data Network Name)であってもよい。従って、APNのことをDNNと表現してもよいし、DNNのことをAPNと表現してもよい。
In addition, APN may be identification information that identifies the core network and the external network such as DN. Furthermore, the APN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / UPF_A235 that connects the core network A_90. The APN may be a DNN (Data Network Name). Therefore, APN may be expressed as DNN, and DNN may be expressed as APN.
尚、APNは、こうしたゲートウェイを識別する識別情報でもよいし、DN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でもよい。尚、コアネットワークとDNとを接続するゲートウェイが複数配置される場合には、APNによって選択可能なゲートウェイは複数あってもよい。さらに、APN以外の識別情報を用いた別の手法によって、こうした複数のゲートウェイの中から1つのゲートウェイを選択してもよい。
The APN may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN. When a plurality of gateways connecting the core network and the DN are arranged, there may be a plurality of gateways that can be selected by the APN. Furthermore, one gateway may be selected from a plurality of these gateways by another method using identification information other than APN.
UE Radio Access Capabilityは、UE_A10の無線アクセス能力を示す識別情報である。UE Network Capabilityは、UE_A10にサポートされるセキュリティーのアルゴリズムと鍵派生関数を含める。MS Network Capabilityは、GERAN_A25及び/又はUTRAN_A20機能をもつUE_A10に対して、SGSN_A42に必要な1以上の情報を含める情報である。Access Restrictionは、アクセス制限の登録情報である。eNB Addressは、eNB_A45のIPアドレスである。MME UE S1AP IDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240内でUE_A10を識別する情報である。eNB UE S1AP IDは、eNB_A45内でUE_A10を識別する情報である。
UERadioAccessCapability is identification information indicating the wireless access capability of UE_A10. UENetworkCapability includes security algorithms and key derivation functions supported by UE_A10. MS Network Capability is information that includes one or more information required for SGSN_A42 for UE_A10 having GERAN_A25 and / or UTRAN_A20 functions. Access Restriction is registration information for access restrictions. eNB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45. The MMEUES1APID is information that identifies UE_A10 in MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. The eNB UES1AP ID is information that identifies UE_A10 in eNB_A45.
APN in Useは、最近使用されたAPNである。APN in UseはData Network Identifierでもよい。このAPNは、ネットワークの識別情報と、デフォルトのオペレータの識別情報とで構成されてよい。さらに、APN in Useは、PDUセッションの確立先のDNを識別する情報でもよい。
APN in Use is a recently used APN. APN in Use may be a Data Network Identifier. This APN may consist of network identification information and default operator identification information. Further, APN in Use may be information that identifies the DN at which the PDU session is established.
Assigned Session Typeは、PDUセッションのタイプを示す情報である。Assigned Session TypeはAssigned PDN Typeでもよい。PDUセッションのタイプは、IPでもよいし、non-IPでもよい。さらに、PDUセッションのタイプがIPである場合、ネットワークから割り当てられたPDNのタイプを示す情報をさらに含んでもよい。尚、Assigned Session Typeは、IPv4、IPv6、又はIPv4v6でよい。
Assigned Session Type is information indicating the type of PDU session. The Assigned Session Type may be the Assigned PDN Type. The type of PDU session can be IP or non-IP. In addition, if the type of PDU session is IP, it may further include information indicating the type of PDN assigned by the network. The AssignedSessionType may be IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4v6.
また、特に記載がない場合には、IP Addressは、UEに割り当てられたIPアドレスである。IPアドレスは、IPv4アドレスでもよいし、IPv6アドレスでもよいし、IPv6プレフィックスでもよいし、インターフェースIDであってもよい。尚、Assigned Session Typeがnon-IPを示す場合、IP Addressの要素を含まなくてもよい。
Unless otherwise specified, IP Address is the IP address assigned to the UE. The IP address may be an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, an IPv6 prefix, or an interface ID. When AssignedSessionType indicates non-IP, it is not necessary to include the element of IPAddress.
DN IDは、コアネットワーク_B190とDN等の外部ネットワークとを識別する識別情報である。さらに、DN IDは、コアネットワーク_B190を接続するUPGW_A130又はPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。
DN ID is identification information that distinguishes the core network_B190 from an external network such as DN. Furthermore, the DN ID can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as UPGW_A130 or PF_A235 that connects the core network_B190.
尚、DN IDは、こうしたゲートウェイを識別する識別情報でもよいし、DN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_B190とDNとを接続するゲートウェイが複数配置される場合には、DN IDによって選択可能なゲートウェイは複数あってもよい。さらに、DN ID以外の識別情報を用いた別の手法によって、こうした複数のゲートウェイの中から1つのゲートウェイを選択してもよい。
The DN ID may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN. When a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_B190 and the DN are arranged, there may be a plurality of gateways that can be selected by the DN ID. Further, one gateway may be selected from the plurality of gateways by another method using identification information other than DNID.
さらに、DN IDは、APNと等しい情報でもよいし、APNとは異なる情報でもよい。尚、DN IDとAPNが異なる情報である場合、各装置は、DN IDとAPNとの対応関係を示す情報を管理してもよいし、DN IDを用いてAPNを問い合わせる手続きを実施してもよいし、APNを用いてDN IDを問い合わせる手続きを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, the DN ID may be information equal to the APN or information different from the APN. If the DN ID and the APN are different information, each device may manage the information indicating the correspondence between the DN ID and the APN, or may carry out the procedure for inquiring the APN using the DN ID. Alternatively, the procedure for inquiring the DN ID using the APN may be carried out.
SCEF IDは、PDUセッションで用いられているSCEF_A46のIPアドレスである。Default Bearerは、PDUセッション確立時に取得及び/又は生成する情報であり、PDUセッションに対応づけられたデフォルトベアラ(default bearer)を識別する為のEPSベアラ識別情報である。
SCEFID is the IP address of SCEF_A46 used in the PDU session. The Default Bearer is information acquired and / or generated when the PDU session is established, and is EPS bearer identification information for identifying the default bearer associated with the PDU session.
EPS Bearer IDは、EPSベアラの識別情報である。また、EPS Bearer IDは、SRB(Signalling Radio Bearer)及び/又はCRB(Control-plane Radio bearer)を識別する識別情報でもよいし、DRB(Data Radio Bearer)を識別する識別情報でもよい。TI(Transaction Identifier)は、双方向のメッセージフロー(Transaction)を識別する識別情報である。尚、EPS Bearer IDは、デディケイテッドベアラ(dedicated bearer)を識別するEPSベアラ識別情報でよい。したがって、デフォルトベアラとは異なるEPSベアラを識別する識別情報でよい。TFTは、EPSベアラと関連づけられた全てのパケットフィルターを示す。TFTは送受信するユーザデータの一部を識別する情報であり、UE_A10は、TFTによって識別されたユーザデータを、TFTに関連付けたEPSベアラを用いて送受信する。さらに言い換えると、UE_A10は、TFTによって識別されたユーザデータを、TFTに関連づけたRB(Radio Bearer)を用いて送受信する。また、TFTは、送受信するアプリケーションデータ等のユーザデータを適切な転送路に対応づけるものでもよく、アプリケーションデータを識別する識別情報でもよい。また、UE_A10は、TFTで識別できないユーザデータを、デフォルトベアラを用いて送受信してもよい。また、UE_A10は、デフォルトベアラに関連付けられたTFTを予め記憶しておいてもよい。
EPS Bearer ID is the identification information of EPS bearer. Further, the EPS Bearer ID may be identification information for identifying SRB (Signalling Radio Bearer) and / or CRB (Control-plane Radio bearer), or may be identification information for identifying DRB (Data Radio Bearer). TI (Transaction Identifier) is identification information that identifies a bidirectional message flow (Transaction). The EPS Bearer ID may be EPS bearer identification information that identifies the dedicated bearer. Therefore, the identification information that identifies the EPS bearer different from the default bearer may be used. TFT shows all packet filters associated with EPS bearers. The TFT is information that identifies a part of the user data to be transmitted / received, and UE_A10 transmits / receives the user data identified by the TFT using the EPS bearer associated with the TFT. In other words, UE_A10 sends and receives user data identified by the TFT using the RB (Radio Bearer) associated with the TFT. Further, the TFT may associate user data such as application data to be transmitted / received with an appropriate transfer path, or may be identification information for identifying the application data. In addition, UE_A10 may send and receive user data that cannot be identified by TFT using the default bearer. UE_A10 may also store the TFT associated with the default bearer in advance.
Default Bearerは、PDUセッションに対応づけられたデフォルトベアラを識別するEPSベアラ識別情報である。尚、EPSベアラとは、UE_A10とPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235との間で確立する論理的な通信路でもよく、PDNコネクション/PDUセッションを構成する通信路でもよい。さらに、EPSベアラは、デフォルトベアラでもよく、デディケイテッドベアラでもよい。さらに、EPSベアラは、UE_A10とアクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントとの間で確立するRBを含んで構成されてよい。さらに、RBとEPSベアラとは1対1に対応づけられてよい。その為、RBの識別情報は、EPSベアラの識別情報と1対1に対応づけられてもよいし、同じ識別情報でもよい。尚、RBは、SRB及び/又はCRBでもよいし、DRBでもよい。また、Default Bearerは、PDUセッション確立時にUE_A10及び/又はSGW_A35及び/又はPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235がコアネットワークから取得する情報でよい。尚、デフォルトベアラとは、PDNコネクション/PDUセッション中で最初に確立されるEPSベアラであり、1つのPDNコネクション/PDUセッション中に、1つしか確立することができないEPSベアラである。デフォルトベアラは、TFTに対応付けられていないユーザデータの通信に用いることができるEPSベアラであってもよい。また、デディケイテッドベアラとは、PDNコネクション/PDUセッション中でデフォルトベアラが確立された後に確立されるEPSベアラであり、1つのPDNコネクション/PDUセッション中に、複数確立することができるEPSベアラである。デディケイテッドベアラは、TFTに対応付けられたユーザデータの通信に用いることができるEPSベアラである。
Default Bearer is EPS bearer identification information that identifies the default bearer associated with the PDU session. The EPS bearer may be a logical communication path established between UE_A10 and PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / UPF_A235, or may be a communication path constituting a PDN connection / PDU session. Further, the EPS bearer may be a default bearer or a dedicated bearer. In addition, the EPS bearer may be configured to include an RB established between UE_A10 and a base station and / or access point in the access network. Furthermore, there may be a one-to-one correspondence between RB and EPS bearers. Therefore, the RB identification information may be associated with the EPS bearer identification information on a one-to-one basis, or may be the same identification information. The RB may be SRB and / or CRB, or may be DRB. The Default Bearer may be information acquired by UE_A10 and / or SGW_A35 and / or PGW_A30 / UPGW_A130 / SMF_A230 / UPF_A235 from the core network when the PDU session is established. The default bearer is an EPS bearer that is first established in a PDN connection / PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established only once in one PDN connection / PDU session. The default bearer may be an EPS bearer that can be used to communicate user data that is not associated with a TFT. A decadeted bearer is an EPS bearer that is established after the default bearer is established during a PDN connection / PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established multiple times during a single PDN connection / PDU session. is there. A decadeted bearer is an EPS bearer that can be used to communicate user data associated with a TFT.
User Identityは、加入者を識別する情報である。User Identityは、IMSIでもよいし、MSISDNでもよい。さらに、User Identityは、IMSI、MSISDN以外の識別情報でもよい。Serving Node Informationは、PDUセッションで用いられているMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報であり、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスでよい。
User Identity is information that identifies the subscriber. User Identity may be IMSI or MSISDN. Further, User Identity may be identification information other than IMSI and MSISDN. Serving Node Information is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240 used in the PDU session, and may be the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240.
eNB Addressは、eNB_A45のIPアドレスである。eNB IDは、eNB_A45内でUEを識別する情報である。MME Addressは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスである。MME IDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報である。NR node Addressは、NR node_A122のIPアドレスである。NR node IDは、NR node_A122を識別する情報である。WAG Addressは、WAGのIPアドレスである。WAG IDは、WAGを識別する情報である。
ENB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45. The eNB ID is information that identifies the UE in eNB_A45. MMEAddress is the IP address of MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. The MME ID is information that identifies MME_A40 / CPF_A140 / AMF_A240. NR nodeAddress is the IP address of NR node_A122. The NR node ID is information that identifies the NR node_A122. WAGAddress is the IP address of WAG. WAG ID is information that identifies WAG.
アンカー、もしくはアンカーポイントとは、DNとPDUセッションのゲートウェイ機能を備えるUFPである。アンカーポイントとなるUPFはPDUセッションアンカーであってもよいし、アンカーであってもよい。
Anchor or anchor point is a UFP that has a gateway function for DN and PDU sessions. The UPF serving as an anchor point may be a PDU session anchor or an anchor.
SSCモードは、5GCにおいて、システム、及び/又は各装置がサポートするサービスセッション継続(Session and Service Continuity)のモードを示すものである。より詳細には、UE_A10とアンカーポイント)との間で確立されたPDUセッションがサポートするサービスセッション継続の種類を示すモードであってもよい。ここで、アンカーポイントは、UPGWであってもよいし、UPF_A235であってもよい。なお、SSC modeはPDUセッション毎に設定されるサービスセッション継続の種類を示すモードであってもよい。さらに、SSC modeは、SSC mode 1、SSC mode 2、SSC mode 3の3つのモードから構成されていてもよい。SSC modeはアンカーポイントに関連付けられており、PDUセッションが確立されている状態の間変更されることはできない。
The SSC mode indicates the mode of service session continuity (Session and Service Continuity) supported by the system and / or each device in 5GC. More specifically, it may be a mode indicating the types of service session continuation supported by the PDU session established between UE_A10 and the anchor point). Here, the anchor point may be UPGW or UPF_A235. Note that SSC mode may be a mode indicating the type of service session continuation set for each PDU session. Further, the SSC mode may be composed of three modes, SSC mode 1, SSC mode 2, and SSC mode 3. The SSC mode is associated with the anchor point and cannot be changed while the PDU session is established.
さらに、SSC mode 1は、UE_A10がネットワークに接続する際に用いるRAT(Radio Access Technology)やセル等のアクセステクノロジーに関わらず、同じUPFがアンカーポイントとして維持され続けるサービスセッション継続のモードである。より詳細には、SSC mode 1は、UE_A10のモビリティが発生しても、確立しているPDUセッションが用いるアンカーポイントを変更せずに、サービスセッション継続を実現するモードであってもよい。
Furthermore, SSC mode 1 is a service session continuation mode in which the same UPF is maintained as an anchor point regardless of the access technology such as RAT (Radio Access Technology) and cells used when UE_A10 connects to the network. More specifically, SSC mode1 may be a mode that realizes the continuation of the service session without changing the anchor point used by the established PDU session even when the mobility of UE_A10 occurs.
さらに、SSC mode 2は、PDUセッション内に1つのSSC mode2に関連付けられたアンカーポイントを含む場合、先にPDUセッションを解放してから、続けてPDUセッションを確立するサービスセッション継続のモードである。より詳細には、SSC mode2は、アンカーポイントのリロケーションが発生した場合、一度PDUセッションを削除してから、新たにPDUセッションを確立するモードである。
Furthermore, SSC mode2 is a service session continuation mode in which the PDU session is released first and then the PDU session is established continuously when the anchor point associated with one SSC mode2 is included in the PDU session. More specifically, SSC mode2 is a mode in which when an anchor point relocation occurs, the PDU session is deleted once and then a new PDU session is established.
さらに、SSC mode 2は、UPFのサービングエリア内でのみ、同じUPFをアンカーポイントとして維持され続けるサービスセッション継続のモードである。より詳細には、SSC mode 2は、UE_A10がUPFのサービングエリア内にいる限り、確立しているPDUセッションが用いるUPFを変更せずに、サービスセッション継続を実現するモードであってもよい。さらに、SSC mode 2は、UPFのサービングエリアから出るような、UE_A10のモビリティが発生した場合に、確立しているPDUセッションが用いるUPFを変更して、サービスセッション継続を実現するモードであってもよい。
Furthermore, SSC mode2 is a service session continuation mode in which the same UPF is maintained as an anchor point only within the serving area of the UPF. More specifically, SSC mode2 may be a mode that realizes service session continuation without changing the UPF used by the established PDU session as long as UE_A10 is within the serving area of the UPF. Furthermore, SSC mode2 is a mode that realizes the continuation of the service session by changing the UPF used by the established PDU session when the mobility of UE_A10 occurs, such as leaving the serving area of the UPF. Good.
ここで、TUPFのサービングエリアとは、1つのUPFがサービスセッション継続機能を提供することができるエリアであってもよいし、UE_A10がネットワークに接続する際に用いるRATやセル等のアクセスネットワークのサブセットであってもよい。さらに、アクセスネットワークのサブセットとは、一又複数のRAT、及び/又はセルから構成されるネットワークであってもよいし、TAであってもよい。
Here, the TUPF serving area may be an area where one UPF can provide the service session continuation function, or a subset of the access network such as RAT and cell used when UE_A10 connects to the network. It may be. Further, the subset of the access network may be a network composed of one or more RATs and / or cells, or may be a TA.
さらに、SSC mode 3は、UEとアンカーポイント間のPDUセッションを解放しないで、同じDNに対して新しいアンカーポイントとUE間でPDUセッションを確立することが出来るサービスセッション継続のモードである。
Furthermore, SSC mode3 is a service session continuation mode in which a PDU session can be established between a new anchor point and the UE for the same DN without releasing the PDU session between the UE and the anchor point.
さらに、SSC mode 3は、UE_A10とUPFとの間で確立されたPDUセッション、及び/又は通信路を切断する前に、同じDNに対して、新たなUPFを介した新たなPDUセッション、及び/又は通信路を確立することを許可するサービスセッション継続のモードである。さらに、SSC mode 3は、UE_A10がマルチホーミングになることを許可するサービスセッション継続のモードであってもよい。
In addition, SSCmode3 has a PDU session established between UE_A10 and the UPF, and / or a new PDU session via a new UPF for the same DN before disconnecting the communication path, and / Alternatively, it is a mode of service session continuation that allows the establishment of a communication path. Further, SSC mode3 may be a service session continuation mode that allows UE_A10 to be multihoming.
及び/又は、SSC mode 3は、複数のPDUセッション、及び/又はPDUセッションに対応づけられたUPFを用いたサービスセッション継続が許可されたモードであってもよい。言い換えると、SSC mode 3の場合、各装置は、複数のPDUセッションを用いてサービスセッション継続を実現してもよいし、複数のTUPFを用いてサービスセッション継続を実現してもよい。
And / or SSC mode 3 may be a mode in which the continuation of the service session using the UPF associated with a plurality of PDU sessions and / or the PDU session is permitted. In other words, in the case of SSC mode3, each device may realize the service session continuation by using a plurality of PDU sessions, or may realize the service session continuation by using a plurality of TUPFs.
ここで、各装置が、新たなPDUセッション、及び/又は通信路を確立する場合、新たなUPFの選択は、ネットワークによって実施されてもよいし、新たなUPFは、UE_A10がネットワークに接続した場所に最適なUPFであってもよい。さらに、複数のPDUセッション、及び/又はPDUセッションが用いるUPFが有効である場合、UE_A10は、アプリケーション、及び/又はフローの通信の新たに確立されたPDUセッションへの対応づけを、即座に実施してもよいし、通信の完了に基づいて実施してもよい。
Here, if each device establishes a new PDU session and / or communication path, the selection of the new UPF may be carried out by the network, and the new UPF is where UE_A10 connects to the network. It may be the most suitable UPF. In addition, if the UPF used by multiple PDU sessions and / or PDU sessions is enabled, UE_A10 will immediately address the newly established PDU session for application and / or flow communication. It may be carried out based on the completion of communication.
[1.3.初期手続きの説明]
次に、初期手続きの詳細手順を説明する前に、重複説明を避ける為、特有の用語や、各手続きに用いる主要な識別情報を予め説明する。 [1.3. Explanation of initial procedure]
Next, before explaining the detailed procedure of the initial procedure, specific terms and main identification information used for each procedure will be explained in advance in order to avoid duplicate explanation.
次に、初期手続きの詳細手順を説明する前に、重複説明を避ける為、特有の用語や、各手続きに用いる主要な識別情報を予め説明する。 [1.3. Explanation of initial procedure]
Next, before explaining the detailed procedure of the initial procedure, specific terms and main identification information used for each procedure will be explained in advance in order to avoid duplicate explanation.
ネットワークとは、アクセスネットワーク_A20/80、アクセスネットワーク_B80/120、コアネットワーク_A90、コアネットワーク_B190、DN_A5、及びPDN_A6のうち、少なくとも一部を指す。また、アクセスネットワーク_A20/80、アクセスネットワーク_B80/120、コアネットワーク_A90、コアネットワーク_B190、DN_A5、及びPDN_A6のうち、少なくとも一部に含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と称してもよい。つまり、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は手続きを実行するということは、ネットワーク内の装置(ネットワーク装置)がメッセージの送受信及び/又は手続きを実行することを意味する。
The network refers to at least a part of access network_A20 / 80, access network_B80 / 120, core network_A90, core network_B190, DN_A5, and PDN_A6. In addition, one or more devices included in at least a part of access network_A20 / 80, access network_B80 / 120, core network_A90, core network_B190, DN_A5, and PDN_A6 are referred to as a network or network device. You may call it. That is, the fact that the network executes the transmission / reception and / or procedure of the message means that the device (network device) in the network executes the transmission / reception and / or procedure of the message.
セッションマネジメント(SM; Session Management)メッセージ(NAS(Non-Access-Stratum) SMメッセージ又は、SMメッセージとも称する)は、SMのための手続き(セッションマネジメント手続き又は、SM手続きとも称する)で用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション完了メッセージ、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、PDUセッション変更受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。また、SMのための手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続き、PDUセッション変更手続き等が含まれてもよい。
Session Management (SM; Session Management) messages (also called NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SM messages or SM messages) are NAS messages used in procedures for SM (also called session management procedures or SM procedures). It may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. Further, the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session establishment rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, and the like. It may be. In addition, the procedure for SM may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
なお、SMメッセージのうち、UE_A10が送信するメッセージを、SM要求メッセージと表現する。具体的には、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージとPDUセッション変更要求メッセージは、SM要求メッセージである。
Of the SM messages, the message sent by UE_A10 is expressed as an SM request message. Specifically, the PDU session establishment request message and the PDU session change request message are SM request messages.
トラッキングエリア(TA; Tracking Areaとも称する)は、コアネットワークが管理する、UE_A10の位置情報で表すことが可能な範囲であり、例えば1以上のセルで構成されてもよい。また、TAは、ページングメッセージ等の制御メッセージがブロードキャストされる範囲でもよいし、UE_A10がハンドオーバー手続きをせずに移動できる範囲でもよい。
The tracking area (also referred to as TA; Tracking Area) is a range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network, and may be composed of, for example, one or more cells. Further, the TA may be a range in which a control message such as a paging message is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure.
TAリスト(TA list)は、ネットワークがUE_A10に割り当てた1以上のTAが含まれるリストである。尚、UE_A10は、TAリストに含まれる1以上のTA内を移動している間は、登録手続きを実行することなく移動することができてよい。言い換えると、TAリストは、UE_A10が登録手続きを実行することなく移動できるエリアを示す情報群であってよい。
The TA list is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned to UE_A10 by the network. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the registration procedure while moving within one or more TAs included in the TA list. In other words, the TA list may be a set of information indicating the areas that UE_A10 can move to without performing the registration procedure.
ネットワークスライス(Network Slice)とは、特定のネットワーク能力及びネットワーク特性を提供する論理的なネットワークである。以下、ネットワークスライスはNWスライスとも称する。
A network slice is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics. Hereinafter, the network slice is also referred to as a NW slice.
NSI(Network Slice Instance)とは、コアネットワーク_B190内に1又は複数構成される、ネットワークスライス(Network Slice)の実体である。また、NSIはNST(Network Slice Template)を用いて生成された仮想的なNF(Network Function)により構成されてもよい。ここで、NSTとは、要求される通信サービスや能力(capability)を提供する為のリソース要求に関連付けられ、1又は複数のNF(Network Function)の論理的表現である。つまり、NSIとは、複数のNFにより構成されたコアネットワーク_B190内の集合体でよい。また、NSIはサービス等によって配送されるユーザデータを分ける為に構成された論理的なネットワークでよい。ネットワークスライスには、少なくとも1つ以上のNFが構成されてよい。ネットワークスライスに構成されるNFは、他のネットワークスライスと共有される装置であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。UE_A10、及び/又ネットワーク内の装置は、NSSAI及び/又は、S-NSSAI及び/又は、UE usage type及び/又は、1又は複数のネットワークスライスタイプID及び/又は、1又は複数のNS ID等の登録情報及び/又はAPNに基づいて、1又は複数のネットワークスライスに割り当てられることができる。
NSI (Network Slice Instance) is an entity of network slice (Network Slice) composed of one or more in core network_B190. Further, NSI may be composed of a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template). Here, NST is a logical expression of one or more NFs (Network Functions) associated with a resource request for providing a required communication service or capability. That is, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs. In addition, NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like. At least one or more NFs may be configured in the network slice. The NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices. UE_A10 and / or devices in the network include NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or one or more network slice type IDs and / or one or more NS IDs, etc. It can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and / or APN.
S-NSSAIは、Single Network Slice Selection Assistance informationの略であり、ネットワークスライスを識別するための情報である。S-NSSAIは、SST (Slice/Service type)とSD (Slice Differentiator)で構成されていてよい。S-NSSAIはSSTのみが構成されてもよいし、SSTとSDの両方で構成されてもよい。ここで、SSTとは、機能とサービスの面で期待されるネットワークスライスの動作を示す情報である。また、SDは、SSTで示される複数のNSIから1つのNSIを選択する際に、SSTを補完する情報であってもよい。S-NSSAIは、PLMN(Public Land Mobile Network)ごとに特有な情報であってもよいし、PLMN間で共通化された標準の情報であってもし、PLMNごとに異なる通信事業者特有の情報であってもよい。
S-NSSAI is an abbreviation for Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information, and is information for identifying network slices. S-NSSAI may be composed of SST (Slice / Service type) and SD (Slice Differentiator). S-NSSAI may be composed of SST only or both SST and SD. Here, SST is information indicating the operation of the network slice expected in terms of function and service. Further, SD may be information that complements SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by SST. S-NSSAI may be information specific to each PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network), standard information shared among PLMNs, or information specific to a telecommunications carrier that differs for each PLMN. There may be.
より具体的には、SST及び/又はSDはPLMN間で共通化された標準の情報(Standard Value)であってもよいし、PLMNごとに異なる通信事業者特有の情報(Non Standard Value)であってもよい。また、ネットワークは、デフォルトのS-NSSAIとして、UE_A10の登録情報に1つまたは複数のS-NSSAIを記憶してもよい。
More specifically, SST and / or SD may be standard information (Standard Value) shared between PLMNs, or information specific to a telecommunications carrier (Non Standard Value) that differs for each PLMN. You may. In addition, the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the registration information of UE_A10 as the default S-NSSAI.
NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)はS-NSSAIの集まりである。NSSAIに含まれる、各S-NSSAIはアクセスネットワークまたはコアネットワークがNSIを選択するのをアシストする情報である。UE_A10はPLMNごとにネットワークから許可されたNSSAIを記憶してもよい。また、NSSAIはAMF_A240を選択するのに用いられる情報であってよい。
NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information) is a collection of S-NSSAI. Each S-NSSAI contained in NSSAI is information that assists the access network or core network in selecting NSI. UE_A10 may store NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF_A240.
オペレータA網は、ネットワークオペレータA(オペレータA)が運用しているネットワークである。ここで、例えば、オペレータAは後述のオペレータBと共通のNWスライスを展開していてもよい。
Operator A network is a network operated by network operator A (operator A). Here, for example, the operator A may develop a NW slice common to the operator B described later.
オペレータB網は、ネットワークオペレータB(オペレータB)が運用しているネットワークである。ここで、例えば、オペレータBは、オペレータAと共通のNWスライスを展開していてもよい。
Operator B network is a network operated by network operator B (operator B). Here, for example, operator B may develop a NW slice common to operator A.
第1のNWスライスは、UEが特定のDNに接続する際に確立PDUセッションが属するNWスライスである。尚、例えば、第1のNWスライスは、オペレータA網内で管理されるNWスライスであってもよいし、オペレータB網内で共通して管理されるNWスライスであってもよい。
The first NW slice is the NW slice to which the established PDU session belongs when the UE connects to a specific DN. For example, the first NW slice may be a NW slice managed in the operator A network or a NW slice commonly managed in the operator B network.
第2のNWスライスは、第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションが接続先としているDNに接続できる別のPDUセッションが属するNWスライスである。尚、第1のNWスライスと第2のNWスライスとは、同じオペレータによって運用されてもよいし、異なるオペレータによって運用されてもよい。
The second NW slice is a NW slice to which another PDU session that can connect to the DN to which the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice belongs belongs. The first NW slice and the second NW slice may be operated by the same operator or may be operated by different operators.
均等PLMN(equivalent PLMN)は、ネットワークで任意のPLMNと同じPLMNであるように扱われるPLMNのことである。
Equal PLMN (equivalent PLMN) is a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same PLMN as any PLMN in the network.
DCN(Dedicated Core Network)とは、コアネットワーク_A90内に、1つまたは複数構成される、特定の加入者タイプ専用のコアネットワークである。具体的には、例えば、M2M(Machine to Machine)通信機能の利用者として登録されたUEの為のDCNが、コアネットワーク_A90内に構成されていてもよい。また、その他に、適切なDCNがないUEのための、デフォルトDCNがコアネットワーク_A90内に構成されていてもよい。更に、DCNには、少なくとも1つ以上のMME_40またはSGSN_A42が配置されていてよく、さらに、少なくとも1つ以上のSGW_A35またはPGW_A30またはPCRF_A60が配置されてよい。尚、DCNは、DCN IDで識別されてもよいし、更にUEは、UE usage type及び/又はDCN ID等の情報に基づいて、1つのDCNに割り当てられてもよい。
DCN (Dedicated Core Network) is a core network dedicated to a specific subscriber type, consisting of one or more in the core network_A90. Specifically, for example, a DCN for a UE registered as a user of an M2M (Machine to Machine) communication function may be configured in the core network_A90. Alternatively, a default DCN may be configured within core network_A90 for UEs that do not have a suitable DCN. In addition, the DCN may be populated with at least one MME_40 or SGSN_A42, and may further be populated with at least one SGW_A35 or PGW_A30 or PCRF_A60. The DCN may be identified by the DCN ID, and the UE may be assigned to one DCN based on information such as the UE usage type and / or the DCN ID.
第1のタイマーは、PDUセッション確立手続き等のセッションマネジメントのための手続きの開始、及び/又はPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ等のSM(Session Management)メッセージの送信を管理するタイマーであり、セッションマネジメントの挙動を管理するためのバックオフタイマーの値を示す情報であってもよい。以下、第1のタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーをタイマーと称することがある。第1のタイマーが実行されている間は、各装置の、セッションマネジメントのための手続きの開始、及び/又はSMメッセージの送受信は禁止されていてもよい。尚、第1のタイマーは、NWが適用した輻輳管理単位、及び/又はUEが識別した輻輳管理単位の少なくとも一つに関連付けて設定されていてもよい。例えば、APN/DNN単位、及び/又は1又は複数のNWスライスを示す識別情報単位、及び/又はセッションマネジメント手続きにおける拒絶理由値単位、及び/又はセッションマネジメント手続きにおいて拒絶が示されたセッション単位、及び/又はセッションマネジメント手続きのPTI単位の少なくとも一つの単位で設定されていてもよい。
The first timer is a timer that manages the start of procedures for session management such as the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the transmission of SM (Session Management) messages such as the PDU session establishment request message, and is the behavior of session management. It may be information indicating the value of the backoff timer for managing the session. Hereinafter, the first timer and / or the backoff timer may be referred to as a timer. While the first timer is running, each device may be prohibited from starting procedures for session management and / or sending and receiving SM messages. The first timer may be set in association with at least one of the congestion management unit applied by the NW and / or the congestion management unit identified by the UE. For example, APN / DNN units and / or identification information units indicating one or more NW slices, and / or rejection reason value units in the session management procedure, and / or session units indicated to be rejected in the session management procedure, and / Or it may be set in at least one PTI unit of the session management procedure.
尚、SMメッセージは、セッションマネジメントのための手続きで用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション完了メッセージ、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、PDUセッション変更受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。さらに、セッションマネジメントのための手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続き、PDUセッション変更手続き等が含まれてもよい。また、これら手続きにおいて、UE_A10が受信するメッセージ毎にバックオフタイマー値が含まれることがある。UEは、第1のタイマーとして、NWから受信したバックオフタイマーを設定してもよいし、別の方法でタイマー値を設定してもよいし、ランダム値を設定してもよい。又、NWから受信したバックオフタイマーが複数で構成されている場合は、UEは、複数のバックオフタイマーに応じた複数の「第1のタイマー」を管理してもよいし、UEが保持するポリシーに基づいて、NWから受けた複数のバックオフタイマー値から一つのタイマー値を選択し、第1のタイマーに設定し、管理してもよい。例えば、2つのバックオフタイマー値を受けた場合、UEは、NWから受けたバックオフタイマー値を、「第1のタイマー#1」と「第1のタイマー#2」にそれぞれに設定し、管理する。又、UEが保持するポリシーに基づいて、NWから受けた複数のバックオフタイマー値から一つの値を選択し、第1のタイマーに設定し、管理してもよい。
The SM message may be a NAS message used in the procedure for session management, and may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. Further, the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session establishment rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, and the like. It may be. Further, the procedure for session management may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like. Also, in these procedures, the backoff timer value may be included for each message received by UE_A10. The UE may set the back-off timer received from the NW as the first timer, may set the timer value by another method, or may set a random value. Further, when a plurality of backoff timers received from the NW are configured, the UE may manage a plurality of "first timers" corresponding to the plurality of backoff timers, and the UE holds the timers. Based on the policy, one timer value may be selected from a plurality of backoff timer values received from the NW, set as the first timer, and managed. For example, when two backoff timer values are received, the UE sets the backoff timer values received from the NW to "first timer # 1" and "first timer # 2", respectively, and manages them. To do. Further, based on the policy held by the UE, one value may be selected from a plurality of backoff timer values received from the NW, set as the first timer, and managed.
UE_A10は、NWから複数のバックオフタイマー値を受けた場合、複数のバックオフタイマーに応じた複数の「第1のタイマー」を管理してもよい。ここで、UE_A10が受信する複数の「第1のタイマー」を区別するため、以下、例えば「第1のタイマー#1」又は「第1のタイマー#2」のように記載することがある。尚、複数のバックオフタイマーは、一度のセッションマネジメント手続きで取得してもよいし、異なる別のセッションマネジメント手続きで取得してもよい。
UE_A10 may manage a plurality of "first timers" corresponding to a plurality of backoff timers when receiving a plurality of backoff timer values from the NW. Here, in order to distinguish a plurality of "first timers" received by UE_A10, the following may be described as, for example, "first timer # 1" or "first timer # 2". The plurality of backoff timers may be acquired by one session management procedure or by different different session management procedures.
ここで、第1のタイマーは、前述した通り1つのNWスライスを識別する為の情報に基づき関連する複数のNWスライスに対して設定され、再接続を抑止する為のバックオフタイマー、又はAPN/DNNと1つのNWスライスの組み合わせを単位として設定され、再接続を防止する為のバックオフタイマーであって良いが、これに限らず、APN/DNNと1つのNWスライスを識別する為の情報に基づき関連する複数のNWスライスとを組み合わせた単位で設定され、再接続を抑止する為のバックオフタイマーであってもよい。
Here, the first timer is set for a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for identifying one NW slice as described above, and is a backoff timer for suppressing reconnection, or APN /. It may be a backoff timer that is set in units of a combination of DNN and one NW slice to prevent reconnection, but it is not limited to this, and it is information for identifying APN / DNN and one NW slice. Based on this, it may be a backoff timer that is set in units of a combination of a plurality of related NW slices and suppresses reconnection.
第11の識別情報に含まれるre-attempt(Re-attempt)情報は、拒絶されたPDUセッション確立要求(S1100)について、同一のDNN情報及び/又はS-NSSAI情報を用いて再接続を許すかどうかをネットワーク(NW)がUE_A10に指示する情報である。
Does the re-attempt (Re-attempt) information contained in the eleventh identification information allow the rejected PDU session establishment request (S1100) to be reconnected using the same DNN information and / or S-NSSAI information? This is the information that the network (NW) tells UE_A10.
この時、PDUセッション確立要求(1100)において、UEがDNNを含まないPDUセッション確立要求(S1100)を実行していた場合、DNNを含まない事を同一の情報と称する。又、PDUセッション確立要求(1100)において、UEがS-NSSAIを含まないPDUセッション確立要求(S1100)を実行していた場合、S-NSSAIを含まない事を同一の情報と称する。
At this time, if the UE is executing the PDU session establishment request (S1100) that does not include the DNN in the PDU session establishment request (1100), the fact that the DNN is not included is referred to as the same information. Further, when the UE executes the PDU session establishment request (S1100) that does not include S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment request (1100), the fact that S-NSSAI is not included is referred to as the same information.
尚、re-attempt情報は、UTRANアクセス及び/又はE-UTRANアクセス及び/又はNRアクセス及び/又はスライス情報及び/又は均等PLMN及び/又はS1モード及び/又はNWモード単位、で設定されてもよい。
The re-attempt information may be set in units of UTRAN access and / or E-UTRAN access and / or NR access and / or slice information and / or equal PLMN and / or S1 mode and / or NW mode. ..
更に、アクセス単位(UTRANアクセス、E-UTRANアクセス、NRアクセス)で指定されたre-attempt情報は、アクセス変更を前提にネットワークへの同一の情報を用いた再接続を示す情報であってよい。スライス単位で指定されたre-attempt情報は、拒絶されたスライスとは異なるスライス情報が指定され、指定されたスライス情報を用いた再接続は許されてもよい。
Furthermore, the re-attempt information specified in the access unit (UTRAN access, E-UTRAN access, NR access) may be information indicating reconnection using the same information to the network on the premise of access change. As the re-attempt information specified in slice units, slice information different from the rejected slice is specified, and reconnection using the specified slice information may be permitted.
更に、均等PLMN単位で指定されたre-attempt情報は、PLMN変更時、変更先のPLMNが均等PLMNであれば同一の情報を用いた再接続を許可する事を示す情報であってよい。また、変更先のPLMNが均等PLMNではない場合、本手続を用いた再接続を許可しない事を示す情報であってよい。
Furthermore, the re-attempt information specified in units of equal PLMN may be information indicating that reconnection using the same information is permitted if the PLMN of the change destination is equal PLMN when the PLMN is changed. In addition, if the PLMN of the change destination is not an equal PLMN, it may be information indicating that reconnection using this procedure is not permitted.
更に、モード単位(S1モード、N1モード)で指定されたre-attempt情報は、モード変更時、変更先のモードが、S1モードであれば同一の情報を用いた再接続を許可する事を示す情報であってよい。また、変更先のモードが、S1モードであれば同一の情報を用いた再接続を許可しない事を示す情報であってよい。
Furthermore, the re-attempt information specified for each mode (S1 mode, N1 mode) indicates that when the mode is changed, if the mode to be changed is the S1 mode, reconnection using the same information is permitted. It may be information. Further, if the mode of the change destination is S1 mode, it may be information indicating that reconnection using the same information is not permitted.
ネットワークスライス関連付けルールとは、複数のネットワークスライスを識別する情報を関連付けるルールである。尚、ネットワークスライス関連付けルールは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージで受信してもよいし、事前にUE_A10に設定されていてもよい。さらに、ネットワークスライス関連付けルールは、UE_A10において最も新しいものが適用されてもよい。逆に、UE_A10は最新のネットワークスライス関連付けルールに基づいた挙動を行ってもよい。例えば、UE_A10にあらかじめネットワークスライス関連付けルールが設定されている状態で、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージにて新たなネットワークスライス関連付けルールを受信した場合、UE_A10は、UE_A10内に保持するネットワークスライス関連付けルールを更新してもよい。
The network slice association rule is a rule that associates information that identifies a plurality of network slices. The network slice association rule may be received in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or may be set in UE_A10 in advance. In addition, the newest network slice association rule may be applied in UE_A10. Conversely, UE_A10 may behave based on the latest network slice association rules. For example, if a new network slice association rule is received in the PDU session establishment rejection message while the network slice association rule is set in UE_A10 in advance, UE_A10 updates the network slice association rule held in UE_A10. You may.
バックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールとは、複数のPDUセッションで起きた複数のバックオフタイマーを1つのバックオフタイマーにまとめて管理するために、UE_A10に設定されるルールである。例えば、競合又は重複する輻輳管理が適用された場合で、かつUEが複数のバックオフタイマーを保持している場合に、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールに基づいて、複数のバックオフタイマーをまとめて管理してもよい。尚、競合又は、重複する輻輳管理が起きるパターンは、DNNのみに基づいた輻輳管理とDNNとスライス情報の両方に基づいた輻輳管理が同時に適用された場合で、この場合、DNNのみに基づいた輻輳管理が優先される。尚、バックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールは、これに限らなくてもよい。尚、バックオフタイマーは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる第1のタイマーであってよい。
The backoff timer priority management rule is a rule set in UE_A10 to manage multiple backoff timers that occurred in multiple PDU sessions together in one backoff timer. For example, if conflict or duplicate congestion management is applied and the UE has multiple backoff timers, UE_A10 will have multiple backoff timers based on the backoff timer's preferred management rules. May be managed collectively. The pattern in which conflict or duplicate congestion management occurs is when congestion management based only on DNN and congestion management based on both DNN and slice information are applied at the same time. In this case, congestion based only on DNN is applied. Management is prioritized. The priority management rule for the backoff timer does not have to be limited to this. The backoff timer may be the first timer included in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
第1の状態とは、各装置が登録手続き及びPDUセッション確立手続きを完了した状態であり、UE_A10及び/又は各装置が、第1から第4の輻輳管理が1つ以上適用された状態である。ここで、UE_A10及び/又は各装置は、登録手続きの完了により、UE_A10がネットワークに登録された状態(RM-REGISTERED状態)であってよく、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了は、UE_A10が、ネットワークからPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した状態であってよい。
The first state is a state in which each device has completed the registration procedure and the PDU session establishment procedure, and UE_A10 and / or each device is in a state in which one or more of the first to fourth congestion managements are applied. .. Here, UE_A10 and / or each device may be in a state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state) by completing the registration procedure, and when the PDU session establishment procedure is completed, UE_A10 is PDU from the network. It may be in the state of receiving the session establishment refusal message.
輻輳管理とは、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理のうち、1又は複数の輻輳管理から構成される。尚、NWによるUEの制御は、第1のタイマーとUEが認識する輻輳管理によって実現され、UEはこれらの情報の関連付けを記憶していてもよい。
Congestion management consists of one or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. The control of the UE by the NW is realized by the first timer and the congestion management recognized by the UE, and the UE may store the association of these information.
第1の輻輳管理とは、DNNのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理を示す。例えば、NWにおいて、DNN#Aに対しての輻輳が検知された場合で、NWがDNN#Aのみのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求であると認識した場合、NWは、第1の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。尚、NWは、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNN情報が含まれていない場合でも、NW主導でデフォルトDNNを選定し、輻輳管理対象としてもよい。或は、NWがDNN#AとS-NSSAI#Aとを含むUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求とであると認識した場合においても、NWは、第1の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。第1の輻輳管理が適用された場合、UEは、DNN#Aのみを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を抑止してもよい。
The first congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for DNN parameters. For example, if the NW detects congestion for DNN # A and the NW recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request for DNN # A-only parameters, the NW will be the first. Congestion management may be applied. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include the DNN information, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and set it as the congestion management target. Alternatively, the NW may apply the first congestion management even if the NW recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request that includes DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A. If the first congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for DNN # A only.
言い換えると、第1の輻輳管理とは、DNNを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理であり、DNNへの接続性が輻輳状態であることに起因した輻輳管理であってよい。例えば、第1の輻輳管理とは、すべての接続性におけるDNN#Aへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。ここで、すべての接続性におけるDNN#Aへの接続とは、UEが利用可能なあらゆるS-NSSAIを用いた接続性におけるDNN#Aの接続であってよく、UEが接続可能なネットワークスライスを介したDNN#Aの接続であってよい。さらに、ネットワークスライスを介さないDNN#Aへの接続性が含まれてもよい。
In other words, the first congestion management may be control signal congestion management for the DNN, and may be congestion management due to the connectivity to the DNN being in a congestion state. For example, the first congestion management may be congestion management to regulate the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity. Here, the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity may be the connection of DNN # A in connectivity using any S-NSSAI available to the UE, and the network slice to which the UE can connect. It may be a DNN # A connection via. In addition, connectivity to DNN # A via network slices may be included.
第2の輻輳管理とは、S-NSSIのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理を示す。例えば、NWにおいて、S-NSSAI#Aに対しての制御信号輻輳が検知された場合で、NWがS-NSSAI#Aのみのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求であると認識した場合、NWは、第2の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。第2の輻輳管理が適用された場合、UEは、S-NSSAI#Aのみを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を抑止してもよい。
The second congestion management refers to control signal congestion management for S-NSSI parameters. For example, when the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A is detected in the NW, and the NW recognizes that it is a UE-led session management request targeting only the parameters of S-NSSAI # A. , NW may apply a second congestion management. If a second congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for S-NSSAI # A only.
言い換えると、第2の輻輳管理とは、S-NSSAIを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理であり、S-NSSAIによって選択されるネットワークスライスが輻輳状態であることに起因した輻輳管理であってよい。例えば、第2の輻輳管理とは、S-NSSAI#Aに基づいたすべての接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。つまり、S-NSSAI#Aで選択されるネットワークスライスを介したすべてのDNNへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。
In other words, the second congestion management may be control signal congestion management for S-NSSAI, and may be congestion management due to the network slice selected by S-NSSAI being in a congestion state. For example, the second congestion management may be congestion management for regulating all connections based on S-NSSAI # A. In other words, it may be congestion management to regulate connections to all DNNs via the network slice selected by S-NSSAI # A.
第3の輻輳管理とは、DNN及びS-NSSAIのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理を示す。例えば、NWにおいて、DNN#Aに対しての制御信号輻輳とS-NSSAI#Aに対しての制御信号輻輳が同時に検知された場合で、NWがDNN#A及びS-NSSAI#Aのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求であると認識した場合、NWは、第3の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。尚、NWは、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNNを示す情報が含まれていない場合でも、NW主導でデフォルトDNNを選定し、合わせて輻輳管理対象としてもよい。第3の輻輳管理が適用された場合、UEは、DNN#A及びS-NSSAI#Aのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を抑止してもよい。
The third congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI. For example, when the control signal congestion for DNN # A and the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A are detected at the same time in the NW, the NW sets the parameters of DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A. The NW may apply a third congestion management if it recognizes that it is a targeted UE-driven session management request. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include information indicating the DNN, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and also set it as the congestion management target. If a third congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A parameters.
言い換えると、第3の輻輳管理とは、DNN及びS-NSSAIのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理であり、S-NSSAIを基に選択されるネットワークスライスを介したDNNへの接続性が輻輳状態であることに起因した輻輳管理であってよい。例えば、第3の輻輳管理とは、S-NSSAI#Aに基づいた接続性の内、DNN#Aへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。
In other words, the third congestion management is control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI, and the connectivity to DNN via the network slice selected based on S-NSSAI is congestion. Congestion management due to the state may be used. For example, the third congestion management may be congestion management for restricting the connection to DNN # A among the connectivity based on S-NSSAI # A.
第4の輻輳管理とは、DNN及び/又はS-NSSAIの少なくとも一つのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理を示す。例えば、NWにおいて、DNN#Aに対しての制御信号輻輳とS-NSSAI#Aに対しての制御信号輻輳が同時に検知された場合で、NWがDNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#Aの少なくとも一つのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求であると認識した場合、NWは、第4の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。尚、NWは、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNNを示す情報が含まれていない場合でも、NW主導でデフォルトDNNを選定し、合わせて輻輳管理対象としてもよい。第4の輻輳管理が適用された場合、UEは、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#Aの少なくとも一つのパラメータを対象としたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を抑止してもよい。
The fourth congestion management indicates control signal congestion management for at least one parameter of DNN and / or S-NSSAI. For example, when the control signal congestion for DNN # A and the control signal congestion for S-NSSAI # A are detected at the same time in the NW, the NW is DNN # A and / or S-NSSAI # A. The NW may apply a fourth congestion management if it recognizes that it is a UE-driven session management request for at least one parameter. Even if the UE-led session management request does not include information indicating the DNN, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and also set it as the congestion management target. If a fourth congestion management is applied, the UE may suppress UE-led session management requests for at least one parameter of DNN # A and / or S-NSSAI # A.
言い換えると、第4の輻輳管理とは、DNN及びS-NSSAIのパラメータを対象にした制御信号輻輳管理であり、S-NSSAIを基に選択されるネットワークスライスと、DNNへの接続性が輻輳状態であることに起因した輻輳管理であってよい。例えば、第4の輻輳管理とは、S-NSSAI#Aに基づいたすべての接続を規制するための輻輳管理であり、且つ、すべての接続性におけるDNN#Aへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。つまり、S-NSSAI#Aで選択されるネットワークスライスを介したすべてのDNNへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であり、且つ、すべての接続性におけるDNN#Aへの接続を規制するための輻輳管理であってよい。ここで、すべての接続性におけるDNN#Aへの接続とは、UEが利用可能なあらゆるS-NSSAIを用いた接続性におけるDNN#Aの接続であってよく、UEが接続可能なネットワークスライスを介したDNN#Aの接続であってよい。さらに、ネットワークスライスを介さないDNN#Aへの接続性が含まれてもよい。
In other words, the fourth congestion management is control signal congestion management for the parameters of DNN and S-NSSAI, and the network slice selected based on S-NSSAI and the connectivity to DNN are in a congested state. It may be congestion management due to the above. For example, the fourth congestion management is congestion management for regulating all connections based on S-NSSAI # A, and congestion for regulating connections to DNN # A in all connectivity. It may be management. In other words, it is congestion management to regulate the connection to all DNNs through the network slice selected by S-NSSAI # A, and to regulate the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity. It may be congestion management. Here, the connection to DNN # A in all connectivity may be the connection of DNN # A in connectivity using any S-NSSAI available to the UE, and the network slice to which the UE can connect. It may be a DNN # A connection via. In addition, connectivity to DNN # A via network slices may be included.
したがって、DNN#AとS-NSSAI#Aをパラメータとする第4の輻輳管理は、DNN#Aをパラメータとする第1の輻輳管理とS-NSSAI#Aをパラメータとする第2の輻輳管理とを同時に実行する輻輳管理であってよい。
Therefore, the fourth congestion management with DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A as parameters is the first congestion management with DNN # A as parameters and the second congestion management with S-NSSAI # A as parameters. May be congestion management that executes at the same time.
第1の挙動とは、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージにおいて送信したスライス情報を送信したPDUセッション識別情報と関連付けて記憶する挙動である。第1の挙動で、UEは、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで送信したスライス情報を記憶してもよいし、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に受信するスライス情報を記憶してもよい。
The first behavior is the behavior in which the UE stores the slice information transmitted in the first PDU session establishment request message in association with the transmitted PDU session identification information. In the first behavior, the UE may store the slice information sent in the first PDU session establishment request message, or store the slice information received when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected. You may.
第2の挙動とは、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立で指定したスライス情報とは異なる別のスライス情報を用いて、第1のPDUセッション確立要求と同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動である。具体的には、第2の挙動は、UEが、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマー値がゼロもしくは無効の場合、第1のPDUセッション確立で指定したスライス情報とは別のスライス情報を用いて、第1のPDUセッション確立要求と同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続している特定のPLMNの無線アクセスがサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッションが拒絶された場合、もしくは、一時的な理由で第1のPDUセッションが拒絶された場合、UEは、第1のPDUセッション確立で指定したスライス情報とは別のスライス情報を用いて、第1のPDUセッション確立要求に含まれるAPN/DNNと同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。
The second behavior is for the UE to connect to the same APN / DNN as the first PDU session establishment request using different slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment. This is the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request. Specifically, the second behavior is that if the UE receives a backoff timer value from the network of zero or invalid, it uses slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment. The behavior may be to send a PDU session establishment request for connecting to the same APN / DNN as the first PDU session establishment request. Also, if the first PDU session is rejected because the radio access of the specific PLMN to which the specified APN / DNN is connected is not supported, or the first PDU session is rejected for a temporary reason. If so, the UE connects to the same APN / DNN as the APN / DNN included in the first PDU session establishment request, using slice information different from the slice information specified in the first PDU session establishment. It may be the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request for the purpose.
第3の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第3の挙動は、UEが、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマー値がゼロでも無効でもない場合、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。ここで、同一の識別情報とは、新たなPDUセッション確立要求に載せる第1の識別情報及び/又は第2の識別情報が、拒絶されたPDUセッション確立要求で送信した第1の識別情報及び/又は第2の識別情報が同一かを意味してよい。
The third behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information until the first timer expires. .. Specifically, the third behavior is that if the UE receives a backoff timer value from the network that is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU that uses the same identification information until the first timer expires. The behavior may be such that the session establishment request is not transmitted. Here, the same identification information means that the first identification information and / or the second identification information to be included in the new PDU session establishment request is the first identification information and / or the first identification information transmitted in the rejected PDU session establishment request. Alternatively, it may mean that the second identification information is the same.
又、別のPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、別のNWスライスを選択した場合で、ネットワーク運用の設定障害に関する拒絶理由を受信した場合、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーが起動されている場合に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。
Also, when another PLMN is selected, or when another NW slice is selected and a reason for refusal regarding a network operation setting failure is received, it is received when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected. When the backoff timer is activated, the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information is not transmitted until the first timer expires.
詳細には、第3の挙動における新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しないPDUセッションは、第1のタイマーに対応づけられた輻輳管理が適用されたPDUセッションであってよい。より具体的には、第3の挙動では、第1のタイマーが対応づけられた輻輳管理の種別に応じた接続性であり、且つ、その輻輳管理に対応づけられたDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッションに対して、新たにPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってよい。尚、本挙動によってUEが禁止される処理は、PDUセッション確立要求を含むセッションマネジメントのための手続きの開始、及び/又はSMメッセージの送受信であってよい。
Specifically, the PDU session that does not send a new PDU session establishment request in the third behavior may be a PDU session to which congestion management associated with the first timer is applied. More specifically, in the third behavior, the first timer has connectivity according to the type of congestion management associated with it, and the DNN and / or S-NSSAI associated with that congestion management. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not transmitted to the PDU session using. The process in which the UE is prohibited by this behavior may be the start of the procedure for session management including the PDU session establishment request and / or the transmission / reception of the SM message.
第4の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、スライス情報、DNN/APN情報を載せない新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第4の挙動は、UEがネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーがゼロでも無効でもない場合、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、スライス情報、DNN/APN情報を載せない新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。
The fourth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request that does not carry slice information or DNN / APN information until the first timer expires. Is. Specifically, the fourth behavior is that if the backoff timer received by the UE from the network is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU that does not carry slice information or DNN / APN information until the first timer expires. The behavior may be such that the session establishment request is not transmitted.
第5の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第5の挙動は、UEが、UEとネットワークにおいてサポートしているPDP typeが異なる場合で均等PLMNに在圏している場合に、同一の識別情報を用いた新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。
The fifth behavior is the behavior in which the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request is rejected. Specifically, the fifth behavior is a new PDU session using the same identification information when the UE is in the same PLMN when the PDP types supported by the UE and the network are different. The behavior may be such that the establishment request is not transmitted.
第6の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、同一の識別情報を用いて初期手続きとして、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動である。具体的には、第6の挙動は、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求がnon-3GPPアクセスからのハンドオーバーにおいて対象のPDNセッションコンテキストが存在しない為、拒絶された場合、同一の識別情報を用いて初期手続きとして、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。
The sixth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sends a new PDU session establishment request as an initial procedure using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request is rejected. Specifically, the sixth behavior is that if the UE rejects the first PDU session establishment request because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP access, the same identification information As an initial procedure using, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request.
第7の挙動とは、UEが、PLMNを選択する手続きにおいて、別のNWスライスを選択した場合、前回のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーを継続する挙動である。具体的には、第7の挙動は、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、PLMN選択を行った場合で、選択先のPLMNで第1のPDUセッション確立要求で指定したNWスライスと共通のNWスライスの指定が可能な場合、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーを継続する挙動であってもよい。
The seventh behavior is that when the UE selects another NW slice in the procedure for selecting the PLMN, the backoff timer received when the previous PDU session establishment request is rejected is continued. Specifically, the seventh behavior is when the UE makes a PLMN selection when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected, and is specified in the first PDU session establishment request in the selected PLMN. If it is possible to specify a NW slice that is common to the NW slice that was created, the behavior may be to continue the backoff timer received when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected.
第8の挙動とは、UEが、ネットワークから通知された値、又は、事前にUEに設定された値を第1のタイマー値として設定する挙動である。具体的には、第8の挙動は、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求の拒絶通知で受信したバックオフタイマー値を第1のタイマー値として設定する挙動であってもよいし、事前にUEに設定、もしくは、保持する値を第1のタイマー値として設定する挙動であってもよい。尚、事前にUEに設定、もしくは、保持するタイマーを第1のタイマー値として設定する場合は、HPLMN、もしくは、均等PLMN在圏時に限ってもよい。
The eighth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sets the value notified from the network or the value set in the UE in advance as the first timer value. Specifically, the eighth behavior may be the behavior in which the UE sets the backoff timer value received in the rejection notification of the first PDU session establishment request as the first timer value, or in advance. The behavior may be to set or hold a value in the UE as the first timer value. If the timer to be set or held in the UE is set as the first timer value in advance, it may be limited to HPLMN or even PLMN in the service area.
第9の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第9の挙動は、UEが、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、もしくは、第1のPDUセッション拒絶理由がUEとネットワークとの間でPDPタイプ(PDP type)が異なる場合に、端末電源のオン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーの情報要素が無く、Re-attempt情報が無い場合、もしくは、均等PLMNへのPDUセッション再接続が許容されている場合、接続しているPLMNでは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーの情報要素が無く、Re-attempt情報が無い場合、もしくは、均等PLMNへのPDUセッション再接続が許容されていない場合、接続しているPLMNでは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーがゼロでも無効でもない場合、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信しない挙動であってもよい。
The ninth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request is rejected, the UE does not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is inserted or removed. is there. Specifically, the ninth behavior is that the UE has an invalid backoff timer received from the network, or the first PDU session rejection reason is a PDP type between the UE and the network. If they are different, do not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed. Also, when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, there is no information element of the backoff timer from the network, and Re- If there is no attempt information, or if PDU session reconnection to equal PLMN is allowed, the connected PLMN will not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed. It may be a behavior. Also, when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, there is no information element of the backoff timer from the network, and Re- If there is no attempt information, or if PDU session reconnection to equal PLMN is not allowed, the connected PLMN will not send a new PDU session establishment request until the terminal power is turned on / off or USIM is inserted / removed. It may be a behavior. Also, if the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is neither zero nor invalid. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not transmitted until the terminal power is turned on / off or the USIM is inserted / removed. Also, if the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is disabled, the terminal power is turned on. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request is not sent until / off or USIM insertion / removal.
第10の挙動とは、UEが、PDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された際に、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動である。具体的には、第10の挙動は、UEが、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、もしくは、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が一時的な理由で拒絶された場合で更にネットワークから通知されるバックオフタイマー情報要素自体が無い場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。又、別のPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、別のNWスライスを選択した場合で、第1のPDUセッション確立要求が一時的な理由で拒絶された場合で、選択したPLMNで対象のAPN/DNNについてバックオフタイマーが起動されていない場合、もしくは、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。又、第1のPDUセッション確立要求がUEとネットワークのPDP typeが異なる為に拒絶された場合で、異なるPLMNを選択した際に、Re-attempt情報を受信しない、もしくは、均等PLMNリストに無いPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、PDP typeが変更された場合、もしくは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくは、USIMの抜き差しをした場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。又、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求が拒絶された場合でネットワークから通知を受けたバックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求を送信する挙動であってもよい。
The tenth behavior is the behavior in which the UE sends a new PDU session establishment request when the PDU session establishment request is rejected. Specifically, the tenth behavior is that the UE further notifies from the network when the backoff timer received from the network is zero, or when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected for a temporary reason. If there is no backoff timer information element itself, it may be the behavior of sending a new PDU session establishment request. Also, if another PLMN is selected, or if another NW slice is selected and the first PDU session establishment request is rejected for a temporary reason, the target APN / DNN in the selected PLMN. If the backoff timer is not activated, or if the backoff timer received from the network is invalid, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request. Also, when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the PDP type of the UE and the network are different, when different PLMNs are selected, Re-attempt information is not received or PLMNs that are not on the equal PLMN list. When is selected, when the PDP type is changed, when the terminal power is turned on / off, or when the USIM is plugged in or unplugged, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request. Also, if the backoff timer notified from the network is zero when the first PDU session establishment request is rejected because the specified APN / DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, it is new. It may be the behavior of sending a PDU session establishment request.
第11の挙動とは、UEが、第1のタイマー、及び、Re-attempt情報を無視する挙動である。具体的には、第11の挙動は、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求がnon-3GPPアクセスからのハンドオーバーにおいて、対象のPDNセッションコンテキストが存在しない為に拒絶された場合、もしくは、当該PDN connectionにおいて張られているベアラの数が最大許数に到達した為に、第1のPDUセッション確立が拒絶された場合、第1のタイマー、及び、Re-attempt情報を無視する挙動であってもよい。
The eleventh behavior is the behavior in which the UE ignores the first timer and the Re-attempt information. Specifically, the eleventh behavior is that the UE rejects the first PDU session establishment request in the handover from non-3GPP access because the target PDN session context does not exist, or If the establishment of the first PDU session is rejected because the number of bearers stretched in the PDN connection has reached the maximum allowed number, the behavior is to ignore the first timer and Re-attempt information. May be good.
第12の挙動とは、UEが、第1のPDUセッション確立要求に対しての拒絶通知で受けた1つのNWスライスを識別する為の情報に基づき、関連する複数のNWスライスを識別する為の情報を判別し、1つのNWスライスを識別する為の情報に基づき関連する複数のNWスライスに対しての再接続を抑止する挙動である。具体的には、第12の挙動は、UEは、ネットワークスライス関連付けルールに基づいて第1のPDUセッション確立要求拒絶で通知されたNWスライスを識別する為の情報に関連する別のNWスライスを識別する為の情報を導き出す挙動であってもよい。尚、ネットワークスライス関連付けルールについては、事前にUEに設定されていてもよいし、PDUセッション確立の拒絶通知でネットワークから通知されてもよい。
The twelfth behavior is to identify a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for the UE to identify one NW slice received in the rejection notice for the first PDU session establishment request. It is a behavior that discriminates information and suppresses reconnection to a plurality of related NW slices based on the information for identifying one NW slice. Specifically, the twelfth behavior is that the UE identifies another NW slice related to the information to identify the NW slice notified in the first PDU session establishment request rejection based on the network slice association rule. It may be a behavior that derives information for doing so. The network slice association rule may be set in the UE in advance, or may be notified from the network by a notification of refusal to establish a PDU session.
第13の挙動とは、同一UEによる1又は複数PDUセッション確立に対して異なる複数の輻輳管理が起動され、ネットワークから複数のタイマーが提供された場合、UEは、バックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールに基づいて、タイマーを管理する挙動であってもよい。例えば、UEによるDNN_1とスライス_1の組み合わせの第1のPDUセッション確立要求が、DNNとスライス情報の両方に基づいた輻輳管理対象とされ、UEは、第1のタイマー#1を受ける。更に、UEが、DNN_1とスライス_2の組み合わせに対して、第2のPDUセッション確立要求を行い、DNNのみに基づいた輻輳管理の対象とされ、第1のタイマー#2を受信する。この時、UEは、バックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールに基づき、UEのPDUセッション再確立の挙動は、優位化された第1のタイマー#2によって管理されてもよい。具体的には、優先とされた輻輳制御によって生成されたタイマー値によってUEが保持するタイマーの値を上書きしてもよい。
The thirteenth behavior is that if multiple different congestion managements are invoked for establishing one or more PDU sessions by the same UE and multiple timers are provided by the network, the UE will be in the priority management rule of the backoff timer. Based on this, the behavior may be to manage the timer. For example, the first PDU session establishment request of the combination of DNN_1 and slice_1 by the UE is targeted for congestion management based on both the DNN and the slice information, and the UE receives the first timer # 1. Further, the UE makes a second PDU session establishment request for the combination of DNN_1 and slice_2, is subject to congestion management based only on DNN, and receives the first timer # 2. At this time, the UE may manage the behavior of the UE's PDU session reestablishment by the superior first timer # 2 based on the priority management rule of the backoff timer. Specifically, the timer value held by the UE may be overwritten by the timer value generated by the priority congestion control.
第14の挙動とは、同一UEによる1又は複数PDUセッション確立に対して異なる複数の輻輳管理が適用され、ネットワークから複数のタイマーが提供された場合、セッションマネジメントインスタンス毎(PDUセッション単位)にタイマーを管理する挙動であってもよい。例えば、UEによるDNN#1とスライス#1の組み合わせの第1のPDUセッション確立が、DNNとスライス情報の両方に基づいて輻輳対象とされた場合、UEは、対象のバックオフタイマー値を第1のタイマー#1として管理する。その後、更に、UEが、第2のPDUセッションとして、DNN#1とスライス#2の組み合わせに対してPDUセッション確立を試みた所、DNNのみに基づいた輻輳対象とされた場合、UEは、対象のバックオフタイマー値を第1のタイマー#2として管理する。この時、UEは複数のタイマー(ここでは、第1のタイマー#1と第1のタイマー#2)を同時に管理する。具体的には、UEは、タイマーをセッションマネジメントインスタンス/PDUセッション単位で管理する。又、UEが一つのセッションマネジメント手続きで同時に複数のタイマーを受信した場合、UEは、UEが識別した輻輳管理単位で対象のバックオフタイマーを同時に管理する。
The 14th behavior is that when multiple different congestion managements are applied to the establishment of one or more PDU sessions by the same UE and multiple timers are provided from the network, timers are used for each session management instance (PDU session unit). It may be a behavior to manage. For example, if the UE establishes a first PDU session for a combination of DNN # 1 and slice # 1 that is subject to congestion based on both DNN and slice information, the UE sets the target backoff timer value to the first. It is managed as timer # 1. After that, when the UE attempts to establish a PDU session for the combination of DNN # 1 and slice # 2 as the second PDU session, and the UE is targeted for congestion based only on the DNN, the UE is targeted. The backoff timer value of is managed as the first timer # 2. At this time, the UE manages a plurality of timers (here, the first timer # 1 and the first timer # 2) at the same time. Specifically, the UE manages timers on a session management instance / PDU session basis. Further, when the UE receives a plurality of timers at the same time in one session management procedure, the UE simultaneously manages the target backoff timer in the congestion management unit identified by the UE.
第15の挙動とは、UE_A10が、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内、どの輻輳管理の種別を適用するかを識別する第1の識別処理、及び、適用する輻輳管理に対応づけられるDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを識別する第2の識別処理を実行する挙動であってよい。尚、第1の識別処理は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報に基づいて識別してもよい。同様に、第2の識別処理は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報に基づいて識別してもよい。
The fifteenth behavior corresponds to the first identification process that identifies which type of congestion management is applied by UE_A10 from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management, and the congestion management to be applied. It may be the behavior of executing a second identification process for identifying the attached DNN and / or S-NSSAI. In the first identification process, at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information and / or at least one or more identification information from the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. It may be identified based on the identification information. Similarly, the second identification process includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one or more of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. It may be identified based on the identification information of.
以下、第1の識別処理の例を説明する。第1の識別処理においては、以下の場合のいずれか1つ又は2つ以上の組み合わせを満たす場合において適用する輻輳管理の種別を第1の輻輳管理であると識別してもよい。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第1の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第1の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第1の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第17の識別情報にDNNのみが含まれ、S-NSSAIが含まれない場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 Hereinafter, an example of the first identification process will be described. In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the first congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 17th identification information contains only DNN and does not include S-NSSAI.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set, at least when the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set, at least when the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第1の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第1の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第1の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第17の識別情報にDNNのみが含まれ、S-NSSAIが含まれない場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも、第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 Hereinafter, an example of the first identification process will be described. In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the first congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 1st congestion management.
-At least, when the 17th identification information contains only DNN and does not include S-NSSAI.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set, at least when the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set, at least when the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
但し、上記の例に限らず、UE_A10は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の一つの識別情報、又は2つ以上の識別情報の組み合わせに基づいて識別してもよい。
However, not limited to the above example, UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
第1の識別処理においては、以下の場合のいずれか1つ又は2つ以上の組み合わせを満たす場合において適用する輻輳管理の種別を第2の輻輳管理であると識別してもよい。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第2の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIのみが含まれ、DNNが含まれない場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the second congestion management.
-At least, when the fifteenth identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 17th identification information contains only S-NSSAI and does not include DNN.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the third congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第2の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIのみが含まれ、DNNが含まれない場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the second congestion management.
-At least, when the fifteenth identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the second congestion management.
-At least, when the 17th identification information contains only S-NSSAI and does not include DNN.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 2nd congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the third congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
但し、上記の例に限らず、UE_A10は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の一つの識別情報、又は2つ以上の識別情報の組み合わせに基づいて識別してもよい。
However, not limited to the above example, UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
第1の識別処理においては、以下の場合のいずれか1つ又は2つ以上の組み合わせを満たす場合において適用する輻輳管理の種別を第3の輻輳管理であると識別してもよい。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第3の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理を含み、且つ第4の輻輳管理を含まない、複数の輻輳管理に対応する値であり、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIとDNNが含まれている場合。
・第16の識別情報が第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the third congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 3rd congestion management and not including the 4th congestion management, and the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第3の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第3の輻輳管理を含み、且つ第4の輻輳管理を含まない、複数の輻輳管理に対応する値であり、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIとDNNが含まれている場合。
・第16の識別情報が第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the third congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 3rd congestion management.
-At least, the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 3rd congestion management and not including the 4th congestion management, and the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying one of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 4th congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 3rd congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the fourth congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
但し、上記の例に限らず、UE_A10は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の一つの識別情報、又は2つ以上の識別情報の組み合わせに基づいて識別してもよい。
However, not limited to the above example, UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information.
第1の識別処理においては、以下の場合のいずれか1つ又は2つ以上の組み合わせを満たす場合において適用する輻輳管理の種別を第4の輻輳管理であると識別してもよい。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第4の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理を含み、且つ第3の輻輳管理を含まない、複数の輻輳管理に対応する値であり、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIとDNNが含まれている場合。
・第16の識別情報が第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the fourth congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 4th congestion management.
-At least, the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 4th congestion management and not including the 3rd congestion management, and the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the third congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used. When only the value corresponding to the first congestion management and the value corresponding to the second congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第16の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理に対応する値である場合。
・少なくとも、第14の識別情報に、第4の輻輳管理を示す情報が含まれている場合。
・少なくとも、第15の識別情報が、第4の輻輳管理を含み、且つ第3の輻輳管理を含まない、複数の輻輳管理に対応する値であり、第17の識別情報にS-NSSAIとDNNが含まれている場合。
・第16の識別情報が第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第2の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第3の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。
・第16の識別情報が第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの識別情報を識別するための情報であり、且つ、第16の識別情報に対して第1の輻輳管理に対応する値と、第2の輻輳管理に対応する値のみ設定可能な情報である場合に、少なくとも第16の識別情報を受信しなかった場合。 In the first identification process, the type of congestion management applied when any one or a combination of two or more of the following cases is satisfied may be identified as the fourth congestion management.
-At least, when the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
-At least, when the 16th identification information is a value corresponding to the 4th congestion management.
-At least, when the 14th identification information contains information indicating the 4th congestion management.
-At least, the 15th identification information is a value corresponding to a plurality of congestion managements including the 4th congestion management and not including the 3rd congestion management, and the 17th identification information includes S-NSSAI and DNN. If is included.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 3rd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 3rd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 2nd congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 2nd congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying either of the 1st congestion management and the 4th congestion management, and the 1st congestion management with respect to the 16th identification information. When at least the 16th identification information is not received when only the value corresponding to is the information that can be set.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 2nd congestion management, the 3rd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and with respect to the 16th identification information. When only the value corresponding to the second congestion management and the value corresponding to the third congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
-The 16th identification information is the information for identifying any of the 1st congestion management, the 2nd congestion management, and the 4th congestion management, and the 16th identification information is used. When only the value corresponding to the first congestion management and the value corresponding to the second congestion management can be set, and at least the 16th identification information is not received.
但し、上記の例に限らず、UE_A10は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の一つの識別情報、又は2つ以上の識別情報の組み合わせに基づいて識別してもよいし、他の手段を用いて識別してもよい。
However, not limited to the above example, UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information, or may be identified by using other means.
以上のように、第1の識別処理によって輻輳管理の種別を識別してもよい。
As described above, the type of congestion management may be identified by the first identification process.
次に、第2の識別処理の例を説明する。なお、第2の識別処理は、第1の識別処理によって識別された輻輳管理の種別に対して、対応するDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを識別する処理であってよい。
Next, an example of the second identification process will be described. The second identification process may be a process for identifying the corresponding DNN and / or S-NSSAI for the type of congestion management identified by the first identification process.
より具体的には、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第12の識別情報を基に決定してもよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第17の識別情報を基に決定してもよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第2の識別情報を基に決定してもよい。
More specifically, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the twelfth identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the second identification information.
したがって、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第12の識別情報の示すDNNであってよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第17の識別情報に含まれるDNNであってよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第2の識別情報の示すDNNであってよい。
Therefore, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN indicated by the twelfth identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN included in the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the DNN indicated by the second identification information.
また、第2の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するS-NSSAIは、第17の識別情報を基に決定してもよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第1の識別情報を基に決定してもよい。
Further, the S-NSSAI corresponding to the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be determined based on the first identification information.
したがって、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第17の識別情報の示すS-NSSAIであってよい。及び/又は、第1の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対応するDNNは、第1の識別情報に含まれるS-NSSAIであってよい。
Therefore, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the S-NSSAI indicated by the 17th identification information. And / or, the DNN corresponding to the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management may be the S-NSSAI included in the first identification information.
但し、上記の例に限らず、UE_A10は、少なくとも第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報、及び/又は、少なくとも第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の一つの識別情報、又は2つ以上の識別情報の組み合わせに基づいて識別してもよいし、他の手段を用いて識別してもよい。
However, not limited to the above example, UE_A10 includes at least one or more identification information from the first identification information to the fourth identification information, and / or at least one of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The identification may be based on one identification information of the above, or a combination of two or more identification information, or may be identified by using other means.
以上の第15の挙動に基づいて、UE_A10は、コアネットワーク_B190がUE_A10に対して適用する輻輳管理を識別してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、第15の挙動に基づいて、適用する輻輳管理として、対応する輻輳管理の種別と、対応するS-NSSAI及び/又はDNNを識別してもよい。なお、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報から第4の識別情報と、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内の、一又は複数の識別情報を、適用する輻輳管理と関連付けて記憶し、管理してもよい。ここで、第3の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は、第13の識別情報は、適用する輻輳管理を識別する情報として記憶し、管理してもよい。
Based on the above fifteenth behavior, UE_A10 may identify the congestion management that core network_B190 applies to UE_A10. In other words, UE_A10 may identify the corresponding congestion management type and the corresponding S-NSSAI and / or DNN as the applied congestion management based on the fifteenth behavior. In addition, UE_A10 stores one or more identification information among the first identification information to the fourth identification information and the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information in association with the applied congestion management. , May be managed. Here, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information may be stored and managed as information for identifying the congestion management to be applied.
第16の挙動とは、UEが第1のタイマーを起動している状態で、NW主導のセッションマネジメント手続きが実行された場合、第1のタイマーを停止する挙動である。
The 16th behavior is the behavior of stopping the 1st timer when the NW-led session management procedure is executed while the UE is activating the 1st timer.
ここで、例えば、複数の第1のタイマーが起動されている場合、第21の識別情報に基づき、起動している複数の第1のタイマーのうち、停止する第1のタイマーを判別し、停止する挙動であってよい。及び/又は、第17の挙動によって識別された輻輳管理に対応づけられた第1のタイマーを停止する挙動であってよい。尚、第17の挙動によって識別される輻輳管理が複数ある場合には、各輻輳管理に対応づけられたタイマーをそれぞれ停止してもよい。
Here, for example, when a plurality of first timers are activated, the first timer to be stopped is determined from the plurality of activated first timers based on the 21st identification information, and the timer is stopped. It may be a behavior that does. And / or may be the behavior of stopping the first timer associated with the congestion management identified by the 17th behavior. If there are a plurality of congestion managements identified by the 17th behavior, the timers associated with each congestion management may be stopped.
第17の挙動とは、コアネットワークが送信する制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、UEが適用している1又は複数の輻輳管理の内、適用を停止する輻輳管理を識別するUEの挙動であってよい。例えば、UEは、第21の識別情報に基づいて、適用を停止又は変更する輻輳管理を識別してもよい。
The 17th behavior is the behavior of the UE that identifies the congestion management to be stopped from among one or more congestion managements applied by the UE based on the reception of the control message transmitted by the core network. Good. For example, the UE may identify congestion management that suspends or modifies application based on the 21st identification information.
具体的には、前述したとおり、UEは第4の処理において第3の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報などを、輻輳管理を識別する情報として記憶しており、これらの輻輳管理を識別情報と第21の識別情報に含まれる第13の識別情報とが合致する輻輳管理を、適用を停止する輻輳管理として識別してもよい。
Specifically, as described above, the UE stores the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information as the information for identifying the congestion management in the fourth process. Therefore, the congestion management in which the identification information and the thirteenth identification information included in the twenty-first identification information match may be identified as the congestion management for which the application is stopped.
及び/又は、UEは、第21の識別情報に含まれる第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報のうちの1又は複数の組み合わせに基づいて、適用を停止する輻輳管理を識別してもよい。ここで、識別方法の詳細は、後述のPDUセッション確立手続き例における第4の処理において説明する第15の挙動における識別処理と同様であってもよい。つまり、UEは、適用する輻輳管理を識別する方法と同様の方法で、停止する輻輳管理を識別してもよい。
And / or, the UE may identify the congestion management to be decommissioned based on one or more combinations of the eleventh identification information contained in the twenty-first identification information to the eighteenth identification information. .. Here, the details of the identification method may be the same as the identification process in the fifteenth behavior described in the fourth process in the PDU session establishment procedure example described later. That is, the UE may identify the congestion management to be stopped in the same manner as the method of identifying the congestion management to be applied.
尚、UEは、適用を停止する輻輳管理を複数識別してもよい。以下では、前述した方法により識別した輻輳管理を第1の輻輳管理とし、第1の輻輳管理とはことなる第2の輻輳管理を識別する方法について説明する。
Note that the UE may identify a plurality of congestion managements to be stopped from being applied. Hereinafter, a method of identifying the second congestion management, which is different from the first congestion management, will be described, with the congestion management identified by the above-mentioned method as the first congestion management.
例えば、UEは第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられるDNNと同一のDNNに対応づけられる輻輳管理を第2の輻輳管理として識別してもよい。及び/又は、UEは、第1の輻輳管理に対応付けられるS-NSSAIと同一のS-NSSAIに対応付けられる輻輳管理を第2の輻輳管理として識別してもよい。尚、適用を停止する輻輳管理を複数識別することは、第1の輻輳管理及び/又は第2の輻輳管理が特定の輻輳管理の種別である場合に限って実行するよう設定されてもよい。
For example, the UE may identify the congestion management associated with the same DNN as the DNN associated with the first congestion management as the second congestion management. And / or, the UE may identify the congestion management associated with the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the first congestion management as the second congestion management. It should be noted that the identification of a plurality of congestion managements to be stopped may be set to be executed only when the first congestion management and / or the second congestion management is a specific type of congestion management.
具体的には、第1の輻輳管理が第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理のいずれかの場合において、UEは第2の輻輳管理を識別してもよい。及び/又は、第2の輻輳管理を特定するにあたり、検索対象となる輻輳管理が第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理のいずれかの場合において、UEは第2の輻輳管理を識別してもよい。尚、第1の輻輳管理及び/又は第2の識別情報がどの種別において複数の輻輳管理を識別可能かは、コアネットワーク及び/又はUEにおいてあらかじめ設定されていればよい。なお、識別が許容される、特定の輻輳管理の種別は、一つに特定される必要はなく、複数設定されてもよい。
Specifically, when the first congestion management is any of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management, the UE may identify the second congestion management. And / or, in identifying the second congestion management, the UE identifies the second congestion management when the congestion management to be searched is one of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. May be good. It should be noted that in which type the first congestion management and / or the second identification information can identify a plurality of congestion managements may be preset in the core network and / or the UE. It should be noted that it is not necessary to specify one specific type of congestion management for which identification is permitted, and a plurality of specific types may be set.
第1の識別情報は、第1のNWスライスに属する事を識別する情報である。言い換えると、第1の識別情報は、第1のNWスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立をUEが望んでいることを示す情報であってもよい。具体的には、例えば、第1の識別情報は第1のNWスライスを識別する為の情報であってもよい。尚、スライス情報は、特定のS-NSSAIを示す識別情報であってよい。尚、第1の識別情報は、オペレータA網内において特定のNWスライスを識別する情報であってもよいし、オペレータB内(オペレータA以外のその他オペレータ)でも共通して同一のNWスライスを識別する情報であってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、HPLMNから設定された第1のNWスライスを識別する為の情報であってもよいし、レジストレーション手続きでAMFから取得した第1のNWスライスを識別する為の情報であってもよいし、ネットワークから許可された第1のNWスライスを識別する為の情報であってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、PLMNごとに記憶された第1のNWスライスを識別する為の情報であってよい。
The first identification information is information that identifies that it belongs to the first NW slice. In other words, the first identification information may be information indicating that the UE wants to establish a PDU session belonging to the first NW slice. Specifically, for example, the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice. The slice information may be identification information indicating a specific S-NSSAI. The first identification information may be information for identifying a specific NW slice in the operator A network, or the same NW slice is commonly identified in the operator B (other operators other than the operator A). It may be information to be used. Further, the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice set from the HPLMN, or for identifying the first NW slice obtained from the AMF in the registration procedure. It may be information, or it may be information for identifying the first NW slice permitted from the network. Further, the first identification information may be information for identifying the first NW slice stored for each PLMN.
第2の識別情報は、DNN(Data Network Name)であって、DN(Data Network)を識別するために使用される情報であってよい。
The second identification information is DNN (Data Network Name) and may be information used to identify DN (Data Network).
第3の識別情報は、PDUセッションID(PDU Session ID)であって、PDUセッション(PDU Session)を識別するために使用される情報であってよい。
The third identification information may be a PDU session ID (PDU Session ID), which may be information used to identify the PDU session (PDU Session).
第4の識別情報は、PTI(Procedure transaction identity)であって、特定のセッションマネジメント手続きの一連のメッセージの送受信を一つのグループとして識別する情報であり、さらに、他の一連のセッションマネジメント関連メッセージの送受信とを識別及び/又は区別する為に使用される情報であってよい。
The fourth identification information is PTI (Procedure transaction identity), which is information that identifies the transmission and reception of a series of messages of a specific session management procedure as one group, and further, of other series of session management related messages. It may be information used to identify and / or distinguish between transmission and reception.
第11の識別情報は、PDUセッション確立の要求又はPDUセッション変更(PDUセッションモディフィケーション)の要求を拒絶することを示す情報であってよい。尚、PDUセッション確立の要求、又はPDUセッション変更の要求はUEによって行われる要求であり、DNN及び/又はS-NSSAIが含まれている。つまり、第11の識別情報は、これらのDNN及び/又はS-NSSAに対応するPDUセッションに対する確立要求又は変更要求をNWが拒絶することを示す情報であってよい。
The eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing a PDU session or the request for changing a PDU session (PDU session modification) is rejected. The request for establishing a PDU session or the request for changing a PDU session is a request made by the UE, and includes DNN and / or S-NSSAI. That is, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the NW rejects the establishment request or the change request for the PDU session corresponding to these DNNs and / or S-NSSAs.
また、第11の識別情報は、re-attempt(Re-attempt)情報を示す情報であってよい。
Further, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating re-attempt (Re-attempt) information.
また、NWは、第12の識別情報から第18の識別情報の少なくとも一つの識別情報を第11の識別情報と共にUEに送信することにより、輻輳管理をUEに示してもよい。言い換えると、NWは、第12の識別情報から第18の識別情報の1つ又は複数の識別情報の組み合わせに対応する輻輳管理をUEに通知してもよい。一方で、UEは、第12の識別情報から第18の識別情報の1つ又は複数の識別情報の組み合わせに対応する輻輳管理を識別し、識別した輻輳管理に基づく処理を実行してもよい。具体的には、UEは識別した輻輳管理に対応づけられた第1のタイマーのカウントを開始してもよい。尚、第1のタイマーのタイマー値は、第14の識別情報を用いて決定してもよいし、予めUEによって保存された値を用いる等の別の方法で設定されたタイマー値を設定してもよいし、ランダム値を設定してもよい。
Further, the NW may indicate congestion management to the UE by transmitting at least one identification information of the twelfth identification information to the eighteenth identification information to the UE together with the eleventh identification information. In other words, the NW may notify the UE of congestion management corresponding to the combination of one or more of the 12th to 18th identifications. On the other hand, the UE may identify the congestion management corresponding to the combination of one or a plurality of identification information of the 18th identification information from the 12th identification information, and execute the process based on the identified congestion management. Specifically, the UE may start counting the first timer associated with the identified congestion management. The timer value of the first timer may be determined by using the 14th identification information, or a timer value set by another method such as using a value saved by the UE in advance is set. Alternatively, a random value may be set.
第12の識別情報は、DNNであって、ネットワークが許可しなかったDNNであってもよいし、第2の識別情報で識別されるDNNが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第12の識別情報は、第2の識別情報と同じDNNであってもよい。
The twelfth identification information may be a DNN that is not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the DNN identified by the second identification information is not permitted. .. Further, the twelfth identification information may be the same DNN as the second identification information.
第13の識別情報は、PDU Session ID及び/又はPTIであって、ネットワークが許可しなかったPDUセッションID及び/又はPTIであってもよいし、第3の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションID及び/又はPTIが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第13の識別情報のPDU Session IDは、第3の識別情報と同じPDUセッションIDであってもよい。又、第13の識別情報のPTIは、第4の識別情報と同じPTIであってもよい。
The thirteenth identification information may be a PDU Session ID and / or PTI, which may be a PDU session ID and / or PTI not permitted by the network, or a PDU session ID identified by the third identification information. And / or information indicating that PTI is not permitted. Further, the PDU Session ID of the thirteenth identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the third identification information. Further, the PTI of the thirteenth identification information may be the same PTI as the fourth identification information.
ここで、第13の識別情報は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理を識別するための情報として用いられてよい。言い換えると、UEは、第15の挙動に基づいて実行する輻輳管理に対応づけて第13の識別情報を保存、管理し、実行した輻輳管理を識別するための情報として用いてもよい。なお、輻輳管理を識別する情報は、第13の識別情報に加え、第14から第18の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報との組み合わせによって構成されてもよい。
Here, the thirteenth identification information may be used as information for identifying the congestion management notified by the NW to the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session. In other words, the UE may store and manage the thirteenth identification information in association with the congestion management executed based on the fifteenth behavior, and may use it as information for identifying the executed congestion management. The information for identifying congestion management may be composed of a combination of one or more identification information of the 14th to 18th identification information in addition to the 13th identification information.
第14の識別情報は、バックオフタイマーの値を示す情報であってよい。言い換えれば、バックオフタイマーは、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理の有効期間を示す値であってよい。言い換えると、UEは、第14の識別情報の受信に伴い実行する第15の挙動において、第14の識別情報をタイマーの値として用いてもよい。さらに、第14の識別情報には、タイマー値に加えて輻輳管理の種別を識別する情報が含まれてよい。具体的には、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内のどの輻輳管理であるかを識別する情報が含まれてよい。例えば、輻輳管理種別を識別する情報は、各輻輳管理を識別するタイマー名であってもよいし、各輻輳管理を識別するフラグであってもよい。これに限らず、制御メッセージに格納される位置等によって識別されるなど、他の方法によって識別されてもよい。
The 14th identification information may be information indicating the value of the backoff timer. In other words, the backoff timer may be a value indicating the lifetime of congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish a PDU session. In other words, the UE may use the 14th identification information as the value of the timer in the 15th behavior executed in response to the reception of the 14th identification information. Further, the 14th identification information may include information for identifying the type of congestion management in addition to the timer value. Specifically, it may include information that identifies which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is. For example, the information that identifies the congestion management type may be a timer name that identifies each congestion management, or may be a flag that identifies each congestion management. Not limited to this, it may be identified by another method such as being identified by a position stored in a control message or the like.
第15の識別情報は、本手続きが拒絶された理由を示す一つ以上の理由値(Cause Value)を示す情報である。言い換えれば、理由値は、本手続に対してNWが適用した輻輳管理を示す情報であってもよいし、輻輳管理以外のNWが適用した本手続を拒絶する理由値を示す情報であってもよい。
The fifteenth identification information is information indicating one or more reason values (Cause Value) indicating the reason why this procedure was rejected. In other words, the reason value may be information indicating congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure, or information indicating a reason value for rejecting this procedure applied by NW other than congestion management. Good.
尚、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内のどの輻輳管理を示すかを識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の各輻輳管理に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内のどの輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
The reason value is information for identifying which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management the congestion management notified to the UE by the NW based on the refusal to establish the PDU session indicates. May be. In this case, the NW may send a different value to the UE as a reason value according to each congestion management from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第1の輻輳管理か、第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの輻輳管理であるか、を識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理である場合と、第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの輻輳管理である場合に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理であるか、第2の輻輳管理と第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
Alternatively, the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management, the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying which of the above is the congestion management. In this case, the NW is different for the UE depending on whether it is the first congestion management or one of the second congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management. The value may be sent as the reason value. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be possible to distinguish between the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第1の輻輳管理であるか、第2の輻輳管理であるか、第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの輻輳管理であるか、を識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理である場合と、第2の輻輳管理である場合と、第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの輻輳管理である場合に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理であるか、第2の輻輳管理であるか、第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理の内のいずれかの輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
Alternatively, the reason value is whether the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management or the second congestion management, or the third congestion management and the third. It may be information for identifying which of the four congestion managements is the congestion management. In this case, depending on whether it is the first congestion management, the second congestion management, or the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management, the NW May send a different value to the UE as the reason value. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is, or it is one of the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第1の輻輳管理又は第2の輻輳管理のであるか、第3の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理であるか、を識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理又は第2の輻輳管理である場合と、第3の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理である場合に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理又は第2の輻輳管理であるか、第3の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
Alternatively, the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the first congestion management or the second congestion management, or the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not. In this case, the NW sends a different value to the UE as a reason value depending on whether it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management and the third congestion management or the fourth congestion management. May be good. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the first congestion management or the second congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is a third congestion management or a fourth congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第2の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理のであるか、第1の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理であるか、を識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第2の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理である場合と、第1の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理である場合に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第2の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理であるか、第1の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
Alternatively, the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the second congestion management or the third congestion management, or the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not. In this case, the NW sends a different value to the UE as a reason value depending on whether it is the second congestion management or the third congestion management and the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management. May be good. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the second congestion management or the third congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is the first congestion management or the fourth congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに通知する輻輳管理が、第2の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理のであるか、第1の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理であるか、を識別するための情報であってよい。この場合、第2の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理である場合と、第1の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理である場合に応じて、NWはUEに異なる値を理由値として送信してもよい。UEは予め理由値として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第15の識別情報に基づいて、第2の輻輳管理又は第4の輻輳管理であるか、第1の輻輳管理又は第3の輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。
Alternatively, the reason value is that the congestion management that the NW notifies the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management, or the first congestion management or the third congestion management. It may be information for identifying whether it is management or not. In this case, the NW sends a different value to the UE as the reason value depending on whether it is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management and the first congestion management or the third congestion management. May be good. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as the reason value in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, whether it is the second congestion management or the fourth congestion management based on at least the fifteenth identification information. It may be identified whether it is the first congestion management or the third congestion management.
或は、理由値は、PDUセッション確立の拒絶に基づいてNWがUEに対して輻輳管理を行うことを示す情報であってよい。言い換えると、理由値は、第1の輻輳管理からの第4の輻輳管理のいずれかをUEに対して実行させるための情報であってよい。この場合、理由値は、特定の輻輳管理を識別可能な情報でなくてよい。
Alternatively, the reason value may be information indicating that the NW performs congestion management for the UE based on the refusal to establish the PDU session. In other words, the reason value may be information for causing the UE to execute any of the fourth congestion management from the first congestion management. In this case, the reason value does not have to be information that can identify a particular congestion management.
さらに、前述した輻輳管理以外のNWが適用した本手続を拒絶する理由値のより詳細な例としては、外部DNが、本手続きにDNN情報が含まれていない、または不明のDNNである事を理由に本手続を拒絶した事を示すNWがUEに通知する理由値(Missing or unknown DNN)であってよい。また、外部DNが、本手続きのPDU session typeが識別不能、または許可されていない事を理由に本手続を拒絶した事を示すNWがUEに通知する理由値(Unknown PDU session type)であってよい。また、外部DNが、本手続きにおけるユーザ認証及び認可の失敗、または外部DNによる認証及び認可の失効、またはNWによる認証及び認可の失効を理由に本手続を拒絶した事を示すNWがUEに通知する理由値(User authentication or authorization failed)であってよい。また、非特定の理由に基づいて要求されたサービスやオペレーションやリソース確保要求が拒絶された事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(Request rejected, unspecified)。また、NWがUEからのサービス要求を一時的に受けることができない事をNWがUEに通知する理由値(Service option temporarily out of order)であってよい。また、UEが挿入したPTIが既に利用中である事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(PTI already in use)。また、UEがLADN service areaの外にいる事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(Out of LADN service area)。また、PDU session type IPv4のみ許可する事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(PDU session type IPv4 only allowed)。また、PDU session type IPv6のみ許可する事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(PDU session type IPv6 only allowed)。また、NWが、non 3GPPアクセスから3GPPアクセス、またはEPSから5GSにUEがPDU sessionを移す際に、対象のPDU sessionを保持していない事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(PDU session does not exist)。また、NWが、UEが要求したSSC modeをサポートしていない事をNWがUEに通知する理由値であってよい(Not supported SSC mode)。また、外部DNが、特定のスライスを経由する本手続きにDNN情報が含まれていない、または不明のDNNである事を理由に本手続を拒絶した事を示すNWがUEに通知する理由値(Missing or unknown DNN in a slice)であってよい。また、UEがNWに要求したサービスにおいて必要とされるuser plane秘匿性担保の為の最大データ転送速度の要件をUEが満たしていない事を示すNWがUEに通知する理由値(Maximum data rate per UE for user-plane integrity protection is too low)であってよい。
Furthermore, as a more detailed example of the reason value for rejecting this procedure applied by NW other than the congestion management described above, the external DN is a DNN whose DNN information is not included in this procedure or is unknown. It may be the reason value (Missing or unknown DNN) notified to the UE by the NW indicating that the procedure has been rejected as a reason. In addition, the reason value (Unknown PDU session type) that the NW notifies the UE that the external DN rejected this procedure because the PDU session type of this procedure is unidentifiable or not permitted. Good. In addition, the NW will notify the UE that the external DN has rejected this procedure due to the failure of user authentication and authorization in this procedure, the revocation of authentication and authorization by the external DN, or the revocation of authentication and authorization by NW. It may be a reason value (User authentication or authorization failed). It may also be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the requested service, operation, or resource reservation request has been rejected for a non-specific reason (Request rejected, unspecified). Further, it may be a reason value (Service option temporary out of order) for the NW to notify the UE that the NW cannot temporarily receive the service request from the UE. It may also be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the PTI inserted by the UE is already in use (PTI already in use). It may also be the reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the UE is outside the LADN service area (Out of LADN service area). In addition, it may be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that only PDU session type IPv4 is permitted (PDU session type IPv4 only allowed). In addition, it may be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that only PDU session type IPv6 is permitted (PDU session type IPv6 only allowed). It may also be the reason why the NW notifies the UE that it does not hold the target PDU session when the UE transfers the PDU session from non 3GPP access to 3GPP access or from EPS to 5GS ( PDU session does not exist). It may also be a reason value for the NW to notify the UE that the NW does not support the SSC mode requested by the UE (Not supported SSC mode). In addition, the reason value that the NW notifies the UE that the external DN rejected this procedure because the procedure via a specific slice does not contain DNN information or is an unknown DNN ( It may be Missing or unknown DNN in a slice). In addition, the reason value (Maximum data rate per) that the NW notifies the UE that the UE does not meet the requirement of the maximum data transfer speed for ensuring the user plane confidentiality required for the service requested by the UE from the NW. It may be UE for user-plane integrity protection is too low).
尚、第3の輻輳管理を実行しない場合には、上述した第15の識別情報での理由値における第3の輻輳管理に対応する意味合いは不要であり、第15の識別情報での理由値は、第3の輻輳管理に関する処理、説明及び意味合いを上記記載から省いたものであってよい。また、第4の輻輳管理を実行しない場合には、上述した第15の識別情報での理由値における第4の輻輳管理に対応する意味合いは不要であり、第15の識別情報での理由値は、第4の輻輳管理に関する処理、説明及び意味合いを上記記載から省いたものであってよい。
When the third congestion management is not executed, the reason value in the fifteenth identification information described above does not need to have a meaning corresponding to the third congestion management, and the reason value in the fifteenth identification information is , Third congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description. Further, when the fourth congestion management is not executed, the meaning corresponding to the fourth congestion management in the reason value in the fifteenth identification information described above is unnecessary, and the reason value in the fifteenth identification information is , Fourth congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
より詳細な例としては、第1の輻輳管理を識別する第15の識別情報は、リソースが不十分であること(Insufficient resources)を示す理由値であってよい。また、第2の輻輳管理を識別する第15の識別情報は、特定のスライスに対するリソースが不十分であること(Insufficient resources for specific slice)を示す理由値であってよい。また、第3の輻輳管理を識別する第15の識別情報は、特定のスライスとDNNに対するリソースが不十分であること(Insufficient resources for specific slice and DNN)を示す理由値であってよい。
As a more detailed example, the fifteenth identification information that identifies the first congestion management may be a reason value indicating that resources are insufficient (Insufficient resources). Further, the fifteenth identification information that identifies the second congestion management may be a reason value indicating that the resources for a specific slice are insufficient (Insufficient resources for specific slice). Further, the fifteenth identification information that identifies the third congestion management may be a reason value indicating that the resources for a specific slice and the DNN are insufficient (Insufficient resources for specific slice and DNN).
このように、第15の識別情報は、輻輳管理の種別を識別可能な情報であってよく、さらに、第14の識別情報によって示されるバックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマー値が、どの輻輳管理の種別に対応するものであるかを示す情報であってよい。
As described above, the fifteenth identification information may be information that can identify the type of congestion management, and further, the back-off timer and / or the back-off timer value indicated by the fourteenth identification information is which congestion management. It may be information indicating whether or not it corresponds to the type of.
したがって、UE_A10は、第15の識別情報を基に輻輳管理の種別を識別してもよい。さらには、第15の識別情報を基に、第14の識別情報の示すバックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマー値がどの輻輳管理の種別に対応するものであるかを判別してもよい。
Therefore, UE_A10 may identify the type of congestion management based on the fifteenth identification information. Further, based on the fifteenth identification information, it may be determined which congestion management type the backoff timer and / or the backoff timer value indicated by the fourteenth identification information corresponds to.
第16の識別情報は、本手続きが拒絶された事を示す一つ以上の識別子(Indication)情報である。言い換えれば、Indication情報は、本手続に対してNWが適用した輻輳管理を示す情報であってもよい。NWは、第16の識別情報に基づいて、NWが適用した輻輳管理を示してもよい。
The 16th identification information is one or more identifier information indicating that this procedure has been rejected. In other words, the Indication information may be information indicating the congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure. The NW may indicate the congestion management applied by the NW based on the 16th identification information.
例えば、Indication情報は、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内の2つ以上の輻輳管理において、どの輻輳管理をNWがUEに対して規制するか否かを示す情報であってよい。したがって、NWはUEに対して適用する規制管理に対応づけた値をIndication情報として送信してもよい。UEは予めIndication情報として送信される各値の意味を把握しておき、第15の挙動において、少なくとも第16の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内のどの輻輳管理であるかを識別してもよい。ここで、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内の2つ以上の輻輳管理とは、Indication情報を用いて識別可能な輻輳管理であり、識別対象となる輻輳管理は、4つすべての輻輳管理のことであってもよいし、第1の輻輳管理と第2の輻輳管理であってもよいし、第3の輻輳管理と第4の輻輳管理であってもよいし、第2の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理であってもよいし、その他の任意の組み合わせであってもよい。
For example, the Indication information may be information indicating which congestion management the NW regulates to the UE in two or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. .. Therefore, the NW may send the value corresponding to the regulatory control applied to the UE as Indication information. The UE grasps the meaning of each value transmitted as Indication information in advance, and in the fifteenth behavior, which of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management is based on at least the 16th identification information. It may be identified whether it is congestion management. Here, two or more congestion managements from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management are congestion managements that can be identified by using Indication information, and all four congestion managements to be identified are all four. It may be the congestion management of, the first congestion management and the second congestion management, the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management, or the second. It may be the fourth congestion management from the congestion management of the above, or it may be any other combination.
尚、Indication情報は、識別対象となる輻輳管理のすべてに対してそれぞれ対応する値を必ずしも必要としない。例えば、輻輳管理Aをのぞく輻輳管理のそれぞれに対してIndication情報の値が対応付けられて割り当てられていれば、必ずしも輻輳管理Aに対してはIndication情報の値を設定しなくてもよい。この場合、NW及びUEは、Indication情報が送受信されないことにより、第1の輻輳管理であることを識別することができる。尚、輻輳管理Aは、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内、いずれの輻輳管理であってもよい。
Note that the Indication information does not necessarily require a corresponding value for all of the congestion management to be identified. For example, if the value of the Indication information is associated and assigned to each of the congestion management except the congestion management A, it is not always necessary to set the value of the Indication information for the congestion management A. In this case, the NW and the UE can identify that it is the first congestion management by not transmitting and receiving the Indication information. The congestion management A may be any of the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management.
又、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの送信に基づいて輻輳管理をUEに通知する際、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の輻輳管理の種別に応じてIdentificationを含める場合と含めない場合があってよい。言い換えると、NWは、輻輳管理の種別に応じて、輻輳管理を示す情報としてIdentification情報を用いてもよいし、輻輳管理の種別によってはIdentification情報を用いずに他の識別情報を、輻輳管理を示す情報として用いてもよい。
Also, when notifying the UE of congestion management based on the transmission of the PDU session establishment refusal message, Identification may or may not be included depending on the type of congestion management from the first congestion management to the fourth congestion management. You can. In other words, the NW may use identification information as information indicating congestion management depending on the type of congestion management, or may use other identification information without using identification information depending on the type of congestion management. It may be used as information to indicate.
尚、第3の輻輳管理を実行しない場合には、上述した第16の識別情報でのIndication情報における第3の輻輳管理に対応する意味合いは不要であり、第16の識別情報でのIndication情報は、第3の輻輳管理に関する処理、説明及び意味合いを上記記載から省いたものであってよい。また、第4の輻輳管理を実行しない場合には、上述した第16の識別情報でのIndication情報における第4の輻輳管理に対応する意味合いは不要であり、第16の識別情報でのIndication情報は、第4の輻輳管理に関する処理、説明及び意味合いを上記記載から省いたものであってよい。
When the third congestion management is not executed, the meaning corresponding to the third congestion management in the Indication information in the 16th identification information described above is unnecessary, and the Indication information in the 16th identification information is , Third congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description. Further, when the fourth congestion management is not executed, the meaning corresponding to the fourth congestion management in the Indication information in the 16th identification information described above is unnecessary, and the Indication information in the 16th identification information is , Fourth congestion management processing, description and implications may be omitted from the above description.
第17の識別情報は、本手続きが拒絶された事を示す一つ以上のValue情報である。言い換えれば、Value情報は、本手続に対してNWが適用した輻輳管理を示す情報であってもよい。尚、第17の識別情報は、第18の識別情報に含まれる1又は複数のNWスライスを識別する為の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報の少なくとも一つが含まれる情報であってよい。
The 17th identification information is one or more Value information indicating that this procedure has been rejected. In other words, the Value information may be information indicating the congestion management applied by the NW to this procedure. The 17th identification information may be information including at least one of the identification information for identifying one or a plurality of NW slices included in the 18th identification information and / or the 12th identification information. ..
NWは、第17の識別情報に基づいて、NWが適用した輻輳管理を示してもよい。言い換えると、NWは、第17の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内、どの輻輳管理を適用したかを示してもよい。さらに、NWは、第17の識別情報に基づいて、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの送信に基づいてUEに適用する輻輳管理の対象となるDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを示してもよい。例えば、第17の識別情報が、DNN#1のみであった場合、DNN#1を対象とした第1の輻輳管理が適用されている事を示してもよい。第17の識別情報が、S-NSSAI#1のみであった場合、S-NSSAI#1を対象とした第2の輻輳管理が適用されている事を示してもよい。第17の情報が、DNN#1及びS-NSSAI#1で構成されていた場合、DNN#1及び/又はS-NSSAI#1の少なくとも一つを対象とする第3の輻輳管理、又は第4の輻輳管理が適用されている事を示してもよい。
The NW may indicate the congestion management applied by the NW based on the 17th identification information. In other words, the NW may indicate which of the first congestion management and the fourth congestion management is applied based on the 17th identification information. In addition, the NW may indicate the DNN and / or S-NSSAI subject to congestion management applied to the UE based on the transmission of the PDU session establishment rejection message based on the 17th identification information. For example, if the 17th identification information is only DNN # 1, it may indicate that the first congestion management for DNN # 1 is applied. If the 17th identification information is only S-NSSAI # 1, it may indicate that the second congestion management for S-NSSAI # 1 is applied. If the 17th information is composed of DNN # 1 and S-NSSAI # 1, a third congestion management targeting at least one of DNN # 1 and / or S-NSSAI # 1, or a fourth It may be shown that the congestion management of is applied.
尚、第17の識別情報は、必ずしも、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内、どの輻輳管理を適用したかを識別することができる情報である必要はなく、第17の識別情報は、他の識別情報を基に識別されるなど、他の手段によって識別された輻輳管理の対象となるDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを示す情報であってよい。
The 17th identification information does not necessarily have to be information that can identify which congestion management is applied from the 1st congestion management to the 4th congestion management, and the 17th identification information does not necessarily have to be. May be information indicating a DNN and / or S-NSSAI subject to congestion management identified by other means, such as being identified based on other identification information.
第18の識別情報は、第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報であってもよいし、第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立、又はPDUセッション変更(PDUセッションモディフィケーション)の要求が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。ここで、第1のNWスライスは、第1の識別情報によって判別されるNWスライスであってもよいし、異なるNWスライスであってもよい。さらに、第18の識別情報は、第12の識別情報によって識別されるDNにおいて第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよいし、第13の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションにおいて第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第11の識別情報は、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又はトラッキングエリアにおいて第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよいし、UE_A10が接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいて第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよい。更に、第11の識別情報は、拒絶されたPDUセッション要求が属するNWスライスを判別する1又は複数のNWスライスを識別する為の識別情報であってもよい。更に、第18の識別情報は、UEが接続先をEPSに切り替えた場合に、無線アクセスシステムが適切なMMEを選択するための補助情報を示す識別情報であってもよい。尚、補助情報はDCN IDを示す情報であってよい。更に、第18の識別情報は、複数スライス情報を関連付けるルールであるネットワークスライス関連付けルールであってよい。
The 18th identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice has been rejected, the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice, or the PDU session. It may be information indicating that the request for change (PDU session modification) is not permitted. Here, the first NW slice may be a NW slice determined by the first identification information, or may be a different NW slice. Further, the 18th identification information may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the 1st NW slice is not permitted in the DN identified by the 12th identification information, or the 13th identification information. It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is not permitted in the PDU session identified by. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is not permitted in the registration area and / or the tracking area to which the UE_A10 currently belongs, or the UE_A10. It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is not permitted in the access network to which is connected. Further, the eleventh identification information may be identification information for identifying one or more NW slices to which the rejected PDU session request belongs. Further, the 18th identification information may be identification information indicating auxiliary information for the wireless access system to select an appropriate MME when the UE switches the connection destination to EPS. The auxiliary information may be information indicating the DCN ID. Further, the 18th identification information may be a network slice association rule which is a rule for associating a plurality of slice information.
第21の識別情報は、UEが起動している一又は複数の第1のタイマーを停止する情報であってよいし、UEが起動している第1のタイマーのうち、停止する第1のタイマーを示す情報であってもよい。具体的には、第21の識別情報は、第1のタイマーと関連付けてUEが記憶している第13の識別情報を示す情報でよい。さらに、第21の識別情報は、第1のタイマーと関連付けてUEが記憶している第12から第18の識別情報の少なくとも一つを示す情報でもよい。
The 21st identification information may be information for stopping one or a plurality of first timers in which the UE is running, and among the first timers in which the UE is running, the first timer to be stopped. It may be information indicating. Specifically, the 21st identification information may be information indicating the 13th identification information stored in the UE in association with the first timer. Further, the 21st identification information may be information indicating at least one of the 12th to 18th identification information stored in the UE in association with the first timer.
さらに、第21の識別情報は、UEが記憶している第1のタイマーと第13から第17の識別情報の少なくとも一つを示す情報との関連付けを変更する情報でも良い。例えば、DNN#AとS-NSSAI#Aの組み合わせのUE主導のセッションマネジメントを抑止する第1のタイマーが起動している時に、DNN#Aへの接続を許可する第21の識別情報を含んだNW主導のセッションマネジメント要求を受けた場合、UEは、起動しているタイマーの関連付け対象をS-NSSAI#Aのみに変更し、DNN#AへのUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求は許可されたと認識してもよい。言い換えれば、第21の識別情報は、第21の識別情報受信時に適用されている輻輳管理を、第1から第4の輻輳管理のうち、別の輻輳管理に変更する事を示す情報であってもよい。
Further, the 21st identification information may be information that changes the association between the 1st timer stored in the UE and the information indicating at least one of the 13th to 17th identification information. For example, it contains a 21st identity that allows connection to DNN # A when the 1st timer that suppresses UE-driven session management of the combination of DNN # A and S-NSSAI # A is running. When receiving a NW-led session management request, the UE changes the association target of the running timer to S-NSSAI # A only, and recognizes that the UE-led session management request to DNN # A is permitted. You may. In other words, the 21st identification information is information indicating that the congestion management applied at the time of receiving the 21st identification information is changed to another congestion management among the 1st to 4th congestion managements. May be good.
次に、初期手続きを、図9を用いて説明する。以下、初期手続きは本手続きとも称し、本手続きには、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、UE主導のPDUセッション確立手続き(PDU session establishment procedure)、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きが含まれる。登録手続き、PDUセッション確立手続き、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの詳細は、後述する。
Next, the initial procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the initial procedure is also referred to as this procedure, and this procedure includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a UE-led PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and a network-led session management procedure. Details of the registration procedure, PDU session establishment procedure, and network-led session management procedure will be described later.
具体的には、各装置が登録手続き(S900)を実行することにより、UE_A10はネットワークに登録された状態(RM-REGISTERED状態)に遷移する。次に、各装置がPDUセッション確立手続き(S902)を実行することにより、UE_A10は、コアネットワーク_B190を介して、PDU接続サービスを提供するDN_A5との間でPDUセッションを確立し、各装置間は第1の状態に遷移する(S904)。尚、このPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_A235を介して確立されていることを想定しているが、それに限られない。すなわち、UPF_A235とアクセスネットワークとの間に、UPF_A235とは異なるUPF(UPF_C239)が存在してもよい。このとき、このPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_C239、UPF_A235を介して確立されることになる。次に、第1の状態の各装置は任意のタイミングで、セッションマネジメント手続きを実行してもよい(S906)。ここで、セッションマネジメント手続きは、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きであってもよいし、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きであってもよい。
Specifically, when each device executes the registration procedure (S900), UE_A10 transitions to the state registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state). Next, each device executes the PDU session establishment procedure (S902), so that UE_A10 establishes a PDU session with DN_A5, which provides the PDU connection service, via the core network_B190, and between the devices. Transitions to the first state (S904). It is assumed that this PDU session is established via the access network, UPF_A235, but it is not limited to this. That is, there may be a UPF (UPF_C239) different from the UPF_A235 between the UPF_A235 and the access network. At this time, this PDU session will be established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_A235. Next, each device in the first state may execute the session management procedure at any time (S906). Here, the session management procedure may be a network-led session management procedure or a UE-led session management procedure.
尚、各装置は、登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続き及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きにおいて、各装置の各種能力情報及び/又は各種要求情報を交換してもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施した場合、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続き及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きで実施してもよいし、しなくてもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施しなかった場合、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続き及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きで実施してもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施した場合でも、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続き及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きで実施してもよい。
Note that each device may exchange various capability information and / or various request information of each device in the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the network-led session management procedure. In addition, when each device exchanges various information and / or negotiates various requests in the registration procedure, the exchange of various information and / or negotiation of various requests is performed in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or the network-led session management procedure. It may or may not be carried out at. In addition, if each device does not exchange various information and / or negotiate various requests in the registration procedure, exchange various information and / or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or network-led session. It may be carried out by the management procedure. In addition, even if each device exchanges various information and / or negotiates various requests in the registration procedure, the exchange of various information and / or negotiation of various requests is performed in the PDU session establishment procedure and / or network-led session management. It may be carried out by the procedure.
また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きの中で実行してもよく、登録手続きの完了後に実行してもよい。また、PDUセッション確立手続きが登録手続きの中で実行される場合、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは登録要求メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは登録受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは登録完了メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは登録拒絶メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよい。また、PDUセッション確立手続きが登録手続きの中で実行された場合、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいてPDUセッションを確立してもよいし、各装置間でPDUセッションが確立された状態へ遷移してもよい。
Further, each device may execute the PDU session establishment procedure in the registration procedure or after the registration procedure is completed. Also, when the PDU session establishment procedure is executed during the registration procedure, the PDU session establishment request message may be included in the registration request message and sent / received, and the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be included in the registration acceptance message and sent / received. The PDU session establishment completion message may be included in the registration completion message and sent / received, and the PDU session establishment rejection message may be included in the registration rejection message and sent / received. Further, when the PDU session establishment procedure is executed in the registration procedure, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the registration procedure, or the PDU session is established between the devices. You may make a transition.
また、本手続きに関わる各装置は、本手続きで説明する各制御メッセージを送受信することにより、各制御メッセージに含まれる1以上の識別情報を送受信し、送受信した各識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶してもよい。
In addition, each device involved in this procedure sends and receives one or more identification information included in each control message by transmitting and receiving each control message described in this procedure, and stores each transmitted and received identification information as a context. May be good.
[1.3.1.登録手続きの概要]
まず、登録手続きの概要について説明する。登録手続きは、UE_A10が主導してネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190、及び/又はDN_A5)へ登録する為の手続きである。UE_A10は、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UE_A10は、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよい。 [1.3.1. Outline of registration procedure]
First, the outline of the registration procedure will be described. The registration procedure is a procedure for UE_A10 to take the lead in registering with the network (access network and / or core network_B190 and / or DN_A5). UE_A10 can execute this procedure at any time, such as when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, UE_A10 may start this procedure at any time as long as it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). Further, each device may transition to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
まず、登録手続きの概要について説明する。登録手続きは、UE_A10が主導してネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190、及び/又はDN_A5)へ登録する為の手続きである。UE_A10は、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UE_A10は、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよい。 [1.3.1. Outline of registration procedure]
First, the outline of the registration procedure will be described. The registration procedure is a procedure for UE_A10 to take the lead in registering with the network (access network and / or core network_B190 and / or DN_A5). UE_A10 can execute this procedure at any time, such as when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, UE_A10 may start this procedure at any time as long as it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). Further, each device may transition to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
さらに、本手続きは、ネットワークにおけるUE_A10の位置登録情報を更新する、及び/又は、UE_A10からネットワークへ定期的にUE_A10の状態を通知する、及び/又は、ネットワークにおけるUE_A10に関する特定のパラメータを更新する為の手続きであってもよい。
In addition, this procedure updates the location registration information of UE_A10 in the network and / or periodically notifies the network of the status of UE_A10 from UE_A10 and / or updates specific parameters regarding UE_A10 in the network. It may be the procedure of.
UE_A10は、TAを跨ぐモビリティをした際に、本手続きを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、保持しているTAリストで示されるTAとは異なるTAに移動した際に、本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、実行しているタイマーが満了した際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッションの切断や無効化(非活性化とも称する)が原因で各装置のコンテキストの更新が必要な際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、UE_A10のPDUセッション確立に関する、能力情報、及び/又はプリファレンスに変化が生じた場合、本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、定期的に本手続きを開始してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、これらに限らず、PDUセッションが確立された状態であれば、任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。
UE_A10 may start this procedure when it has mobility across TAs. In other words, UE_A10 may start this procedure when it moves to a TA different from the TA shown in the held TA list. In addition, UE_A10 may start this procedure when the running timer expires. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation (also referred to as deactivation) of the PDU session. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure if there is a change in capability information and / or preferences regarding UE_A10's PDU session establishment. In addition, UE_A10 may initiate this procedure on a regular basis. UE_A10 is not limited to these, and this procedure can be executed at any timing as long as the PDU session is established.
[1.3.1.1.登録手続き例]
図10を用いて、登録手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。本章では、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.3.1.1. Example of registration procedure]
An example of the procedure for executing the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
図10を用いて、登録手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。本章では、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.3.1.1. Example of registration procedure]
An example of the procedure for executing the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
まず、UE_A10は、NR node(gNBとも称する)_A122及び/又はng-eNBを介して、AMF_A240に登録要求(Registration Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S1000)(S1002)(S1004)、登録手続きを開始する。また、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージにSM(Session Management)メッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含めて送信することで、又は登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を送信することで、登録手続き中にPDUセッション確立手続き等のセッションマネジメント(SM)のための手続きを開始してもよい。
First, UE_A10 performs the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to AMF_A240 via NR node (also called gNB) _A122 and / or ng-eNB (S1000) (S1002) (S1004). Start. In addition, UE_A10 sends an SM (Session Management) message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or sends an SM message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message. By doing so, the procedure for session management (SM) such as the PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
具体的には、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージを含むRRC(Radio Resource Control)メッセージを、NR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBに送信する(S1000)。NR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBは、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを受信すると、RRCメッセージの中から登録要求メッセージを取り出し、登録要求メッセージのルーティング先のNF又は共有CPファンクションとして、AMF_A240を選択する(S1002)。ここで、NR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBは、RRCメッセージに含まれる情報に基づき、AMF_A240を選択してもよい。NR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBは、選択したAMF_A240に、登録要求メッセージを送信又は転送する(S1004)。
Specifically, UE_A10 sends an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message including a registration request message to NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB (S1000). When NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB receives the RRC message including the registration request message, it extracts the registration request message from the RRC message and selects AMF_A240 as the NF or shared CP function to which the registration request message is routed. (S1002). Here, NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB may select AMF_A240 based on the information contained in the RRC message. NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB sends or forwards a registration request message to the selected AMF_A240 (S1004).
尚、登録要求メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNAS(Non-Access-Stratum)メッセージである。また、RRCメッセージは、UE_A10とNR node_A122及び/又はng-eNBとの間で送受信される制御メッセージである。また、NASメッセージはNASレイヤで処理され、RRCメッセージはRRCレイヤで処理され、NASレイヤはRRCレイヤよりも上位のレイヤである。
The registration request message is a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent and received on the N1 interface. The RRC message is a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and NR node_A122 and / or ng-eNB. In addition, NAS messages are processed in the NAS layer, RRC messages are processed in the RRC layer, and the NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
また、UE_A10は、登録を要求するNSIが複数存在する場合は、そのNSIごとに登録要求メッセージを送信してもよく、複数の登録要求メッセージを、1以上のRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。また、上記の複数の登録要求メッセージを1つの登録要求メッセージとして、1以上のRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。
In addition, UE_A10 may send a registration request message for each NSI when there are multiple NSIs requesting registration, or may send a plurality of registration request messages by including them in one or more RRC messages. Good. Further, the above-mentioned plurality of registration request messages may be included in one or more RRC messages as one registration request message and transmitted.
AMF_A240は、登録要求メッセージ及び/又は登録要求メッセージとは異なる制御メッセージを受信すると、第1の条件判別を実行する。第1の条件判別は、AMF_A240がUE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判別するためのものである。第1の条件判別において、AMF_A240は第1の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。AMF_A240は、第1の条件判別が真の場合(すなわち、ネットワークがUE_A10の要求を受諾する場合)、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第1の条件判別が偽の場合(すなわち、ネットワークがUE_A10の要求を受諾しない場合)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。
When AMF_A240 receives a registration request message and / or a control message different from the registration request message, it executes the first condition determination. The first conditional determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A240 accepts the request of UE_A10. In the first condition determination, AMF_A240 determines whether the first condition determination is true or false. AMF_A240 initiates procedure (A) during this procedure if the first condition determination is true (ie, if the network accepts the request for UE_A10) and if the first condition determination is false (ie). , If the network does not accept the request of UE_A10), start the procedure (B) during this procedure.
以下、第1の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。AMF_A240は、第4の条件判別を実行し、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始する。第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施するか否かを判別するためのものである。言い換えると、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240が本手続き中で、PDUセッション確立手続きを実施するか否かを判別するものであってもよい。AMF_A240は、第4の条件判別が真の場合(すなわち、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施する場合)には、SMF_A230の選択、及び選択したSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実行し、第4の条件判別が偽の場合(すなわち、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施しない場合)には、それらを省略する(S1006)。尚、AMF_A240は、SMF_A230から拒絶を示すSMメッセージを受信した場合は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを中止し、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始してもよい。
Hereinafter, the steps when the first condition determination is true, that is, each step of the procedure (A) in this procedure will be described. AMF_A240 executes the fourth condition determination and starts the procedure (A) during this procedure. The fourth condition determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A240 sends and receives SM messages to and from SMF_A230. In other words, the fourth condition determination may determine whether or not AMF_A240 is in the process of performing the PDU session establishment procedure. AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 and sends and receives SM messages to and from the selected SMF_A230 when the fourth condition determination is true (that is, when AMF_A240 sends and receives SM messages to and from SMF_A230). If the fourth condition determination is false (that is, if AMF_A240 does not send or receive SM messages to or from SMF_A230), omit them (S1006). When AMF_A240 receives an SM message indicating refusal from SMF_A230, it may cancel the procedure (A) during this procedure and start the procedure (B) during this procedure.
さらに、AMF_A240は、UE_A10からの登録要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はSMF_A230との間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、NR node_A122を介して、UE_A10に登録受諾(Registration Accept)メッセージを送信する(S1008)。例えば、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、UE_A10からの登録要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。また、第4の条件判別が偽の場合、AMF_A240は、SMF_A230との間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。ここで、登録受諾メッセージは、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録受諾メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、AMF_A240はNR node_A122に対してN2インターフェースの制御メッセージとして送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はUE_A10に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。
In addition, AMF_A240 sends a Registration Accept message to UE_A10 via NR node_A122 based on the receipt of the registration request message from UE_A10 and / or the completion of sending and receiving SM messages to and from SMF_A230. (S1008). For example, if the fourth condition determination is true, AMF_A240 may send a registration acceptance message based on the receipt of the registration request message from UE_A10. Further, if the fourth condition determination is false, the AMF_A240 may send a registration acceptance message based on the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF_A230. Here, the registration acceptance message may be sent as a response message to the registration request message. The registration acceptance message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface. For example, AMF_A240 sends to NR node_A122 as a control message for N2 interface, and NR node_A122 that receives this is an RRC message to UE_A10. You may include it in and send it.
さらに、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、登録受諾メッセージに、SMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を含めて送信するか、又は登録受諾メッセージとともに、SMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を送信してもよい。この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージの中にSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)が含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。また、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。AMF_A240は、このような送信方法を行うことにより、SMのための手続きが受諾されたことを示してもよい。
Further, if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF_A240 may send the registration acceptance message including the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment acceptance message), or together with the registration acceptance message, the SM message (eg, PDU). A session establishment acceptance message) may be sent. This transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. AMF_A240 may indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted by performing such a transmission method.
UE_A10は、NR node_A122介して、登録受諾メッセージを受信する(S1008)。UE_A10は、登録受諾メッセージを受信することで、登録受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。
UE_A10 receives the registration acceptance message via NR node_A122 (S1008). UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the registration acceptance message by receiving the registration acceptance message.
次に、UE_A10は、登録受諾メッセージの受信に基づいて、登録完了(Registration Complete)メッセージを、AMF_A240に送信する(S1010)。尚、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ等のSMメッセージを受信した場合は、登録完了メッセージに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージ等のSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、SMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きを完了することを示してもよい。ここで、登録完了メッセージは、登録受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録完了メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、UE_A10はNR node_A122に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はAMF_A240に対してN2インターフェースの制御メッセージとして送信してもよい。
Next, UE_A10 sends a Registration Complete message to AMF_A240 based on the receipt of the registration acceptance message (S1010). When UE_A10 receives an SM message such as a PDU session establishment acceptance message, it may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM is completed. Here, the registration completion message may be sent as a response message to the registration acceptance message. The registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface. For example, UE_A10 sends it to NR node_A122 by including it in the RRC message, and NR node_A122 that receives this is sent to AMF_A240 on the N2 interface. It may be sent as a control message.
AMF_A240は、登録完了メッセージを受信する(S1010)。また、各装置は、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録完了メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。
AMF_A240 receives a registration completion message (S1010). In addition, each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
次に、第1の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。AMF_A240は、NR node_A122を介して、UE_A10に登録拒絶(Registration Reject)メッセージを送信することにより(S1012)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。ここで、登録拒絶メッセージは、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録拒絶メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、AMF_A240はNR node_A122に対してN2インターフェースの制御メッセージとして送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はUE_A10に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。また、AMF_A240が送信する登録拒絶メッセージは、UE_A10の要求を拒絶するメッセージであれば、これに限らない。
Next, the steps when the first condition determination is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. AMF_A240 starts the procedure (B) during this procedure by sending a Registration Reject message to UE_A10 via NR node_A122 (S1012). Here, the registration refusal message may be sent as a response message to the registration request message. The registration refusal message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface. For example, AMF_A240 sends to NR node_A122 as a control message for N2 interface, and NR node_A122 that receives this is an RRC message to UE_A10. You may include it in and send it. Further, the registration refusal message transmitted by AMF_A240 is not limited to this as long as it is a message that rejects the request of UE_A10.
尚、本手続き中の(B)の手続きは、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを中止した場合に開始される場合もある。(A)の手続きにおいて、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、登録拒絶メッセージに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを示してもよい。その場合、UE_A10は、さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを受信してもよいし、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。
Note that the procedure (B) during this procedure may be started when the procedure (A) during this procedure is cancelled. In the procedure (A), if the fourth condition determination is true, AMF_A240 may send the registration refusal message including an SM message indicating refusal such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or reject the registration. The inclusion of the meaning SM message may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected. In that case, UE_A10 may further receive an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
さらに、UE_A10は、登録拒絶メッセージを受信することにより、あるいは、登録受諾メッセージを受信しないことにより、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。各装置は、登録拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected by receiving the registration refusal message or by not receiving the registration acceptance message. Each device completes the procedure (B) during this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
各装置は、本手続き中の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続き(登録手続き)を完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに登録された状態(RM_REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに登録されていない状態(RM_DEREGISTERED state)を維持してもよい。また、各装置の各状態への遷移は、本手続きの完了に基づいて行われてもよく、PDUセッションの確立に基づいて行われてもよい。
Each device completes this procedure (registration procedure) based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) during this procedure. Each device may transition to the state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or the procedure (B) during this procedure. UE_A10 may remain unregistered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state) based on the completion of. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of this procedure, or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。
Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
また、第1の条件判別は、登録要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の登録先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UE_A10が要求する機能を、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。さらに、第1の条件判別は、ネットワークが、輻輳状態であると判断した場合は真であってよく、輻輳状態ではないと判断した場合は偽であってよい。尚、第1の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Further, the first condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the registration request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the first condition determination may be true if the network allows the request for UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be true if the network to which UE_A10 is registered and / or the device in the network supports the function required by UE_A10, and false if it does not support it. Good. Further, the first condition determination may be true if the network determines that it is in a congested state, and may be false if it is determined that it is not in a congested state. The condition for determining the truth of the first condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
また、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMを受信したか否かに基づいて実行されてよく、登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれているかに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMを受信した場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていた場合は真であってよく、AMF_A240がSMを受信しなかった場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていなかった場合は偽であってよい。尚、第4の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Further, the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether or not AMF_A240 has received the SM, and may be executed based on whether or not the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, the fourth condition determination may be true if AMF_A240 receives SM and / or if the registration request message contains an SM message, if AMF_A240 does not receive SM, and / Or it may be false if the registration request message does not contain the SM message. The condition for determining the truth of the fourth condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
[1.3.2.PDUセッション確立手続きの概要]
次に、DN_A5に対するPDUセッションを確立するために行うPDUセッション確立手続きの概要について説明する。以下、PDUセッション確立手続きは、本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、各装置がPDUセッションを確立する為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、本手続きを、登録手続きを完了した状態で実行してもよいし、登録手続きの中で実行してもよい。また、各装置は、登録状態で本手続きを開始してもよいし、登録手続き後の任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きを複数回実行することで、複数のPDUセッションを確立してもよい。 [1.3.2. Outline of PDU session establishment procedure]
Next, the outline of the PDU session establishment procedure performed to establish the PDU session for DN_A5 will be described. Hereinafter, the PDU session establishment procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. In addition, each device may execute this procedure in a state where the registration procedure is completed, or may execute this procedure in the registration procedure. Further, each device may start the main procedure in the registered state, or may start the main procedure at an arbitrary timing after the registration procedure. In addition, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing this procedure a plurality of times.
次に、DN_A5に対するPDUセッションを確立するために行うPDUセッション確立手続きの概要について説明する。以下、PDUセッション確立手続きは、本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、各装置がPDUセッションを確立する為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、本手続きを、登録手続きを完了した状態で実行してもよいし、登録手続きの中で実行してもよい。また、各装置は、登録状態で本手続きを開始してもよいし、登録手続き後の任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きを複数回実行することで、複数のPDUセッションを確立してもよい。 [1.3.2. Outline of PDU session establishment procedure]
Next, the outline of the PDU session establishment procedure performed to establish the PDU session for DN_A5 will be described. Hereinafter, the PDU session establishment procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. In addition, each device may execute this procedure in a state where the registration procedure is completed, or may execute this procedure in the registration procedure. Further, each device may start the main procedure in the registered state, or may start the main procedure at an arbitrary timing after the registration procedure. In addition, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing this procedure a plurality of times.
[1.3.2.1.PDUセッション確立手続き例]
図11を用いて、PDUセッション確立手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。まず、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク_Bを介して、コアネットワーク_BにPDUセッション確立要求(PDU Session Establishment Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S1100)、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。言い換えると、UEは、コアネットワーク_B190内のSMF_A230に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。 [1.3.2.1. Example of PDU session establishment procedure]
An example of the procedure for executing the PDU session establishment procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below. First, UE_A10 starts the PDU session establishment procedure by sending a PDU session establishment request (PDU Session Establishment Request) message to the core network_B via the access network_B (S1100). In other words, the UE sends a PDU session establishment request message to SMF_A230 in the core network_B190 and initiates the PDU session establishment procedure.
図11を用いて、PDUセッション確立手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。まず、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク_Bを介して、コアネットワーク_BにPDUセッション確立要求(PDU Session Establishment Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S1100)、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。言い換えると、UEは、コアネットワーク_B190内のSMF_A230に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。 [1.3.2.1. Example of PDU session establishment procedure]
An example of the procedure for executing the PDU session establishment procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below. First, UE_A10 starts the PDU session establishment procedure by sending a PDU session establishment request (PDU Session Establishment Request) message to the core network_B via the access network_B (S1100). In other words, the UE sends a PDU session establishment request message to SMF_A230 in the core network_B190 and initiates the PDU session establishment procedure.
具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インターフェースを用いて、NR node_A122を介して、コアネットワーク_B190内のAMF_A240に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する(S1100)。AMF_Aは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信し、第3の条件判別を実行する。第3の条件判別は、AMF_Aが、UE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第3の条件判別において、AMF_Aは、第5の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。コアネットワーク_Bは、第3の条件判別が真の場合はコアネットワーク内の処理#1を開始し(S1101)、第3の条件判別が偽の場合は本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。尚、第3の条件判別が偽の場合のステップは後述する。ここで、コアネットワーク内の処理#1は、コアネットワーク_B190内のAMF_AによるSMF選択及び/又はAMF_AとSMF_AとのPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送受信であってよい。
Specifically, UE_A10 uses the N1 interface to send a PDU session establishment request message to AMF_A240 in the core network_B190 via NR node_A122 (S1100). AMF_A receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition determination. The third condition determination is for determining whether or not AMF_A accepts the request of UE_A10. In the third condition determination, AMF_A determines whether the fifth condition determination is true or false. If the third condition determination is true, the core network_B starts processing # 1 in the core network (S1101), and if the third condition determination is false, the procedure (B) in this procedure is performed. Start. The step when the third condition determination is false will be described later. Here, the process # 1 in the core network may be SMF selection by AMF_A in the core network_B190 and / or transmission / reception of a PDU session establishment request message between AMF_A and SMF_A.
コアネットワーク_B190は、コアネットワーク内の処理#1を開始する。コアネットワーク内の処理#1において、AMF_A240が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージのルーティング先のNFとしてSMF_A230を選択し、N11インターフェースを用いて、選択したSMF_A230に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信又は転送してもよい。ここで、AMF_A240は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる情報に基づき、ルーティング先のSMF_A230を選択してもよい。より詳細には、AMF_A240は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はAMF_A240が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、ルーティング先のSMF_A230を選択してもよい。
Core network_B190 starts processing # 1 in the core network. In process # 1 in the core network, AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 as the routing destination NF for the PDU session establishment request message, and uses the N11 interface to send or forward the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF_A230. May be good. Here, AMF_A240 may select the routing destination SMF_A230 based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment request message. More specifically, the AMF_A240 is an identification information and / or a subscriber information acquired based on the reception of a PDU session establishment request message, and / or a network capability information, and / or an operator policy, and / or a network. The routing destination SMF_A230 may be selected based on the state and / or the context already held by AMF_A240.
尚、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、NASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、PDUセッションの確立を要求するメッセージであればよく、これに限らない。
The PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message may be any message that requests the establishment of the PDU session, and is not limited to this.
ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに、第1から第4の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求を示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。
Here, UE_A10 may include one or more identification information among the first to fourth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message, and by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 is indicated. May be good. In addition, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
さらに、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第2の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
In addition, UE_A10 transmits the first and / or second identification and / or third identification and / or fourth identification by including it in the PDU session establishment request message. , You may request the establishment of a PDU session that belongs to a network slice, you may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, as requested by UE_A10, or you may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session will belong. Good.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報と第2の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第2の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
More specifically, UE_A10 is a network in a PDU session established for a DN identified by the second identification by transmitting the first identification and the second identification in association with each other. It may request the establishment of a PDU session that belongs to the slice, it may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, as requested by UE_A10, or it may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
さらに、UE_A10は、第1から第4の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、UE_A10が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。
Further, UE_A10 may make a request combining the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information among the first to fourth identification information. It should be noted that what UE_A10 indicates by transmitting each identification information does not have to be limited to these.
尚、UE_A10は、第1から第4の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに入れるかを、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUEポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10のプリファレンス、及び/又はアプリケーション(上位層)に基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。
In addition, UE_A10 determines which identification information to be included in the PDU session establishment request message among the first to fourth identification information, the capability information of UE_A10 and / or the policy such as UE policy, and / or the application of UE_A10. It may be determined based on the reference and / or the application (upper layer). Note that UE_A10 is not limited to determining which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment request message.
コアネットワーク_B190内のSMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信し、第3の条件判別を実行する。第3の条件判別は、SMF_A230が、UE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第3の条件判別において、SMF_A230は、第3の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。SMF_A230は、第3の条件判別が真の場合は本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第3の条件判別が偽の場合は本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。尚、第3の条件判別が偽の場合のステップは後述する。
SMF_A230 in core network_B190 receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition determination. The third condition determination is for determining whether or not SMF_A230 accepts the request of UE_A10. In the third condition determination, SMF_A230 determines whether the third condition determination is true or false. SMF_A230 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the third condition judgment is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the third condition judgment is false. The step when the third condition determination is false will be described later.
以下、第3の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMF_A230は、PDUセッションの確立先のUPF_A235を選択し、第11の条件判別を実行する。
Hereinafter, the steps when the third condition determination is true, that is, each step of the procedure (A) in this procedure will be described. SMF_A230 selects UPF_A235 to establish the PDU session and executes the eleventh condition determination.
ここで、第11の条件判別は、各装置がコアネットワーク内の処理#2を実行するか否かを判断するためのものである。ここで、コアネットワーク内の処理#2は、各装置によるPDUセッション確立認証手続きの開始及び/又は実行、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190内のSMF_AとUPF_Aの間のセッション確立要求(Session Establishment request)メッセージの送受信及び/又は、セッション確立応答(Session Establishment response)メッセージの送受信、等が含まれていてよい(S1103)。第11の条件判別において、SMF_A230は第11の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。SMF_A230は、第11の条件判別が真の場合はPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを開始し、第11の条件判別が偽の場合はPDUセッション確立認証承認手続を省略する。尚、コアネットワーク内の処理#2のPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの詳細は後述する。
Here, the eleventh condition determination is for determining whether or not each device executes the process # 2 in the core network. Here, process # 2 in the core network is the start and / or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication procedure by each device, and / or the session establishment request between SMF_A and UPF_A in the core network_B190 (Session Establishment request). Sending and receiving messages and / or sending and receiving Session Establishment response messages, etc. may be included (S1103). In the eleventh condition determination, SMF_A230 determines whether the eleventh condition determination is true or false. SMF_A230 starts the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure when the eleventh condition determination is true, and omits the PDU session establishment authentication approval approval procedure when the eleventh condition determination is false. The details of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure for process # 2 in the core network will be described later.
次に、SMF_A230は、第11の条件判別、及び/又はPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの完了に基づいて、選択したUPF_A235にセッション確立要求メッセージを送信し、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始する。尚、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始せずに、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始してもよい。
Next, SMF_A230 sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF_A235 based on the completion of the eleventh condition determination and / or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure, and starts the procedure (A) during this procedure. To do. In addition, SMF_A230 may start the procedure (B) in this procedure without starting the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure.
ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はSMF_A230が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、1以上のUPF_A235を選択してもよい。尚、複数のUPF_A235が選択された場合、SMF_A230は、各々のUPF_A235に対してセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Here, SMF_A230 is the identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the capability information of the network, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the operator policy, and / or the state of the network. And / or one or more UPF_A235s may be selected based on the context already held by SMF_A230. When a plurality of UPF_A235s are selected, SMF_A230 may send a session establishment request message to each UPF_A235.
UPF_A235は、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信し、PDUセッションのためのコンテキストを作成する。さらに、UPF_A235は、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信、及び/又はPDUセッションのためのコンテキストの作成に基づいて、SMF_A230にセッション確立応答メッセージを送信する。さらに、SMF_A230は、セッション確立応答メッセージを受信する。尚、セッション確立要求メッセージ及びセッション確立応答メッセージは、N4インターフェース上で送受信される制御メッセージであってもよい。さらに、セッション確立応答メッセージは、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージであってよい。
UPF_A235 receives the session establishment request message and creates a context for the PDU session. In addition, UPF_A235 receives a session establishment request message and / or sends a session establishment response message to SMF_A230 based on creating a context for the PDU session. In addition, SMF_A230 receives a session establishment response message. The session establishment request message and the session establishment response message may be control messages sent and received on the N4 interface. Further, the session establishment response message may be a response message to the session establishment request message.
さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPF_A235の選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当てを行ってよい。尚、SMF_A230は、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当てをPDUセッション確立手続き中で行ってもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に行ってもよい。
Furthermore, SMF_A230 may assign an address to be assigned to UE_A10 based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of UPF_A235 and / or the reception of the session establishment response message. Note that SMF_A230 may assign the address assigned to UE_A10 during the PDU session establishment procedure or after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
具体的には、SMF_A230は、DHCPv4を用いずにIPv4アドレスを割り当てる場合、PDUセッション確立手続き中に、アドレス割り当てを行ってもよいし、割り当てたアドレスをUE_A10に送信してもよい。さらに、SMF_A230は、DHCPv4又はDHCPv6又はSLAAC(Stateless Address Autoconfiguration)用いてIPv4アドレス、及び/又はIPv6アドレス、及び/又はIPv6プレフィックスを割り当てる場合、PDUセッション確立手続き後に、アドレス割り当てを行ってもよいし、割り当てたアドレスをUE_A10に送信してもよい。尚、SMF_A230が実施するアドレス割り当てはこれらに限らない。
Specifically, when SMF_A230 assigns an IPv4 address without using DHCPv4, the address may be assigned during the PDU session establishment procedure, or the assigned address may be transmitted to UE_A10. Furthermore, when SMF_A230 assigns an IPv4 address and / or an IPv6 address and / or an IPv6 prefix using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6 or SLAAC (Stateless Address Autoconfiguration), the address may be assigned after the PDU session establishment procedure. The assigned address may be sent to UE_A10. The address allocation performed by SMF_A230 is not limited to these.
さらに、SMF_A230は、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当ての完了に基づいて、割り当てたアドレスをPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めてUE_A10に送信してもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、UE_A10に送信してもよい。
In addition, SMF_A230 may include the assigned address in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and send it to UE_A10 based on the completion of address assignment of the address assigned to UE_A10, or send it to UE_A10 after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed. You may.
SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPF_A235の選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信、及び/又はUE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当ての完了に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10にPDUセッション確立受諾(PDU session establishment accept)メッセージを送信する(S1110)。
SMF_A230 sends to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 based on the receipt of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of UPF_A235 and / or the reception of the session establishment response message and / or the completion of address assignment of the address assigned to UE_A10. Send a PDU session establishment accept message (S1110).
具体的には、SMF_A230は、N11インターフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N1インターフェースを用いてUE_A10にPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信する。
Specifically, SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to AMF_A240 using the N11 interface, and AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、PDUセッションID、及び/又はDNN、及び/又は、S-NSSAIを含めてよい。
Furthermore, SMF_A230 may include the PDU session ID and / or DNN and / or S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
ここで、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるPDUセッションIDは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれていたPDUセッションIDと同じであってもよいし、異なるPDUセッションIDであってもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるPDUセッションIDは、ネットワークによって選択されたPDUセッションIDであってもよい。
Here, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different PDU session ID. Further, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the PDU session ID selected by the network.
さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるDNNは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれていたDNNと同じであってもよいし、異なるDNNであってもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるDNNは、ネットワークによって選択されたDNNであってもよいし、デフォルトのDNNであってもよい。
Furthermore, the DNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the DNN included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different DNN. In addition, the DNN contained in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the DNN selected by the network or the default DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるS-NSSAIは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれていたS-NSSAIと同じであってもよいし、異なるS-NSSAIであってもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるS-NSSAIは、ネットワークによって選択されたS-NSSAIであってもよいし、デフォルトのS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Furthermore, the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the same as the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment request message, or may be a different S-NSSAI. Further, the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be the S-NSSAI selected by the network or the default S-NSSAI.
さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、マップドS-NSSAI(mapped S-NSSAI)も含めてもよい。言い換えると、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、S-NSSAIと一緒に、マップドS-NSSAIも含めてもよい。ここで、マップドS-NSSAIは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるS-NSSAIのマップドS-NSSAIであってよい。具体的には、マップドS-NSSAIは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるS-NSSAIと対応付けられる、ホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであってもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれるS-NSSAIとマップドS-NSSAIとは、対応付けられていてよいし、マップドS-NSSAIとホームPLMNのS-NSSAIとは、対応付けられていてよい。
Furthermore, SMF_A230 may include mapped S-NSSAI (mapped S-NSSAI) in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. In other words, SMF_A230 may include the mapped S-NSSAI along with the S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Here, the mapped S-NSSAI may be the mapped S-NSSAI of the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Specifically, the mapped S-NSSAI may be the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN associated with the S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. In other words, the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be associated with each other, and the mapped S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN may be associated with each other. ..
尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージはPDN接続受諾(PDN connectivity accept)メッセージでよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、N11インターフェース、及びN1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、これに限らず、PDUセッションの確立が受諾されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。
If the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a PDN connectivity accept message. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this, and may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been accepted.
UE_A10は、SMF_A230からPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信することで、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。
UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message from SMF_A230. UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message by receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
次に、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージの受信の完了に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してSMF_A230にPDUセッション確立完了(PDU session establishment complete)メッセージを送信する(S1114)。さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信し、第2の条件判別を実行する。
Next, UE_A10 sends a PDU session establishment complete message to SMF_A230 via AMF_A240 based on the completion of receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message (S1114). In addition, SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment completion message and executes the second condition determination.
具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インターフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N11インターフェースを用いてSMF_A230にPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信する。
Specifically, UE_A10 uses the N1 interface to send a PDU session establishment completion message to AMF_A240, and AMF_A240, which receives the PDU session establishment completion message, sends a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、PDN接続完了(PDN Connectivity complete)メッセージでもよいし、デフォルトEPSベアラコンテキストアクティブ化受諾(Activate default EPS bearer context accept)メッセージでもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、N1インターフェース、及びN11インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージであればよく、これに限らず、PDUセッション確立手続きが完了することを示すメッセージであればよい。
When the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a PDN connection completion (PDN Connectivity complete) message or a default EPS bearer context activation acceptance (Activate default EPS bearer context accept) message. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
第2の条件判別は、SMF_A230が、送受信されるN4インターフェース上のメッセージの種類を決定する為ものである。第2の条件判別が真の場合、コアネットワーク内の処理#3を開始してもよい(S1115)。ここで、コアネットワーク内の処理#3は、セッション変更要求(Session Modification request)メッセージの送受信及び/又は、セッション変更応答(Session Modification response)メッセージの送受信、等が含まれていてよい。SMF_A230はUPF_A235にセッション変更要求メッセージを送信し、さらに、セッション変更要求メッセージを受信したUPF_A235が送信したセッション変更受諾メッセージを受信する。また、第2の条件判別が偽の場合、SMF_A230は、コアネットワーク内の処理#2を実行する。すなわち、SMF_Aは、UPF_A235にセッション確立要求メッセージを送信し、さらに、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信したUPF_A235が送信したセッション変更受諾メッセージを受信する。
The second condition determination is for SMF_A230 to determine the type of message sent and received on the N4 interface. If the second condition determination is true, processing # 3 in the core network may be started (S1115). Here, the process # 3 in the core network may include transmission / reception of a session modification request message and / or transmission / reception of a session modification response message. SMF_A230 sends a session change request message to UPF_A235, and further receives a session change acceptance message sent by UPF_A235 that received the session change request message. If the second condition determination is false, SMF_A230 executes process # 2 in the core network. That is, SMF_A sends a session establishment request message to UPF_A235, and further receives a session change acceptance message sent by UPF_A235 that has received the session establishment request message.
各装置は、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション変更応答メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの送受信、及び/又はRA(Router Advertisement)の送受信に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。
Each device is in the process of this procedure based on sending and receiving PDU session establishment completion messages, / or sending and receiving session change response messages, and / or sending and receiving session establishment response messages, and / or sending and receiving RA (Router Advertisement). Complete the procedure of (A).
次に、第3の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMF_A230は、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10にPDUセッション確立拒絶(PDU session establishment reject)メッセージを送信し(S1122)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。
Next, the steps when the third condition determination is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment reject message to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 (S1122), and starts the procedure (B) during this procedure.
具体的には、SMF_A230は、N11インターフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N1インターフェースを用いてUE_A10にPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信する。
Specifically, SMF_A230 uses the N11 interface to send a PDU session establishment rejection message to AMF_A240, and AMF_A240, which receives the PDU session establishment request message, sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージはPDN接続拒絶(PDN connectivity reject)メッセージでよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、N11インターフェース、及びN1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、これに限らず、PDUセッションの確立が拒絶されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。
If the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a PDN connectivity reject message. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be a NAS message sent and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message is not limited to this, and may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been rejected.
ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに、第11から第18の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。
Here, SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the 11th to 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message, and by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 is rejected. You may show that. In addition, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
さらに、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報、及び/又は第16の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
Further, SMF_A230 contains the eleventh identification information and / or the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information and / or the fourteenth identification information and / or the fifteenth identification information and / or. The request to establish a PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected by sending the 16th identification information and / or the 17th identification information and / or the 18th identification information by including it in the PDU session establishment refusal message. It may indicate that it has been done, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
より詳細には、SMF_A230は、第18の識別情報と第12の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第12の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
More specifically, the SMF_A230 transmits the 18th identification information and the 12th identification information in association with each other, so that the network can be used in a PDU session established for the DN identified by the 12th identification information. It may indicate that the request to establish a PDU session belonging to the slice has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
さらに、SMF_A230は、第18の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又は、トラッキングエリアにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
In addition, SMF_A230 sends the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message to allow the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the registration area and / or tracking area to which UE_A10 currently belongs. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
さらに、SMF_A230は、第18の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。
In addition, SMF_A230 rejected the request to establish a PDU session belonging to the network slice in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected by sending the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message. It may indicate that, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to a PDU session.
さらに、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報及び/又は第14の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、第1のタイマーの値を示してもよいし、本手続きの完了後に、本手続きと同じ手続きを再び実施すべきか否かを示してもよい。
Furthermore, SMF_A230 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the eleventh identification information and / or the fourteenth identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message and transmitting it, or after the completion of this procedure. , May indicate whether or not the same procedure as this procedure should be carried out again.
さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から第18の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、SMF_A230が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。
Further, SMF_A230 may make a request combining the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information out of the eleventh to eighteenth identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by SMF_A230 by transmitting each identification information are not limited to these.
尚、SMF_A230は、第11から第18の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。
In addition, SMF_A230 indicates which of the 11th to 18th identification information is to be included in the PDU session establishment refusal message, the received identification information and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, etc. It may be decided based on the policy of the above and / or the state of the network.
さらに、第12の識別情報は、第2の識別情報が示すDNNと同じDNNを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第13の識別情報は、第3の識別情報が示すPDUセッションIDと同じPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第18の識別情報は、第1の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は第1の識別情報が示すネットワークスライスがネットワークによって許可されていない場合に送信される情報であってよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。
Furthermore, the twelfth identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the second identification information. Further, the thirteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the third identification information. Further, the eighteenth identification information may be information transmitted when the first identification information is received and / or when the network slice indicated by the first identification information is not permitted by the network. The decision by SMF_A230 as to which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment refusal message is not limited to this.
以上のように、コアネットワーク_B190はPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信することにより、UE_A10に適用する輻輳管理を通知する。尚、これにより、コアネットワーク_B190は、UE_A10に輻輳管理を適用すること、及び/又は、UE_A10に輻輳管理を実行することを示すこと、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理の種別を識別する情報、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理に対応するDNN及び/又はS-NSSAI等の輻輳管理の対象を識別する情報、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理に対応づけられたタイマーの値を通知してもよい。
As described above, the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management applied to UE_A10 by sending a PDU session establishment refusal message. It should be noted that this indicates that the core network_B190 applies congestion management to UE_A10 and / or performs congestion management to UE_A10, and / or information that identifies the type of congestion management to be applied. , And / or notify the information that identifies the target of congestion management such as DNN and / or S-NSSAI corresponding to the applied congestion management, and / or the value of the timer associated with the applied congestion management. May be good.
ここで、上述した各情報は、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報によって識別される情報であってよい。
Here, each of the above-mentioned information may be information identified by one or more identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
UE_A10が、SMF_A230から受信するPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージには、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の内、1又は複数の識別情報が含まれてよい。
The PDU session establishment refusal message received by UE_A10 from SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
次に、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、第4の処理を実施する(S1124)。また、UE_A10は、第4の処理を本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。
Next, UE_A10 performs the fourth process based on the reception of the PDU session establishment refusal message (S1124). In addition, UE_A10 may carry out the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure.
以下、第4の処理の第1の例について説明する。
Hereinafter, the first example of the fourth process will be described.
ここで、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が拒絶されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。
Here, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. .. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been rejected.
さらに、UE_A10が第14の識別情報及び第11の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、第14の識別情報が示す値を第1のタイマー値に設定する処理であってもよいし、タイマー値を設定した第1のタイマーを開始する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第11の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、第1から第11の挙動うち1以上の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。
Further, when UE_A10 receives the 14th identification information and the 11th identification information, the fourth process is the process in which UE_A10 sets the value indicated by the 14th identification information as the first timer value. Alternatively, it may be a process of starting the first timer for which a timer value is set. Further, when UE_A10 receives the eleventh identification information, the fourth process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
さらに、UE_A10が第18の識別情報及び第11の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、第18の識別情報に含まれるNWスライスを識別する情報と、第18の識別情報に含まれるネットワークスライス関連付けルール又はUE_A10があらかじめ保持し設定されているネットワークスライス関連付けルールに基づき、第12の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。
Further, when UE_A10 receives the 18th identification information and the 11th identification information, the fourth process is that the UE_A10 identifies the NW slice included in the 18th identification information and the 18th identification information. It may be a process of executing the twelfth behavior based on the network slice association rule included in the above or the network slice association rule held and set in advance by UE_A10.
さらに、UE_A10が複数の第14の識別情報及び第11の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10は、各第14の識別情報に含まれる複数の第1のタイマーと、UE_A10が保持するバックオフタイマーの優先管理ルールに基づいて、第13の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。
Further, when the UE_A10 receives the plurality of 14th identification information and the 11th identification information, the fourth process is that the UE_A10 has a plurality of first timers included in each of the 14th identification information, and the UE_A10 It may be a process of executing the thirteenth behavior based on the priority management rule of the backoff timer to be held.
さらに、UE_A10が複数の第14の識別情報及び第11の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10は、各第14の識別情報に含まれる複数の第1のタイマーに基づいて、第14の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。
Further, if the UE_A10 receives a plurality of 14th and 11th identification information, the fourth process is that the UE_A10 is based on the plurality of first timers contained in each of the 14th identification information. It may be a process for executing the 14th behavior.
ここで、第12から第15の挙動は、UE_A10内部のルール及び/又はポリシーに基づいて、UE_A10が主導して実行される輻輳管理であってもよい。具体的には、例えば、UE_A10は、UE_A10の内部の記憶部及び/又は制御部に、ポリシー(UE policy;UEポリシー)及び/又はルールと、ポリシー及び/又はルールの管理機能と、ポリシー及び/又はルールに基づいてUE_A10を動作させるポリシーエンフォーサーと、1又は複数のアプリケーションと、各アプリケーションからの要求に基づき確立又は確立を試行する1又は複数のPDUセッションを管理するためのセッションマネジメントインスタンス(セッションマネージャ)とを備えて構成されてもよく、これらに基づいて第4の処理として第12から第15の挙動のいずれかを実行することで、UE_A10が主導する輻輳管理を実現してもよい。ここで、ポリシー及び/又はルールは、ネットワークスライス関連付けルール、及び/又はバックオフタイマーの優先管理ルール、及び/又はNSSP(Network Slice Selection Policy)のいずれか1又は複数を含んでいてもよく、更に、これらは、UE_A10にあらかじめ設定されていてもよいし、ネットワークから受信したものであってもよい。また、ここで、ポリシーエンフォーサーは、NSSP enforcerであってもよい。また、ここで、アプリケーションは、アプリケーション層のプロトコルであってもよく、アプリケーション層のプロトコルからの要求に基づいてPDUセッションの確立又は確立を試行してもよい。また、ここで、セッションマネジメントインスタンスは、PDUセッション単位で動的に生成されるソフトウェア要素であってもよい。また、ここで、UE_A10の内部処理として、S-NSSAIをグルーピングしてもよいし、S-NSSAIのグルーピングに基づく処理を実行してもよい。尚、UE_A10の内部の構成及び処理は、これらに限らなくてもよく、各要素はソフトウェアで実現されていてもよいし、UE_A10内部でソフトウェア処理として実行されてもよい。
Here, the twelfth to fifteenth behaviors may be congestion management led by UE_A10 based on the rules and / or policies inside UE_A10. Specifically, for example, UE_A10 has a policy (UE policy; UE policy) and / or rule, a policy and / or rule management function, and a policy and / in the internal storage unit and / or control unit of UE_A10. Or a policy enforcer that runs UE_A10 based on rules, one or more applications, and a session management instance (session) for managing one or more PDU sessions that try to establish or establish based on requests from each application. It may be configured with a manager), and based on these, congestion management led by UE_A10 may be realized by executing any of the twelfth to fifteenth behaviors as the fourth process. Here, the policy and / or the rule may include any one or more of the network slice association rule, and / or the priority management rule of the backoff timer, and / or NSSP (Network Slice Selection Policy), and further. , These may be preset in UE_A10 or may have been received from the network. Further, here, the policy enforcer may be NSSP enforcer. Further, here, the application may be an application layer protocol, and may try to establish or establish a PDU session based on a request from the application layer protocol. Further, here, the session management instance may be a software element dynamically generated for each PDU session. Further, here, as the internal processing of UE_A10, S-NSSAI may be grouped, or processing based on the grouping of S-NSSAI may be executed. The internal configuration and processing of UE_A10 are not limited to these, and each element may be realized by software, or may be executed as software processing inside UE_A10.
さらに、UE_A10は、第4の処理において、又は第4の処理の完了に基づいてEPSに切り替えてもよく、第18の識別情報に含まれるDCN IDに基づきEPSでの位置登録を開始してもよい。尚、UE_A10のEPSへの切替えは、ハンドオーバー手続きに基づいてもよいし、UE_A10が主導するRAT切替えであってもよい。また、UE_A10は、DCN IDが含まれた第18の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理中又は第4の処理の完了後に、EPSへの切換えを実行してもよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may switch to EPS in the fourth process or based on the completion of the fourth process, or may start location registration in EPS based on the DCN ID contained in the 18th identification information. Good. The switching of UE_A10 to EPS may be based on the handover procedure, or may be RAT switching led by UE_A10. Further, when UE_A10 receives the 18th identification information including the DCN ID, it may execute switching to EPS during the 4th process or after the completion of the 4th process.
さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、一定期間後に再び本手続きを開始する処理であってもよいし、UE_A10の要求が限定又は制限された状態へ遷移する処理であってもよい。
Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 starts this procedure again after a certain period of time, or a process in which the request of UE_A10 transitions to a limited or restricted state.
なお、UE_A10は、第4の処理の完了に伴い、第1の状態に遷移してもよい。
Note that UE_A10 may transition to the first state when the fourth process is completed.
次に、第4の処理の第2の例について説明する。
Next, the second example of the fourth process will be described.
ここで、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。
Here, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. ..
さらに、第4の処理では、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報のうち一つ以上の識別情報に基づいて、輻輳管理を適用することを識別する処理を実行してもよい。
Further, in the fourth process, a process of identifying application of congestion management may be executed based on one or more of the identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
さらに、第4の処理では、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報のうち一つ以上の識別情報に基づいて、第1の輻輳管理から第4の輻輳管理の内、どの輻輳管理の種別を適用するかを識別する処理、及び、適用する輻輳管理に対応づけられるDNN及び/又はS-NSSAIを識別する処理を実行してもよい。より具体的には、本処理は第15の挙動で説明する処理であってよい。
Further, in the fourth process, which of the first to fourth congestion management types is used, based on one or more of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information. The process of identifying whether to apply and the process of identifying the DNN and / or S-NSSAI associated with the congestion management to be applied may be executed. More specifically, this process may be the process described in the fifteenth behavior.
さらに、第4の処理では、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報のうち一つ以上の識別情報に基づいて、適用する輻輳管理に対応づけられる第14の識別情報が示す第1のタイマーに設定する値を識別及び設定し、第1のタイマーのカウントを開始してもよい。より具体的には、本処理は第8の挙動で説明する処理であってよい。
Further, in the fourth process, the first timer indicated by the 14th identification information associated with the applied congestion management based on one or more of the 11th identification information to the 18th identification information. The value to be set in may be identified and set, and the count of the first timer may be started. More specifically, this process may be the process described in the eighth behavior.
さらに、第4の処理では、上述したいずれかの処理の開始又は完了に伴い、第1の挙動から第7の挙動のうち一つ以上を実行してもよい。
Further, in the fourth process, one or more of the first to seventh actions may be executed with the start or completion of any of the above-mentioned processes.
さらに、第4の処理では、上述したいずれかの処理の開始又は完了に伴い、第9の挙動から第15の挙動のうち一つ以上を実行してもよい。
Further, in the fourth process, one or more of the ninth to fifteenth actions may be executed with the start or completion of any of the above-mentioned processes.
なお、UE_A10は、第4の処理の完了に伴い、第1の状態に遷移してもよい。
Note that UE_A10 may transition to the first state when the fourth process is completed.
これまで、第4の処理に対し、第1の例と第2の例を用いて処理内容を説明してきたが、第4の処理のこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。例えば、第4の処理は、第1の例で説明した複数の詳細処理の内の一部と、第2の例で説明した複数の詳細処理の内の一部とを組み合わせた処理であってもよい。
So far, the processing contents have been explained using the first example and the second example for the fourth processing, but it is not limited to these processings of the fourth processing. For example, the fourth process is a process in which a part of the plurality of detailed processes described in the first example and a part of the plurality of detailed processes described in the second example are combined. May be good.
さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信することにより、あるいは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信しないことにより、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。各装置は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected by receiving the PDU session establishment rejection message or by not receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Each device completes the procedure (B) during this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the PDU session establishment refusal message.
各装置は、本手続き中の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションが確立された状態に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよいし、PDUセッションが確立されていない状態に遷移してもよいし、第1の状態に遷移してもよい。
Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) during this procedure. In addition, each device may transition to the state in which the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or based on the completion of the procedure (B) during this procedure. , You may recognize that this procedure has been rejected, you may transition to a state where the PDU session has not been established, or you may transition to the first state.
さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、第4の処理を実施してもよいし、第4の処理の完了後に第1の状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may carry out the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure, or may transition to the first state after the completion of the fourth process.
また、第3の条件判別は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第3の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第3の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第3の条件判別は、UE_A10の接続先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UE_A10が要求する機能を、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。さらに、第3の条件判別は、ネットワークが、輻輳状態であると判断した場合は真であってよく、輻輳状態ではないと判断した場合は偽であってよい。尚、第3の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Further, the third condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the third condition determination may be true if the network allows the request for UE_A10. Further, the third condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the request of UE_A10. Furthermore, the third condition determination may be true if the network to which UE_A10 is connected and / or the device in the network supports the function required by UE_A10, and false if it does not support it. Good. Further, the third condition determination may be true if the network determines that it is in a congested state, and may be false if it is determined that it is not in a congested state. The condition for determining the truth of the third condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
また、第2の条件判別は、PDUセッションのためのN4インターフェース上のセッションが確立されているか否かに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第2の条件判別は、PDUセッションのためのN4インターフェース上のセッションが、確立されている場合は真であってよく、確立されていない場合は偽であってよい。尚、第2の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Further, the second condition determination may be executed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established. For example, the second condition determination may be true if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established and false if it is not. The condition for determining the truth of the second condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
また、第11の条件判別は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第11の条件判別は、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することをネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第11の条件判別は、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することをネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第11の条件判別は、UE_A10の接続先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することを、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。さらに、第11の条件判別は、第61の識別情報を、受信した場合は真であってよく、受信しなかった場合は偽であってよい。言い換えると、第11の条件判別は、SM PDU DN Request Container等の情報、及び/又は複数の情報を含むコンテイナーを、受信した場合は真であってよく、受信しなかった場合は偽であってよい。尚、第11の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Further, the eleventh condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and / or the subscriber information included in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the operator policy. For example, the eleventh condition determination may be true if the network allows authentication and / or approval by DN_A5 to be performed during this procedure. In addition, the eleventh condition determination may be false if the network does not allow the authentication and / or approval by DN_A5 to be carried out during this procedure. In addition, the eleventh condition determination is true if the network to which UE_A10 is connected and / or devices within the network support that DN_A5 authentication and / or approval be performed during this procedure. If you don't support it, you can fake it. Further, the eleventh condition determination may be true if the 61st identification information is received, and may be false if it is not received. In other words, the eleventh condition determination may be true if a container containing information such as SM PDU DN Request Container and / or a plurality of information is received, and false if it is not received. Good. The condition for determining the truth of the eleventh condition determination does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned condition.
以上の手続きにおける、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの送受信により、コアネットワーク_B190はUE_A10に対して適用する輻輳管理を通知し、UE_A10は、コアネットワーク_B190の指示する輻輳管理を適用することができる。なお、コアネットワークB190及びUE_A10は、本手続きで説明した手続き及び処理を複数回実行することで、複数の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。尚、適用される各輻輳管理は、異なる輻輳管理の種別、及び/又は異なるDNNに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又は異なるS-NNSAIに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又はDNNとS-NSSAIの組み合わせに差異がある輻輳管理であってよい。
By sending and receiving the PDU session establishment refusal message in the above procedure, the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management to be applied to the UE_A10, and the UE_A10 can apply the congestion management instructed by the core network_B190. The core networks B190 and UE_A10 may apply a plurality of congestion managements by executing the procedures and processes described in this procedure a plurality of times. Note that each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
[1.3.3.ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要]
次に、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要について説明する。以下、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きは本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、確立されたPDUセッションに対してネットワークが主導して実行するセッションマネジメントの為の手続きである。尚、本手続きは、前述の登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きが完了し、各装置が第1の状態に遷移した後の任意のタイミングで実行してもよい。また、各装置は、本手続き中に輻輳管理を停止又は変更する為の識別情報を含んだメッセージを送受信してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいてネットワークが指示する新たな輻輳管理に基づく挙動を開始してもよい。 [1.3.3. Outline of network-led session management procedure]
Next, the outline of the network-led session management procedure will be described. Hereinafter, the network-led session management procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for session management that is executed by the network for the established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
次に、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要について説明する。以下、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きは本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、確立されたPDUセッションに対してネットワークが主導して実行するセッションマネジメントの為の手続きである。尚、本手続きは、前述の登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きが完了し、各装置が第1の状態に遷移した後の任意のタイミングで実行してもよい。また、各装置は、本手続き中に輻輳管理を停止又は変更する為の識別情報を含んだメッセージを送受信してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいてネットワークが指示する新たな輻輳管理に基づく挙動を開始してもよい。 [1.3.3. Outline of network-led session management procedure]
Next, the outline of the network-led session management procedure will be described. Hereinafter, the network-led session management procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for session management that is executed by the network for the established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
又、UE_A10は、本手続きによって送受信される制御情報を基に識別される輻輳管理の適用を停止してもよい。言い換えると、コアネットワーク_B190は、本手続きを主導すること、さらには本手続きの制御メッセージ及び制御情報をUE_A10に送信することより、これらの制御情報を用いて識別可能な輻輳管理の適用を停止するようUE_A10に通知することができる。
Also, UE_A10 may stop applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure. In other words, the core network_B190 stops applying congestion management that can be identified using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information of this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
尚、本手続きは、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション変更(PDUセッションモディフィケーション)手続き、及び/又はネットワーク主導のPDUセッション解放(PDUセッションリリース)手続き等であってもよいし、これらに限らないネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを実行してもよい。尚、各装置は、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション変更手続きにおいて、PDUセッション変更メッセージを送受信してもよいし、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション解放手続きにおいて、PDUセッション解放メッセージを送受信してもよい。
In addition, this procedure may be a network-led PDU session change (PDU session modification) procedure and / or a network-led PDU session release (PDU session release) procedure, etc., and is not limited to these. You may perform the session management procedure of. Each device may send and receive a PDU session change message in the network-led PDU session change procedure, and may send and receive a PDU session release message in the network-led PDU session release procedure.
[1.3.3.1.第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き例]
図12を用いて、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの例を説明する。本章では、本手続きとはネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.3.3.1. Example of first network-led session management procedure]
An example of a network-driven session management procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, this procedure refers to a network-led session management procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
図12を用いて、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの例を説明する。本章では、本手続きとはネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.3.3.1. Example of first network-led session management procedure]
An example of a network-driven session management procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, this procedure refers to a network-led session management procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
前述の通り、登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づき、第1の状態に遷移 (S1200)したUE_A10及びコアネットワーク_B190内の各装置は、任意のタイミングで、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを開始する。ここで、本手続きを開始するコアネットワーク_B190内の装置は、SMF_A及び/又はAMF_Aであってよく、UE_AはAMF_A及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_Bを介して本手続きにおけるメッセージを送受信してもよい。
As described above, each device in UE_A10 and core network_B190 that has transitioned to the first state (S1200) based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure is network-driven session management at any time. Start the procedure. Here, the device in the core network_B190 that initiates this procedure may be SMF_A and / or AMF_A, and UE_A may send and receive messages in this procedure via AMF_A and / or access network_B. ..
具体的には、コアネットワーク_B190内の装置が、UE_Aにネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを送信する(S1202)。ここでコアネットワーク_B190内の装置は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに第21の識別情報を含めてもよいし、この識別情報を含めることで、コアネットワーク_B190の要求を示してもよい。さらに、コアネットワーク_B190内の装置は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージにPDUセッションIDを含めてもよいし、PDUセッションIDを含めることで、PDUセッションIDで識別されるPDUセッションに対して変更を行うことを要求してもよい。
Specifically, the device in the core network_B190 sends a network-driven session management request message to UE_A (S1202). Here, the device in the core network_B190 may include the 21st identification information in the network-driven session management request message, or may indicate the request of the core network_B190 by including this identification information. .. In addition, the device in core network_B190 may include the PDU session ID in the network-driven session management request message, or by including the PDU session ID, it can be modified for the PDU session identified by the PDU session ID. May be required to do.
尚、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、確立しているPDUセッションのPDUセッションIDであってよい。さらに、本手続きが、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きに基づいて実行された場合、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、又はPDUセッション解放要求メッセージに含まれたPDUセッションIDと同一であってよい。
The PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message may be the PDU session ID of the established PDU session. Furthermore, when this procedure is executed based on the UE-led session management procedure, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU included in the PDU session change request message or the PDU session release request message. It may be the same as the session ID.
次に、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信したUE_Aは、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージを送信する(S1204)。さらに、UE_Aは、コアネットワーク_B190から受信した第21の識別情報に基づいて、第5の処理を実行し(S1206)、本手続きを完了してもよい。また、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて第5の処理を実施してもよい。
Next, UE_A, which receives the network-led session management request message, sends a network-led session management completion message (S1204). Further, UE_A may execute the fifth process (S1206) based on the 21st identification information received from the core network_B190, and complete this procedure. In addition, UE_A10 may carry out the fifth process based on the completion of this procedure.
ここで、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージにPDUセッションIDを含めてもよい。尚、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージに含まれるPDUセッションIDは、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに含まれたPDUセッションIDと同一であってよい。
Here, UE_A10 may include the PDU session ID in the network-led session management completion message. The PDU session ID included in the network-driven session management completion message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the network-driven session management request message.
以下、第5の処理の例について説明する。
The fifth processing example will be described below.
ここで、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、コアネットワーク_B190によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよいし、コアネットワーク_B190の要求を認識する処理であってもよい。さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。
Here, the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the core network_B190, or may be a process in which the request of the core network_B190 is recognized. Further, the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. ..
また、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求で送受信されるメッセージは、PDUセッション変更コマンド(PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND)であってもよいし、PDUセッション解放コマンド(PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND)であってもよいし、これらに限らない。
Further, the message sent / received by the network-driven session management request may be a PDU session change command (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND), a PDU session release command (PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND), or these. Not limited to.
尚、UE_A10は、第5の処理において、受信した第21の識別情報に基づいて、UE_A10が適用する輻輳管理識別処理を行ってもよい。ここで、輻輳管理識別処理は第17の挙動であってよい。
Note that the UE_A10 may perform the congestion management identification process applied by the UE_A10 based on the received 21st identification information in the fifth process. Here, the congestion management identification process may be the 17th behavior.
更に、UE_A10は、第21の識別情報を受信した場合、第5の処理は、第16の挙動であってもよい。具体的には、例えば、前述の第4の処理に基づいて実行している一又は複数のタイマーを停止する処理であってもよい。
Furthermore, when UE_A10 receives the 21st identification information, the 5th process may be the 16th behavior. Specifically, for example, it may be a process of stopping one or a plurality of timers executed based on the above-mentioned fourth process.
言い換えると、第21の識別情報を受信したUE_A10は、第17の挙動を実行することで、ネットワークから指示された停止又は変更を行う輻輳管理を識別し、続いて、第16の挙動を実行することで、識別した輻輳管理の停止又は変更を実施する。
In other words, the UE_A10 that received the 21st identification information identifies the congestion management that makes the stop or change instructed by the network by executing the 17th action, and then executes the 16th action. By doing so, the identified congestion management is stopped or changed.
さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、第5の処理を実施してもよいし、第5の処理の完了後に本手続きを完了してもよい。
Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted / received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may carry out the fifth process based on the completion of this procedure, or may complete this procedure after the completion of the fifth process.
以上の手続きにおいて、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの送受信により、コアネットワーク_B190は、UE_A10に対して、UE_A10が既に適用している輻輳管理の停止又は変更を指示することができる。更にUE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに基づいて、UE_A10が適用している輻輳管理の停止又は変更を実施することができる。ここで、UE_A10が1以上の輻輳管理を適用している場合、コアネットワーク_B190からのネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報の受信に基づき、停止又は変更を実施する輻輳管理を識別してもよい。尚、適用される各輻輳管理は、異なる輻輳管理の種別、及び/又は異なるDNNに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又は異なるS-NNSAIに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又はDNNとS-NSSAIの組み合わせに差異がある輻輳管理であってよい。
In the above procedure, by sending and receiving a network-led session management request message, the core network_B190 can instruct UE_A10 to stop or change the congestion management that UE_A10 has already applied. In addition, UE_A10 can suspend or change the congestion management applied by UE_A10 based on the network-driven session management request message. Here, when UE_A10 applies one or more congestion management, the congestion management that implements the stop or change is identified based on the reception of the identification information contained in the network-driven session management request message from the core network_B190. You may. Note that each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
さらに、各装置は、上述した処理の完了、及び/又は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを完了する。
Further, each device performs a first network-driven session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or transmission / reception of a network-driven session management request message and / or a network-driven session management completion message. Complete.
さらに、UE_A10は、第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the first network-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the transmission and reception of the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management completion message.
[1.3.3.2.第2のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き例]
1.3.3.1章で説明した第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き例では、UE_A10に対して適用されている輻輳管理が、第1から第4の輻輳管理のどの輻輳管理であるかに関わらず、手続きの中で輻輳管理を停止する例を説明した。 [1.3.3.2. Example of second network-led session management procedure]
In the first network-driven session management procedure example described in Section 1.3.3.1, the congestion management applied to UE_A10 is regardless of which of the first to fourth congestion managements. An example of stopping congestion management in the procedure was explained.
1.3.3.1章で説明した第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き例では、UE_A10に対して適用されている輻輳管理が、第1から第4の輻輳管理のどの輻輳管理であるかに関わらず、手続きの中で輻輳管理を停止する例を説明した。 [1.3.3.2. Example of second network-led session management procedure]
In the first network-driven session management procedure example described in Section 1.3.3.1, the congestion management applied to UE_A10 is regardless of which of the first to fourth congestion managements. An example of stopping congestion management in the procedure was explained.
それに限らず、1.3.3.1章で説明した第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き例で説明した手続きは、輻輳管理に応じて実行される手続きであってよい。例えば、UE_A10が適用する1又は複数の輻輳管理の内、第1の輻輳管理と、第3の輻輳管理と、第4の輻輳管理に分類される輻輳管理に対して実行される手続きであってよい。
Not limited to that, the procedure explained in the first network-driven session management procedure example explained in Chapter 1.3.3.1 may be a procedure executed according to congestion management. For example, among one or more congestion managements applied by UE_A10, it is a procedure executed for congestion management classified into the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the fourth congestion management. Good.
言い換えと、UE_A10は、第5の処理によって第1の輻輳管理と、第3の輻輳管理と、第4の輻輳管理に対応する輻輳管理を停止してもよい。
In other words, UE_A10 may stop the first congestion management, the third congestion management, and the congestion management corresponding to the fourth congestion management by the fifth process.
第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行中に、もし、UE_10が第2の輻輳管理に対するネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合には、UE_A10は、第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたバックオフタイマーを停止することなくコアネットワーク_B190に対して応答もよい。
If UE_10 receives a network-driven session management request message for the second congestion management while executing the count of the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management, the UE_A10 will be the second. It is also possible to respond to the core network_B190 without stopping the backoff timer associated with congestion management.
言い換えると、S-NSSAI#Aに対応付けられたバックオフタイマーのカウントの実行中において、UE_A10が、輻輳しているS-NSSAI#Aと任意のDNNに対するネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合には、UE_A10はS-NSSAI#Aに対応づけられたバックオフタイマーを停止することなくコアネットワーク_B190に対して応答もよい。
In other words, UE_A10 received a network-driven session management request message for congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN while the backoff timer count associated with S-NSSAI # A was running. In some cases, UE_A10 may also respond to core network_B190 without stopping the backoff timer associated with S-NSSAI # A.
このように、第2の輻輳管理に対しては、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの受信において、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージはコアネットワーク_B190に送信するが、輻輳管理を継続してもよい。したがって、第2の輻輳管理によって規制されるUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの送信は抑止された状態が継続されてよい。
Thus, for the second congestion management, in receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190, but congestion management. May continue. Therefore, the transmission of UE-led session management request messages regulated by the second congestion management may continue to be suppressed.
ここで、前述したとおり、本手続きにおけるネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージは、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション変更(PDUセッションモディフィケーション)手続きにおけるPDUセッション変更コマンド(PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND)メッセージであってもよいし、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション解放手続きにおけるPDUセッション解放コマンド(PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND)メッセージであってよい。
Here, as described above, the network-driven session management request message in this procedure may be a PDU session change command (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND) message in the network-driven PDU session modification (PDU session modification) procedure. However, it may be a PDU session release command (PDU SESSION RELEASE COMMAND) message in the network-driven PDU session release procedure.
さらに、前述したとおり、本手続きにおけるネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージは、PDUセッションIDを含んでもよい。さらに、前記PDUセッションIDは、1.3.3.1章で説明した第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きで説明したPDUセッションIDと同様であってよい。
Furthermore, as described above, the network-driven session management request message in this procedure may include the PDU session ID. Further, the PDU session ID may be the same as the PDU session ID described in the first network-driven session management procedure described in Section 1.3.3.1.
さらに、前述したとおり、本手続きにおけるPDUセッション変更コマンドメッセージに対して応答するネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージは、PDUセッション変更完了メッセージ(PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE)であってよく、PDUセッション解放コマンドメッセージに対して応答するネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージは、PDUセッション解放完了メッセージ(PDU SESSION RELEASE COMPLETE)であってよい。また、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージがPDUセッション変更コマンド及び/又はPDUセッション解放メッセージであった場合、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190は、上述した処理に加え、以下に説明するさらに詳細な処理を実行するよう設定されてもよい。
Further, as described above, the network-led session management completion message that responds to the PDU session change command message in this procedure may be a PDU session change completion message (PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE), and may be a PDU session release command message. The network-led session management completion message that responds to the response may be a PDU session release completion message (PDU SESSION RELEASE COMPLETE). If the network-driven session management request message is a PDU session change command and / or a PDU session release message, UE_A10 and core network_B190 perform more detailed processing described below in addition to the processing described above. May be set to.
さらに、前述したとおり、本手続きにおけるネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージは、PDUセッションIDを含んでもよい。さらに、前記PDUセッションIDは、1.3.3.1章で説明した第1のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きで説明したPDUセッションIDと同様であってよい。
Furthermore, as described above, the network-led session management completion message in this procedure may include the PDU session ID. Further, the PDU session ID may be the same as the PDU session ID described in the first network-driven session management procedure described in Section 1.3.3.1.
例えば、コアネットワーク_B190はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報を含めて送信した場合、以下のように処理を実行してもよい。なお、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報は、アクティベーションを要求することを示す情報であり、具体的な例としては、5Gセッションマネジメント理由値#39 (5GSM Cause #39)であってよい。
For example, when the core network_B190 sends a network-led session management request message including information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required), the process may be executed as follows. The information indicating the reactivation request (Reactivation Required) is the information indicating that the activation is requested, and a specific example is the 5G session management reason value # 39 (5GSM Cause # 39). Good.
以下、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第1の処理及び手続き例を説明する。
The first process and procedure example when the information indicating the reactivation request is received will be described below.
UE_A10は、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報が含まれたネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了後直ちにUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きを再度主導するのではなく、輻輳管理の解除を待ってUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きを再度主導する。ここで、このUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きは、変更又は解放されるPDUセッションを確立した際のUE主導のPDU確立手続きで提供されたPDUセッションタイプ、SSCモード、DNN及びS-NSSAIに対するUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
When UE_A10 receives a network-driven session management request message containing information indicating a reactivation request, it re-leads the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure immediately after completing the network-driven session management procedure. Instead, wait for congestion management to be released and re-lead the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure. Here, this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session. PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
なお、輻輳管理の解除を待つとは、第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマーが満了(Expire)した後に実行することであってよい。言い換えると、第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマーのカウントの完了後、及び/又は第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマー値がゼロになった後に実行することであってよい。
Note that waiting for the release of congestion management may be executed after the timer associated with the second congestion management has expired. In other words, it may be executed after the timer value associated with the second congestion management is completed and / or after the timer value associated with the second congestion management becomes zero.
さらに、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージに、以下の補足情報を含めてもよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may include the following supplementary information in the network-led session management completion message.
補足情報は、タイマーの満了待ちであることを示す情報、及び/又は、残タイマー値を示す情報であってよい。ここでタイマーは、第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマーであってよい。また、タイマーの満了待ちとは、タイマーの満了(Expire)した後に実行することであってよい。言い換えると、第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマーのカウントの完了後、及び/又は第2の輻輳管理に対応付けられたタイマー値がゼロになった後に実行することであってよい。
The supplementary information may be information indicating that the timer is waiting to expire and / or information indicating the remaining timer value. Here, the timer may be a timer associated with the second congestion management. Further, waiting for the expiration of the timer may be executed after the timer has expired (Expire). In other words, it may be executed after the timer value associated with the second congestion management is completed and / or after the timer value associated with the second congestion management becomes zero.
なお、コアネットワークB_190は、補足情報が含まれたネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージを受信し、残タイマーの値を認識してもよい。さらに、残タイマーが示す値の時間が経過したのちにUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きが主導されることを認識してもよい。
Note that the core network B_190 may receive a network-led session management completion message containing supplementary information and recognize the value of the remaining timer. Furthermore, it may be recognized that the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure is led after the time indicated by the remaining timer has elapsed.
ここで、コアネットワーク_B190が認識する残タイマーは、受信した補足情報が示す値であってもよいし、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージのUE_A10の送信時間とコアネットワーク_B190の受信時間のオフセットを、受信した補足情報が示す値に対して考慮した値であってもよい。
Here, the remaining timer recognized by the core network_B190 may be the value indicated by the received supplementary information, or the offset between the transmission time of UE_A10 and the reception time of the core network_B190 of the network-led session management completion message. May be a value in consideration of the value indicated by the received supplementary information.
また、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第1の処理及び手続き例に限らず、以下のように、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第2の処理及び手続き例が実行されてもよい。
In addition, the first process and procedure example when the information indicating the reactivation request is received is not limited to the second process and procedure example when the information indicating the reactivation request is received as follows. It may be executed.
これまで説明したように、第2の輻輳管理に対しては、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの受信において、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージはコアネットワーク_B190に送信するが、輻輳管理を継続してもよい。したがって、第2の輻輳管理によって規制されるUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの送信は抑止された状態が継続されているが、UE_A10及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190は、UE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きを再度主導することに限り、許容されるよう設定されてもよい。
As described above, for the second congestion management, in receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190. , Congestion management may be continued. Therefore, while the transmission of UE-led session management request messages regulated by the second congestion management continues to be suppressed, UE_A10 and / or core network_B190 goes through the UE-led PDU session establishment procedure. It may be set to be acceptable as long as it leads again.
言い換えると、UE_A10は、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報が含まれたネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合、ネットワーク主導のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了後UE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きを再度主導する。ここで、このUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きは、変更又は解放されるPDUセッションを確立した際のUE主導のPDU確立手続きで提供されたPDUセッションタイプ、SSCモード、DNN及びS-NSSAIに対するUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In other words, if UE_A10 receives a network-driven session management request message that contains information indicating a reactivation request, the UE_A10 will have a UE-led PDU session after the network-driven network-driven session management procedure is complete. Lead the establishment procedure again. Here, this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session. PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
なお、UE_A10は、輻輳管理の適用が継続している間、UE_A10及びコアネットワーク B190はこの例外として許容された手続きは実行して完了してもよいが、UE_A10は第2の輻輳管理によって抑止されるその他のUE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの主導は抑止されてよい。
For UE_A10, while the application of congestion management continues, UE_A10 and core network B190 may execute and complete the procedures allowed as an exception to this exception, but UE_A10 is suppressed by the second congestion management. Other UE-led session management procedures may be deterred.
また、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第1及び第2の処理及び手続き例に限らず、以下のように、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第3の処理及び手続き例が実行されてもよい。
In addition, the process is not limited to the first and second processes and procedure examples when the information indicating the reactivation request is received, and the third process and the procedure when the information indicating the reactivation request is received are as follows. A procedure example may be executed.
これまで説明したように、第2の輻輳管理に対しては、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの受信において、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージはコアネットワーク_B190に送信する。さらに、UE_A10は、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報が含まれたネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合には、第2の輻輳管理の適用を停止してもよい。
As explained so far, for the second congestion management, when receiving the network-driven session management request message, UE_A10 sends the response message to the network-driven session management request message to the core network_B190. In addition, UE_A10 may stop applying the second congestion management when it receives a network-driven session management request message that contains information indicating a reactivation request.
言い換えると、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージに再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報が含まれていない場合には、輻輳管理を継続してもよい。この場合、第2の輻輳管理によって規制されるUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージの送信は抑止された状態が継続されてよい。
In other words, UE_A10 may continue congestion management if the network-driven session management request message does not contain information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required). In this case, the transmission of the UE-led session management request message regulated by the second congestion management may continue to be suppressed.
したがって、UE_A10は、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報が含まれたネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを受信した場合、ネットワーク主導のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了後UE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きを再度主導する。ここで、このUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きは、変更又は解放されるPDUセッションを確立した際のUE主導のPDU確立手続きで提供されたPDUセッションタイプ、SSCモード、DNN及びS-NSSAIに対するUE主導のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Therefore, when UE_A10 receives a network-driven session management request message containing information indicating a reactivation request, the UE_A10 establishes a UE-led PDU session after the network-driven network-driven session management procedure is completed. Lead the procedure again. Here, this UE-driven PDU session establishment procedure is UE-driven for the PDU session type, SSC mode, DNN and S-NSSAI provided in the UE-driven PDU establishment procedure when establishing a modified or released PDU session. PDU session establishment procedure may be used.
また、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第1、第2、第3の処理及び手続き例に限らず、以下のように、再アクティベーション要求を示す情報はコアネットワーク_B190によって送信されないよう設定されてもよい。
In addition, not limited to the first, second, and third processing and procedure examples when the information indicating the reactivation request is received, the information indicating the reactivation request is transmitted by the core network_B190 as shown below. It may be set not to be performed.
より具体的には、コアネットワーク_B190は、輻輳管理を適用しているUE_A10に対して、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを送信する場合、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報を含むことを抑止するよう設定されてよい。
More specifically, the core network_B190 should include information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required) when sending a network-driven session management request message to UE_A10 to which congestion management is applied. It may be set to suppress.
もしくは、コアネットワーク_B190は、第2の輻輳管理を適用しているUE_A10に対して、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージを送信する場合、再アクティベーション要求(Reactivation Required)を示す情報を含むことを抑止するよう設定されてもよい。
Alternatively, the core network_B190 suppresses the inclusion of information indicating a reactivation request (Reactivation Required) when sending a network-driven session management request message to UE_A10 to which the second congestion management is applied. May be set to.
以上、UE_A10とコアネットワーク B190の処理及び手続きを説明してきたが、本章において説明をしてきたコアネットワーク_B190の処理は、より具体的には、コアネットワーク_B190内の装置である、SMF_A230及び/又はAMF_A240などの制御装置で実行される処理であってよい。したがって、コアネットワーク B190が制御メッセージを送受信するとは、コアネットワーク_B190内の装置である、SMF_A230及び/又はAMF_A240などの制御装置が制御メッセージを送受信することであってよい。
The processing and procedures of UE_A10 and core network B190 have been explained above, but the processing of core network_B190 described in this chapter is more specifically the devices in core network_B190, SMF_A230 and /. Alternatively, it may be a process executed by a control device such as AMF_A240. Therefore, when the core network B190 sends and receives a control message, it may mean that a control device such as SMF_A230 and / or AMF_A240, which is a device in the core network_B190, sends and receives a control message.
さらに、本章に限らず、輻輳管理に対しては適用を解除する、又は輻輳管理を停止するとは、輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーを停止する処理を含んでよく、輻輳管理に対しては適用を継続する、又は輻輳管理を継続するとは、輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを継続することを含んでもよい。
Furthermore, not limited to this chapter, canceling the application to congestion management or stopping congestion management may include a process of stopping the backoff timer associated with congestion management, and for congestion management. Continuing application, or continuing congestion management, may include continuing counting of backoff timers associated with congestion management.
また、本章で説明した再アクティベーション要求を示す情報を受信した際の第1、第2、第3の処理及び手続き例において、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きは、UE_A10が、輻輳しているS-NSSAI#Aと任意のDNNに対するものであると説明してきた。
In addition, in the first, second, and third processing and procedure examples when the information indicating the reactivation request explained in this chapter is received, the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management procedure Has explained that UE_A10 is for congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN.
言い換えると、この輻輳しているS-NSSAI#A及び任意のDNNは、本章のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きが対象とするPDUセッションに関連付けられたS-NSSAI#A及び任意のDNNであってよい。
In other words, this congested S-NSSAI # A and any DNN are associated with the network-driven session management request messages in this chapter and / or the PDU session targeted by the network-driven session management procedure. It can be NSSAI # A and any DNN.
なお、UE_A10及びコアネットワーク_B190は、本章の手続きが含まれるSSCモード2のアンカーリロケーション手続きを実行し、PDUセッションのアンカー、もしくはアンカーの異なるPDUセッションに切り替えて通信を継続してもよい。ここで、SSCモード2のアンカーリロケーション手続きはコアネットワーク_B190が主導して開始する手続きであり、この手続き内で実行するPDUセッション解放コマンドの送信に伴う手続きが、本章で説明したいずれかの手続きであってよい。
Note that UE_A10 and core network_B190 may execute the anchor relocation procedure of SSC mode 2 including the procedure of this chapter, and switch to the anchor of the PDU session or the PDU session with a different anchor to continue the communication. Here, the anchor relocation procedure in SSC mode 2 is a procedure initiated by the core network_B190, and the procedure associated with the transmission of the PDU session release command executed within this procedure is one of the procedures described in this chapter. May be.
また、UE_A10及びコアネットワーク_B190は、本章の手続きが含まれるSSCモード3のアンカーリロケーション手続きを実行し、PDUセッションのアンカー、もしくはアンカーの異なるPDUセッションに切り替えて通信を継続してもよい。ここで、SSCモード3のアンカーリロケーション手続きはコアネットワーク_B190が主導して開始する手続きであり、この手続き内で実行するPDUセッション変更コマンドの送信に伴う手続きが、本章で説明したいずれかの手続きであってよい。
In addition, UE_A10 and core network_B190 may execute the anchor relocation procedure of SSC mode 3 including the procedure of this chapter, and switch to the anchor of the PDU session or the PDU session with a different anchor to continue the communication. Here, the anchor relocation procedure in SSC mode 3 is a procedure initiated by the core network_B190, and the procedure associated with the transmission of the PDU session change command executed within this procedure is one of the procedures described in this chapter. May be.
次に、輻輳管理が適用されている状態において、UEがPLMNの変更を伴う移動をした場合の処理について説明する。
Next, the processing when the UE moves with the change of PLMN while the congestion management is applied will be described.
ここでは、特に第1の輻輳管理が適用されている状態において、UE_A10がPLMNを変更した場合の処理について説明する。ここで、第1の輻輳管理、及び第1の輻輳管理が適用された際に規制される処理については既に説明した通りであってよい。
Here, the processing when UE_A10 changes the PLMN will be described, especially when the first congestion management is applied. Here, the first congestion management and the processing regulated when the first congestion management is applied may be as described above.
繰り返すと、第1の輻輳管理は、DNNベースの輻輳管理であってよい。例えば、第1の輻輳管理は、DNN#Aを用いたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求をNWがUE_A10から受信し、NWにおいて、特定のDNN、例えばDNN#Aに対しての輻輳が検知された場合、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求をリジェクトするメッセージを基に、NWがUE_A10に対して適用する輻輳管理であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理の適用においては、UE_A10は、NWから受信した第1の輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーのカウントを開始し、バックオフタイマーが満了するまでの間、DNN#Aを用いたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求の送信を行わないよう設定されてよい。なお、DNNを用いるとは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージなどのUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNN情報を含めることであってよい。
Repeatedly, the first congestion management may be DNN-based congestion management. For example, in the first congestion management, when the NW receives a UE-led session management request using DNN # A from UE_A10 and the NW detects congestion for a specific DNN, for example, DNN # A. , It may be congestion management applied by NW to UE_A10 based on the message rejecting the UE-led session management request. In this case, in applying the first congestion management, UE_A10 starts counting the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management received from the NW, and DNN # A until the backoff timer expires. It may be set not to send UE-led session management requests using. Note that using DNN may mean including DNN information in a UE-led session management request such as a PDU session establishment request message.
ここでは、説明のためにこうした第1の輻輳管理を、”特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理”と表現する。
Here, for the sake of explanation, such first congestion management is referred to as "first congestion management for a specific DNN".
また、第1の輻輳管理では、NWは、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNN情報が含まれていない場合でも、NW主導でデフォルトDNNを選定し、輻輳管理対象としてもよい。言い換えると、第1の輻輳管理は、DNN情報を用いないUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求をNWがUE_A10から受信し、NWにおいてデフォルトのDNNに対しての輻輳が検知された場合、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を拒絶するメッセージを基に、NWがUE_A10に対して適用する輻輳管理であってよい。この場合、第1の輻輳管理の適用においては、UE_A10は、NWから受信した第1の輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーのカウントを開始し、バックオフタイマーが満了するまでの間、DNNを用いないUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求の送信を行わないよう設定されてよい。なお、DNNを用いないとは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージなどのUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求にDNN情報を含まないことであってよい。
Further, in the first congestion management, the NW may select the default DNN led by the NW and set it as the congestion management target even if the UE-led session management request does not include the DNN information. In other words, the first congestion management is UE-driven session management when the NW receives a UE-driven session management request without DNN information from UE_A10 and the NW detects congestion for the default DNN. It may be the congestion management that the NW applies to UE_A10 based on the message rejecting the request. In this case, in applying the first congestion management, UE_A10 starts counting the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management received from the NW and uses the DNN until the backoff timer expires. It may be configured not to send UE-led session management requests. Note that not using DNN may mean that DNN information is not included in the UE-led session management request such as the PDU session establishment request message.
ここでは、説明のためにこうしたデフォルトDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理は、DNN情報を用いないUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求を基に適用されることから、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理と区別するために、”No DNNに対する輻輳管理“と表現する。さらに、DNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージなどのUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求は、No DNNを用いたUE主導のセッションマネジメント要求と表現する。例えば、No DNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージとは、DNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージである。
Here, for the sake of explanation, the first congestion management for the default DNN is distinguished from the first congestion management for a specific DNN because it is applied based on the UE-led session management request that does not use the DNN information. Therefore, it is expressed as "congestion management for No DNN". Furthermore, a UE-led session management request such as a PDU session establishment request message that does not use DNN is expressed as a UE-led session management request that uses No DNN. For example, the PDU session establishment request message using No DNN is a PDU session establishment request message not using DNN.
UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定のDNNを用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN in the PLMN change, or the back associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN. If the off-timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN to be able to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
ここで、UE_A10は、カウントしていたバックオフタイマーを停止せず、タイマーが満了するまでカウントを継続してもよい。或は、UE_A10は、ディアクティベートされていたバックオフタイマーを、ディアクティベートされた状態のまま保持し続けてよい。
Here, UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
このように、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理はPLMNに対応づけられたものであってよい。
In this way, the first congestion management for a specific DNN may be associated with the PLMN.
例えば、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理が適用される場合、UEは、バックオフタイマーをPLMNと特定のDNNに関連付けてカウントを開始し、バックオフタイマーがゼロ又はディアクティベートで無い場合、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けた特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施しない。また、バックオフタイマーがディアクティベートの場合、端末の電源がOFFとなるか、USIMが取りだされるまで、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けた特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施しない。また、バックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けた特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施してもよい。
For example, if the first congestion management for a particular DNN is applied, the UE will start counting by associating the backoff timer with the PLMN and the particular DNN and back if the backoff timer is not zero or deactivated. The PLMN associated with the off-timer does not establish a PDU session using the specific DNN associated with the back-off timer. Also, if the backoff timer is deactivated, the PDU using the specific DNN associated with the backoff timer in the PLMN associated with the backoff timer until the terminal is turned off or the USIM is taken out. Do not establish a session. Further, when the backoff timer is zero, the PLMN associated with the backoff timer may establish a PDU session using a specific DNN associated with the backoff timer.
言い換えると、UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、特定のDNNと変更前のPLMNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定のDNNと変更前のPLMNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、特定のDNNと変更後のPLMNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っていない場合、且つ、特定のDNNと変更後のPLMNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定のDNNを用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
In other words, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the specific DNN and the PLMN before the change, or when the specific DNN and the PLMN before the change are counted. If the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the PLMN is deactivated, then the count of the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the specific DNN and the modified PLMN If you have not done so and the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for the particular DNN and the modified PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be in this particular PLMN in the new PLMN. It may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message using the DNN. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message with this particular DNN based on this setting.
UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN in the PLMN change, or the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured to send PDU session establishment request messages without DNN in the new PLMN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
ここで、UE_A10は、カウントしていたバックオフタイマーを停止せず、タイマーが満了するまでカウントを継続してもよい。或は、UE_A10は、ディアクティベートされていたバックオフタイマーを、ディアクティベートされた状態のまま保持し続けてよい。
Here, UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
このように、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理はPLMNに対応づけられたものであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10はDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
In this way, the first congestion management for NoDNN may be associated with PLMN. In other words, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN, which is associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change. When the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN is deactivated, the count of the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the modified PLMN. If the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be PDUped in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send session establishment request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
上述したように、UE_A10は、第1の輻輳管理が特定のDNNに対するものかNo DNNに対するものかに関わらず、同様の処理を行ってもよい。
As described above, UE_A10 may perform the same processing regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN.
つまり、UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNに対応づけられた輻輳管理によって規制されていた、特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又はDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。
That is, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, it counts the backoff timer of the first congestion management associated with the PLMN before the change, or the first PLMN associated with the change. When the congestion management backoff timer is deactivated, the first congestion management backoff timer associated with the changed PLMN is not counted, and the changed PLMN is used. If the associated first congestion management backoff timer is not deactivated, the UE_A10 will be regulated by the congestion management associated with the old PLMN in the new PLMN, the specific DNN. It may be configured to be able to send a PDU session establishment request message using the and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using the DNN.
或は、UE_A10は、第1の輻輳管理が特定のDNNに対するものかNo DNNに対するものかによって異なる処理を実行してもよい。
Alternatively, UE_A10 may execute different processing depending on whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN.
UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定のDNNを用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN in the PLMN change, or the back associated with the first congestion management for a specific DNN. If the off-timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN.
ここで、UE_A10は、カウントしていたバックオフタイマーを停止せず、タイマーが満了するまでカウントを継続してもよい。或は、UE_A10は、ディアクティベートされていたバックオフタイマーを、ディアクティベートされた状態のまま保持し続けてよい。
Here, UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
このように、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理は異なるPLMNにおいても適用されてよい。
Thus, the first congestion management for a particular DNN may be applied to different PLMNs.
一方で、UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
On the other hand, UE_A10 is associated with the count of the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN in the change of PLMN, or is associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured to send PDU session establishment request messages without DNN in the new PLMN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using this particular DNN.
ここで、UE_A10は、カウントしていたバックオフタイマーを停止せず、タイマーが満了するまでカウントを継続してもよい。或は、UE_A10は、ディアクティベートされていたバックオフタイマーを、ディアクティベートされた状態のまま保持し続けてよい。
Here, UE_A10 may continue counting until the timer expires without stopping the backoff timer that was counting. Alternatively, UE_A10 may continue to keep the deactivated backoff timer in the deactivated state.
このように、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理はPLMNに対応づけられたものであってよい。
In this way, the first congestion management for NoDNN may be associated with PLMN.
例えば、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理が適用される場合、UEは、バックオフタイマーをPLMNとNo DNNに関連付けてカウントを開始し、バックオフタイマーがゼロ又はディアクティベートで無い場合、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたNo DNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施しない。また、バックオフタイマーがディアクティベートの場合、端末の電源がOFFとなるか、USIMが取りだされるまで、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたNo DNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施しない。また、バックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたPLMNにおいて、バックオフタイマーに関連付けたNo DNNを用いたPDUセッション確立を実施してもよい。
For example, if the first congestion management for NoDNN is applied, the UE will start counting by associating the backoff timer with PLMN and NoDNN, and if the backoff timer is not zero or deactivated, the backoff timer In the PLMN associated with, do not establish a PDU session using the No DNN associated with the backoff timer. Also, if the backoff timer is deactivated, the PLMN associated with the backoff timer will have a PDU session using the NoDNN associated with the backoff timer until the terminal is turned off or the USIM is taken out. Do not establish. When the backoff timer is zero, the PLMN associated with the backoff timer may establish a PDU session using the No DNN associated with the backoff timer.
言い換えると、UE_A10は、PLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10はDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
In other words, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN, which is associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change. When the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN is deactivated, the count of the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the modified PLMN. If the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will be PDUped in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send session establishment request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
ここで、上述したPLMNの変更に伴う処理として、第1の輻輳管理が特定のDNNに対するものかNo DNNに対するものかに関わらず同様の処理を行うか、異なる処理を行うかは、予めUE_A10に設定された情報を基に設定されてよいが、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであるか否かによって決定されてもよい。例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが、変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNではない場合には、同様の処理が適用されてもよい。また、変更後の第2のPLMNが、変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNである場合には、異なる処理が実行されてよい。
Here, as the processing associated with the above-mentioned PLMN change, whether the same processing or different processing is performed regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN is determined in advance in UE_A10. It may be set based on the set information, but it may be determined by whether or not the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change. For example, if the second PLMN after the change is not an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, the same processing may be applied. Further, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, different processing may be executed.
さらに、UE_A10は、均等PLMNであるか否かだけでなく、更なる詳細条件を基に挙動を決定してもよい。例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合と、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更を伴う場合とで、UE_A10は異なる挙動が実行されるよう設定されてよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may determine its behavior based not only on whether or not it is an equal PLMN, but also on the basis of further detailed conditions. For example, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change, and when the second PLMN after the change is changed. UE_A10 may be set to perform different behavior depending on whether it is an equal PLMN with respect to the previous first PLMN and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
なお、各場合において実行されるUE_A10の挙動は、これまで説明したPLMN変更時の挙動のうちの一つであってよい。
The behavior of UE_A10 executed in each case may be one of the behaviors at the time of PLMN change described so far.
例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定のDNNを用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
For example, the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. In these PLMN changes, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN, or is associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular DNN.
また、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
Further, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN, or backoff associated with the first congestion management for NoDNN. If the timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send a PDU session establishment request message without a DNN. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages without using DNN.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、DNNを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10はDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for NoDNN associated with the PLMN before the change, or is associated with the PLMN before the change. , When the first congestion management backoff timer for NoDNN is deactivated, the first congestion management backoff timer for NoDNN associated with the changed PLMN is further counted. If not, and the first congestion management backoff timer for the No DNN associated with the PLMN has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 will establish a PDU session in the new PLMN without the DNN. It may be configured to send request messages. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without DNN based on this setting.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. UE_A10 is associated with the PLMN before the change when counting the backoff timer of the first congestion management for a specific DNN associated with the PLMN before the change in such a PLMN change. In addition, when the first congestion management backoff timer for a specific DNN is deactivated, the first congestion management backoff timer for the specific DNN associated with the modified PLMN is also If the count is not done and the first congestion management backoff timer for the particular DNN associated with the PLMN is not deactivated, the UE_A10 will generate the particular DNN in the new PLMN. It may be configured to send the PDU session establishment request message used. In addition, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message with a particular DNN based on this setting.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第3の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定のDNN、及び/又はNo DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応付けられたバックオフタイマーを停止してもよい。これにより、UE_A10は、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は特定のDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定のDNNを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は特定のDNNを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a third example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with the first congestion management for a particular DNN and / or NoDNN in these PLMN changes. Thereby, UE_A10 may be set so that UE_A10 can send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific DNN and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific DNN in the new PLMN. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific DNN and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific DNN.
また、第1の輻輳管理が特定のDNNに対するものかNo DNNに対するものかに関わらず同様の処理を行うか、異なる処理を行うかは、予めUE_A10に設定された情報を基に設定されてよいが、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであるか否かによって決定されてもよいと前述したが、第1の輻輳管理に関わらず、第2~第4の輻輳管理に対しても、異なる処理が実行させるよう設定されてよい。例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが、変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNではない場合には、同様の処理が適用されてもよい。また、変更後の第2のPLMNが、変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNである場合には、異なる処理が実行されてよい。
Further, whether the same processing or different processing is performed regardless of whether the first congestion management is for a specific DNN or No DNN may be set based on the information set in UE_A10 in advance. However, as mentioned above, it may be determined by whether or not the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, but regardless of the first congestion management, the second It may be set so that different processes are executed also for the fourth congestion management. For example, if the second PLMN after the change is not an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, the same processing may be applied. Further, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, different processing may be executed.
さらに、UE_A10は、均等PLMNであるか否かだけでなく、更なる詳細条件を基に挙動を決定してもよい。例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合と、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更を伴う場合とで、UE_A10は異なる挙動が実行されるよう設定されてよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may determine its behavior based not only on whether or not it is an equal PLMN, but also on the basis of further detailed conditions. For example, when the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change, and when the second PLMN after the change is changed. UE_A10 may be set to perform different behavior depending on whether it is an equal PLMN with respect to the previous first PLMN and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area.
なお、各場合において実行されるUE_A10の挙動は、これまで説明したPLMN変更時の挙動のうちの一つであってよい。
The behavior of UE_A10 executed in each case may be one of the behaviors at the time of PLMN change described so far.
以下、第2の輻輳管理が適用されている際の例を説明する。
Hereinafter, an example when the second congestion management is applied will be described.
例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定のS-NSSAIを用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
For example, the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI in these PLMN changes, or for the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI. If the associated backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send PDU session establishment request messages using this particular S-NSSAI. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular S-NSSAI.
また、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、No S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、No S-NSSAIに対する第1の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はS-NSSAIを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
Further, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management for No. S-NSSAI, or corresponds to the first congestion management for No. S-NSSAI. If the backoff timer is deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured in the new PLMN not to send a PDU session establishment request message without using the S-NSSAI. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages without using S-NSSAI.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、No S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、No S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、No S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIを用いずにPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10はS-NSSAIを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the second congestion management for No. S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN before the change, or associates it with the PLMN before the change. When the second congestion management back-off timer for the No. S-NSSAI is deactivated, the second congestion management back for the No. S-NSSAI associated with the changed PLMN. If the off-timer is not counted and the second congestion management back-off timer for the No S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN is not deactivated, the UE_A10 will be in the new PLMN. It may be set so that the PDU session establishment request message can be sent without using S-NSSAI. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message without using S-NSSAI.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、特定のS-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer of the second congestion management for a specific S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN before the change, or corresponds to the PLMN before the change. If the attached second congestion management backoff timer for the specific S-NSSAI is deactivated, then the second congestion for the specific S-NSSAI associated with the modified PLMN. UE_A10 is new if the management backoff timer is not counting and the second congestion management backoff timer for a particular S-NSSAI associated with the PLMN is not deactivated. The PLMN may be configured to be able to send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第3の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定のS-NSSAI、及び/又はNo S-NSSAIに対する第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーを停止してもよい。これにより、UE_A10は、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は特定のS-NSSAIを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は特定のS-NSSAIを用いないPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a third example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with a second congestion management for a particular S-NSSAI and / or No S-NSSAI in these PLMN changes. As a result, UE_A10 is set so that UE_A10 can send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific S-NSSAI in the new PLMN. Good. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific S-NSSAI and / or a PDU session establishment request message not using a specific S-NSSAI.
以下、第3の輻輳管理が適用されている際の例を説明する。
The following is an example when the third congestion management is applied.
例えば、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、この特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いてPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10はこの特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
For example, the first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes, or the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN]. If the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for] is deactivated, the UE_A10 will use this particular [S-NSSAI, DNN] to send a PDU session establishment request message in the new PLMN. May be set not to do. Therefore, based on this setting, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages using this particular [S-NSSAI, DNN].
また、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアを変更しない場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は行わないよう設定されてよい。したがって、この設定に基づいてUE_10は[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信は規制されてもよい。
Further, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the registration area is not changed in the PLMN change. UE_A10 counts the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes, or for [No S-NSSAI, DNN]. When the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management is deactivated, UE_A10 is set to not send the PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. You can. Therefore, UE_10 may be restricted from sending PDU session establishment request messages to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] based on this setting.
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第1の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a first example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the third congestion management for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN before the change, or before the change. When the third congestion management backoff timer for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN is deactivated, the [No S- The third congestion management backoff timer for [No S-NSSAI, DNN] that is not counted for the NSSAI, DNN] and is associated with the PLMN If not deactivated, UE_A10 may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN].
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第2の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っている場合、若しくは、変更前のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされている場合において、さらに、変更後のPLMNに対応付けられた、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーのカウントを行っておらず、且つ、PLMNに対応付けられた、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされていない場合には、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a second example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. In such a PLMN change, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer of the third congestion management for a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN before the change, or before the change. When the third congestion management backoff timer for the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN of the is deactivated, the specific PLMN associated with the modified PLMN is further deactivated. The third congestion management backoff timer for the [S-NSSAI, DNN] is not counted, and the third congestion management for the specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] associated with the PLMN. If the backoff timer has not been deactivated, the UE_A10 may be configured to send a PDU session establishment request message with a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. Furthermore, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN].
次に、変更後の第2のPLMNが変更前の第1のPLMNに対しての均等PLMNであり、且つ、そのPLMN変更においてレジストレーションエリアの変更が伴う場合の第3の例を説明する。UE_A10は、こうしたPLMNの変更において、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]、及び/又は[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対する第3の輻輳管理に対応付けられたバックオフタイマーを停止してもよい。これにより、UE_A10は、UE_A10は新たなPLMNにおいて、特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信できるよう設定されてよい。さらに、この設定に基づいてUE_10は特定の[S-NSSAI, DNN]を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又は[No S-NSSAI, DNN]に対するPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Next, a third example will be described in which the second PLMN after the change is an equal PLMN with respect to the first PLMN before the change, and the PLMN change involves a change in the registration area. UE_A10 may stop the backoff timer associated with a third congestion management for a particular [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in these PLMN changes. .. As a result, UE_A10 sends a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or a PDU session establishment request message to [No S-NSSAI, DNN] in the new PLMN. It may be set so that it can be done. Further, based on this setting, UE_10 may send a PDU session establishment request message using a specific [S-NSSAI, DNN] and / or a PDU session establishment request message for [No S-NSSAI, DNN]. ..
なお、バックオフタイマーがディアクティベートされるとは、バックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーに対応づけられた輻輳管理がディアクティベートされた状態に遷移していることであってよい。なお、UE_A10は、ディアクティベートを示すタイマー値を受信した場合に、バックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーに対応づけられた輻輳管理をディアクティベートしてもよい。
Note that the deactivation of the backoff timer may mean that the congestion management associated with the backoff timer and / or the backoff timer has transitioned to the deactivated state. Note that UE_A10 may deactivate the backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer when it receives a timer value indicating deactivation.
ここで、ディアクティベートされるバックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーに対応づけられた輻輳管理は、1から4の輻輳管理種別に対応づけられてよい。ディアクティベートされるバックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーに対応づけられた輻輳管理がどの輻輳管理種別に対応付けられるかは、バックオフタイマー値を受信した際、同様に決定、認識されてよい。
Here, the congestion management associated with the deactivated backoff timer and / or the backoff timer may be associated with congestion management types 1 to 4. The congestion management type associated with the deactivated backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer may be similarly determined and recognized when the backoff timer value is received.
より具体的には、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマー及び/又はバックオフタイマーに対応づけられる輻輳管理をディアクティベートすることを示す第14の識別情報と、第15の識別情報とをNWから受信し、第15の識別情報が示す種別の輻輳管理に対するバックオフタイマーをディアクティベートしてもよい。
More specifically, UE_A10 receives the 14th and 15th identification information from the NW indicating that the backoff timer and / or the congestion management associated with the backoff timer is deactivated. You may deactivate the backoff timer for the type of congestion management indicated by the fifteenth identification.
また、バックオフタイマー及び/又は輻輳管理がディアクティベートされた状態では、端末の電源がOFFとなるか、USIMが取りだされるまで輻輳管理の適用が継続されてよい。さらに、その際に規制される処理は、各輻輳管理の種別に応じてバックオフタイマーのカウントが行われている際に規制される処理と同様であってよい。
Further, in the state where the back-off timer and / or congestion management is deactivated, the application of congestion management may be continued until the power of the terminal is turned off or USIM is taken out. Further, the processing regulated at that time may be the same as the processing regulated when the backoff timer is counted according to each type of congestion management.
さらに、各装置は、上述した処理の完了、及び/又は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、第2のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを完了する。
Further, each device performs a second network-driven session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or transmission / reception of a network-driven session management request message and / or a network-driven session management completion message. Complete.
UE_A10は、第2のネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。
UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the second network-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the transmission and reception of the network-driven session management request message and / or the network-driven session management completion message.
[1.4.UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要]
次に、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要について説明する。以下、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きは本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、確立されたPDUセッションに対してUEが主導して実行するセッションマネジメントの為の手続きである。尚、本手続きは、前述の登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きが完了し、各装置が第1の状態に遷移した後の任意のタイミングで実行してもよい。また、各装置は、本手続き中に輻輳管理を停止又は変更する為の識別情報を含んだメッセージを送受信してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいてネットワークが指示する新たな輻輳管理に基づく挙動を開始してもよい。 [1.4. Outline of UE-led session management procedure]
Next, the outline of the UE-led session management procedure will be described. Hereinafter, the UE-led session management procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for session management that the UE takes the initiative in executing an established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
次に、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの概要について説明する。以下、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きは本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、確立されたPDUセッションに対してUEが主導して実行するセッションマネジメントの為の手続きである。尚、本手続きは、前述の登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きが完了し、各装置が第1の状態に遷移した後の任意のタイミングで実行してもよい。また、各装置は、本手続き中に輻輳管理を停止又は変更する為の識別情報を含んだメッセージを送受信してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいてネットワークが指示する新たな輻輳管理に基づく挙動を開始してもよい。 [1.4. Outline of UE-led session management procedure]
Next, the outline of the UE-led session management procedure will be described. Hereinafter, the UE-led session management procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for session management that the UE takes the initiative in executing an established PDU session. This procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed and each device transitions to the first state. In addition, each device may send and receive a message containing identification information for stopping or changing congestion management during this procedure, or based on new congestion management instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure. The behavior may be initiated.
又、UE_A10は、本手続きによって送受信される制御情報を基に識別される輻輳管理の適用を停止してもよい。言い換えると、コアネットワーク_B190は、本手続きを主導すること、さらには本手続きの制御メッセージ及び制御情報をUE_A10に送信することより、これらの制御情報を用いて識別可能な輻輳管理の適用を停止するようUE_A10に通知することができる。
Also, UE_A10 may stop applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure. In other words, the core network_B190 stops applying congestion management that can be identified using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information of this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
さらに、UE_A10は、本手続きによって送受信される制御情報を基に識別される輻輳管理の適用を開始してもよい。言い換えると、コアネットワーク_B190は、本手続きを主導すること、さらには本手続きの制御メッセージ及び制御情報をUE_A10に送信することより、これらの制御情報を用いて識別可能な輻輳管理の適用を開始するようUE_A10に通知することができる。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may start applying congestion management identified based on the control information sent and received by this procedure. In other words, the core network_B190 initiates the application of identifiable congestion management using these control information by leading this procedure and also by sending control messages and control information for this procedure to UE_A10. You can notify UE_A10 to do so.
尚、本手続きは、UE主導のPDUセッション変更(PDUセッションモディフィケーション)手続き、及び/又はUE主導のPDUセッション解放(PDUセッションリリース)手続き等であってもよいし、これらに限らないUE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを実行してもよい。尚、各装置は、UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きにおいて、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション変更コマンドメッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション変更完了メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを送受信してもよい。各装置は、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きにおいて、PDUセッション解放要求メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション解放コマンドメッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション解放完了メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージを送受信してもよい。
Note that this procedure may be a UE-led PDU session change (PDU session modification) procedure and / or a UE-led PDU session release (PDU session release) procedure, etc., and is not limited to these. You may perform the session management procedure of. In the UE-led PDU session change procedure, each device sends and receives a PDU session change request message and / or a PDU session change command message and / or a PDU session change completion message and / or a PDU session change rejection message. You may. Even if each device sends and receives a PDU session release request message and / or a PDU session release command message and / or a PDU session release completion message and / or a PDU session release refusal message in the UE-led PDU session release procedure. Good.
さらに、各装置は、上述した処理の完了、及び/又は、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はUE主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きを完了する。
Further, each device completes the UE-led session management procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led session management request message and / or the UE-led session management completion message.
UE_A10は、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、UE主導のセッションマネジメント要求メッセージ、及び/又はUE主導のセッションマネジメント完了メッセージの送受信に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。
UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led session management procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may execute the UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer described later based on the transmission / reception of the UE-led session management request message and / or the UE-led session management completion message.
[1.4.1.UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続き例]
本章では、本手続きとはUE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを指す。以下、図13を用いて、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.4.1. Example of UE-led PDU session change procedure]
In this chapter, this procedure refers to the UE-led PDU session change procedure. Hereinafter, each step of this procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
本章では、本手続きとはUE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを指す。以下、図13を用いて、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.4.1. Example of UE-led PDU session change procedure]
In this chapter, this procedure refers to the UE-led PDU session change procedure. Hereinafter, each step of this procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
尚、前述の通り、登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づき、第1の状態に遷移(S1300)したUE_A10は、任意のタイミングで、UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを開始することができる。言い換えると、UE_A10は、任意のタイミングで、確立しているPDUセッションに対してUE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを開始してもよい。さらに言い換えると、UE_A10は、任意のタイミングで、確立しているPDUセッションと同じPDUセッションIDを用いたUE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを開始してもよい。
As described above, UE_A10 that has transitioned to the first state (S1300) based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure at any time. it can. In other words, UE_A10 may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure for the established PDU session at any time. In other words, UE_A10 may start the UE-led PDU session change procedure using the same PDU session ID as the established PDU session at any time.
まず、UE_A10は、SMF_A230に、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージを送信することで(S1302)、UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを開始する。ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージにPDUセッションIDを含めてもよいし、PDUセッションIDを含めることで、PDUセッションIDで識別されるPDUセッションに対して変更を行うことを要求してもよい。
First, UE_A10 starts the UE-led PDU session change procedure by sending a PDU session change request message to SMF_A230 (S1302). Here, UE_A10 may include the PDU session ID in the PDU session change request message, or requests that the PDU session identified by the PDU session ID be changed by including the PDU session ID. May be good.
尚、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、確立しているPDUセッションのPDUセッションIDであってよい。さらに、DNNに対応付けられたバックオフタイマーが実行されている場合、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、前記DNNに対応付けられていないPDUセッションを識別するためのPDUセッションIDであってよい。さらに、S-NSSAIに対応付けられたバックオフタイマーが実行されている場合、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、前記S-NSSAIに対応付けられていないPDUセッションを識別するためのPDUセッションIDであってよい。さらに、DNNとS-NSSAIとに対応付けられたバックオフタイマーが実行されている場合、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含められるPDUセッションIDは、前記DNNとS-NSSAIとに対応付けられていないPDUセッションを識別するためのPDUセッションIDであってよい。
The PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message may be the PDU session ID of the established PDU session. Further, when the backoff timer associated with the DNN is executed, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU session ID for identifying the PDU session not associated with the DNN. It may be there. Further, when the backoff timer associated with S-NSSAI is executed, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is used to identify the PDU session not associated with S-NSSAI. It may be a PDU session ID. Further, when the backoff timer associated with the DNN and S-NSSAI is executed, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message is the PDU not associated with the DNN and S-NSSAI. It may be a PDU session ID for identifying the session.
次に、SMF_A230は、UE_A10が送信したPDUセッション変更要求メッセージを受信する。SMF_A230は、UE_A10の要求を受諾する場合、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを開始する。逆に、SMF_A230は、UE_A10の要求を拒絶する場合、UE_A10にPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを送信する。以下、SMF_A230が、UE_A10の要求を拒絶した場合について説明する。
Next, SMF_A230 receives the PDU session change request message sent by UE_A10. If SMF_A230 accepts the request of UE_A10, it initiates the network-led PDU session change procedure. Conversely, if SMF_A230 rejects the request of UE_A10, it sends a PDU session change refusal message to UE_A10. The case where SMF_A230 rejects the request of UE_A10 will be described below.
SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受諾に基づき、UE_A10にPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを送信する(S1304)。ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージに、第11から第18の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、PDUセッションIDを含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。
SMF_A230 sends a PDU session change refusal message to UE_A10 based on the acceptance of the PDU session establishment request message (S1304). Here, SMF_A230 may include one or more identification information among the 11th to 18th identification information in the PDU session change refusal message, may include the PDU session ID, and may include these identification information. Inclusion may indicate that the request for UE_A10 has been rejected. In addition, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
ここで、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージに含まれるPDUセッションIDは、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージに含まれたPDUセッションIDと同一であってよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージに含まれるPDUセッションIDは、本手続き中に、UE_A10から提供されたPDUセッションIDと同一であってもよい。
Here, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change refusal message may be the same as the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change request message. In other words, the PDU session ID included in the PDU session change refusal message may be the same as the PDU session ID provided by UE_A10 during this procedure.
さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを送信することにより、UE_A10に適用する輻輳管理を通知してもよい。さらに、これにより、コアネットワーク_B190は、UE_A10に輻輳管理を適用すること、及び/又は、UE_A10に輻輳管理を実行することを示すこと、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理の種別を識別する情報、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理に関連付けられるDNN及び/又はS-NSSAI等の輻輳管理の対象を識別する情報、及び/又は、適用する輻輳管理に対応づけられたタイマーの値を通知してもよい。
Furthermore, SMF_A230 may notify the congestion management applied to UE_A10 by sending a PDU session change refusal message. In addition, this indicates that the core network_B190 applies congestion management to UE_A10 and / or performs congestion management on UE_A10, and / or information that identifies the type of congestion management to apply. , And / or the information that identifies the target of congestion management such as DNN and / or S-NSSAI associated with the applied congestion management, and / or the value of the timer associated with the applied congestion management. May be good.
ここで、上述した各情報は、第11の識別情報から第18の識別情報の一つ以上の識別情報によって識別される情報であってよい。
Here, each of the above-mentioned information may be information identified by one or more identification information of the eleventh identification information to the eighteenth identification information.
UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを受信する。さらに、各装置は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの送受信、及び/又はネットワーク主導のPDUセッション変更手続きの完了に基づいて本手続きを完了する。
UE_A10 receives the PDU session change refusal message. In addition, each device completes this procedure based on sending and receiving PDU session change rejection messages and / or completing network-driven PDU session change procedures.
ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、第4の処理を実施してもよい。尚、第4の処理は、本手続きの完了に基づいて実施されてもよい。
Here, UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 has been rejected based on the reception of the PDU session change refusal message. In addition, UE_A10 may perform a fourth process based on the receipt of the PDU session change rejection message. The fourth process may be carried out based on the completion of this procedure.
ここで、第4の処理は、UE_A10がPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した際の挙動と同様の処理であってもよい。
Here, the fourth process may be the same process as the behavior when UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment refusal message.
さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が拒絶されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。
Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process in which the received identification information is transferred to the upper layer and / or the lower layer. .. Further, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been rejected.
さらに、第4の処理において、UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを受信することにより、適用される輻輳管理を認識してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、これにより、輻輳管理を適用すること、及び/又は、輻輳管理を実行することを認識してもよいし、適用する輻輳管理の種別を識別する情報、及び/又は、DNN及び/又はS-NSSAI等の適応される輻輳管理の対象を識別する情報、及び/又は、適用される輻輳管理に対応づけられたタイマーの値を記憶、認識してもよい。
Further, in the fourth process, UE_A10 may recognize the congestion management to be applied by receiving the PDU session change refusal message. Note that the UE_A10 may thereby recognize that it applies congestion management and / or performs congestion management, information that identifies the type of congestion management that is applied, and / or DNN and / Or information that identifies the target of the applied congestion management such as S-NSSAI and / or the value of the timer associated with the applied congestion management may be stored and recognized.
さらに、UE_A10は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報を受信した場合、第14の識別情報が示す値をバックオフタイマーの値に設定してもよいし、タイマー値を設定したバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報を含むPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、第14の識別情報が示す値をバックオフタイマーの値に設定してもよいし、タイマー値を設定したバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。
Further, when UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information and / or the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information, the UE_A10 sets the value indicated by the 14th identification information as the value of the backoff timer. Alternatively, a back-off timer with a timer value may be started. In other words, UE_A10 is the value indicated by the 14th identification information based on the receipt of the PDU session change rejection message containing the 11th identification information and / or the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information. May be set to the value of the backoff timer, or the backoff timer with the timer value set may be started.
ここで、前記バックオフタイマーは、第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーであってもよいし、第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーであってよい。
Here, the back-off timer may be a back-off timer associated with the second congestion management, or may be a back-off timer associated with the third congestion management.
以上の手続きにおける、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの送受信により、コアネットワーク_B190はUE_A10に対して適用する輻輳管理を通知し、UE_A10は、コアネットワーク_B190の指示する輻輳管理を適用することができる。なお、コアネットワークB190及びUE_A10は、本手続きで説明した手続き及び処理を複数回実行することで、複数の輻輳管理を適用してもよい。尚、適用される各輻輳管理は、異なる輻輳管理の種別、及び/又は異なるDNNに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又は異なるS-NNSAIに対応する輻輳管理、及び/又はDNNとS-NSSAIの組み合わせに差異がある輻輳管理であってよい。
By sending and receiving the PDU session change refusal message in the above procedure, the core network_B190 notifies the congestion management to be applied to the UE_A10, and the UE_A10 can apply the congestion management instructed by the core network_B190. The core networks B190 and UE_A10 may apply a plurality of congestion managements by executing the procedures and processes described in this procedure a plurality of times. Note that each applicable congestion management is a different type of congestion management and / or congestion management corresponding to different DNNs and / or congestion management corresponding to different S-NNSAI, and / or a combination of DNN and S-NSSAI. Congestion management may be different.
さらに、各装置は、上述した処理の完了、及び/又は、UE主導のPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づいて、UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きを完了する。
Further, each device completes the UE-led PDU session change procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led PDU session change refusal message.
UE_A10は、UE主導のPDUセッション変更手続きの完了に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。
UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led PDU session change procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer described later based on the reception of the PDU session change refusal message.
[1.4.2.UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続き例]
本章では、本手続きとはUE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.4.2. Example of UE-led PDU session release procedure]
In this chapter, this procedure refers to the UE-led PDU session release procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
本章では、本手続きとはUE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。 [1.4.2. Example of UE-led PDU session release procedure]
In this chapter, this procedure refers to the UE-led PDU session release procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きは、前述したPDUセッション変更手続きと同様の手続きであってよい。
The UE-led PDU session release procedure may be the same procedure as the PDU session change procedure described above.
具体的には、本手続きが、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの場合、前述したPDUセッション変更要求メッセージは、PDUセッション解放要求メッセージと読み替えてもよい。さらに、本手続きが、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの場合、前述したPDUセッション変更挙動メッセージは、PDUセッション解放挙動メッセージと読み替えてもよい。
Specifically, when this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure, the above-mentioned PDU session change request message may be read as a PDU session release request message. Further, when this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure, the above-mentioned PDU session change behavior message may be read as a PDU session release behavior message.
さらに、本手続きが、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの場合、PDUセッション解放要求メッセージの受信に基づいて行われるSMF_A230の挙動は、前述したPDUセッション変更要求メッセージの受信に基づいて行われるSMF_A230の挙動と同様であってもよい。さらに、本手続きが、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの場合、PDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて行われるUE_A10の挙動は、前述したPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて行われるUE_A10の挙動と同様であってもよい。
Further, when this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure, the behavior of SMF_A230 performed based on the reception of the PDU session release request message is the behavior of SMF_A230 performed based on the reception of the above-mentioned PDU session change request message. May be similar to. Further, when this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure, the behavior of UE_A10 performed based on the reception of the PDU session release refusal message is the behavior of UE_A10 performed based on the reception of the above-mentioned PDU session change rejection message. May be similar to.
さらに、本手続きが、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの場合、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション解放要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、ネットワーク主導のPDUセッション解放手続きを開始してもよいし、UE_A10にPDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージを送信してもよい。
Furthermore, if this procedure is a UE-led PDU session release procedure, SMF_A230 may initiate a network-driven PDU session release procedure based on the receipt of the PDU session release request message, or release the PDU session to UE_A10. A rejection message may be sent.
さらに、各装置は、上述した処理の完了、及び/又は、UE主導のPDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づいて、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きを完了する。
Further, each device completes the UE-led PDU session release procedure based on the completion of the above-mentioned processing and / or the transmission / reception of the UE-led PDU session release refusal message.
UE_A10は、UE主導のPDUセッション解放手続きの完了に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、PDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、後述するバックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理を実施してもよい。
UE_A10 may execute UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer, which will be described later, based on the completion of the UE-led PDU session release procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform UE processing related to execution of the backoff timer described later based on the reception of the PDU session release refusal message.
[1.5.バックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理例]
本章では、バックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理について説明していく。ここで、本章で説明するUEの処理は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き、及び/又は、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、実施されてよい。言い換えると、本章で説明するUEの処理は、PDUセッション変更コマンドメッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション解放コマンドメッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、実施されてもよい。 [1.5. UE processing example related to execution of backoff timer]
This chapter describes the UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer. Here, the UE processing described in this chapter may be implemented based on the completion of the network-led session management procedure and / or the UE-led session management procedure. In other words, the UE processing described in this chapter is to receive a PDU session change command message and / or a PDU session release command message and / or a PDU session change rejection message and / or a PDU session release rejection message. It may be carried out based on the reception of.
本章では、バックオフタイマーの実行に関するUEの処理について説明していく。ここで、本章で説明するUEの処理は、ネットワーク主導のセッションマネジメント手続き、及び/又は、UE主導のセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、実施されてよい。言い換えると、本章で説明するUEの処理は、PDUセッション変更コマンドメッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション解放コマンドメッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション解放拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、実施されてもよい。 [1.5. UE processing example related to execution of backoff timer]
This chapter describes the UE processing related to the execution of the backoff timer. Here, the UE processing described in this chapter may be implemented based on the completion of the network-led session management procedure and / or the UE-led session management procedure. In other words, the UE processing described in this chapter is to receive a PDU session change command message and / or a PDU session release command message and / or a PDU session change rejection message and / or a PDU session release rejection message. It may be carried out based on the reception of.
尚、これまで説明してきたPLMNの変更に伴うUE_A10とNWの処理は、第1の輻輳管理、及び/又は第1の輻輳管理に対するバックオフタイマーを対象として説明してきたが、第2の輻輳管理、第3の輻輳管理、第4の輻輳管理に対しても、同様の処理が行われてよい。ただし、送信が規制又は許容されるPDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、各種別に応じたメッセージであってよい。
The processing of UE_A10 and NW due to the change of PLMN described so far has been described for the first congestion management and / or the backoff timer for the first congestion management, but the second congestion management has been described. , The same processing may be performed for the third congestion management and the fourth congestion management. However, the PDU session establishment request message whose transmission is restricted or permitted may be a message according to each type.
言い換えると、輻輳管理及び/又は輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、輻輳管理の種別に関わらず、PLMNに対応付けられてよい。
In other words, the backoff timer associated with congestion management and / or congestion management may be associated with the PLMN regardless of the type of congestion management.
もしくは、任意の輻輳管理及び/又は輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、PLMNに対応付けられるよう設定されてよい。したがって、第1の輻輳管理、第2の輻輳管理、及び第3の輻輳管理に対して、輻輳管理及び/又は輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、PLMNに対応付けられるよう設定されてよい。または、No DNNに対する第1の輻輳管理、第2の輻輳管理、及び第3の輻輳管理に対して、輻輳管理及び/又は輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、PLMNに対応付けられるよう設定され、特定のDNNに対する第1の輻輳管理はPLMNに対応付けらなくてもよい。
Alternatively, the backoff timer associated with arbitrary congestion management and / or congestion management may be set to be associated with the PLMN. Therefore, for the first congestion management, the second congestion management, and the third congestion management, the backoff timer associated with the congestion management and / or the congestion management is set to be associated with the PLMN. Good. Alternatively, for the first congestion management, the second congestion management, and the third congestion management for the No DNN, the backoff timer associated with the congestion management and / or the congestion management can be associated with the PLMN. The first congestion management for a particular DNN that is set does not have to be associated with the PLMN.
なお、各輻輳管理がPLMNに対応づれけられた場合の処理、及び/又は、各輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーに係る処理は、前述した、PLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理に対する処理、及び/又は、前述した、PLMNに対応付けられた第1の輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーに係る処理の説明における第1の輻輳管理を、第2から第4の各種別の輻輳管理に置き換えたものであってよい。
The processing when each congestion management is made compatible with PLMN and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to each congestion management is the above-mentioned first congestion management associated with PLMN. The first congestion management in the description of the processing and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management associated with the PLMN described above is the congestion management of each of the second to fourth types. It may be replaced with.
また、各輻輳管理がPLMNに対応づれけられていない場合の処理、及び/又は、各輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーに係る処理は、前述した、PLMNに対応付づけられていない第1の輻輳管理に対する処理、及び/又は、前述した、PLMNに対応付けられていない第1の輻輳管理に対応するバックオフタイマーに係る処理の説明における第1の輻輳管理を、第2から第4の各種別の輻輳管理に置き換えたものであってよい。
In addition, the processing when each congestion management is not compatible with PLMN and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to each congestion management is the first processing not associated with PLMN as described above. The second to fourth types of the first congestion management in the description of the processing for the congestion management and / or the processing related to the backoff timer corresponding to the first congestion management not associated with the PLMN described above. It may be replaced with another congestion management.
ただし、前述したとおり、送信が規制又は許容されるPDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、各種別に応じたメッセージであってよい。
However, as described above, the PDU session establishment request message whose transmission is restricted or permitted may be a message according to each type.
或は、第2の輻輳管理、及び/又は第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行時のPLMN変更時の挙動は、上述した処理の他、以下のように実行されてもよい。
Alternatively, the behavior at the time of PLMN change when executing the count of the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management and / or the third congestion management is executed as follows in addition to the above-mentioned processing. You may.
なお、第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーとは、これまで説明したとおり、スライスベースの輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーであってよい。さらに、スライスベースの輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAI、及び/又はPLMN単位で、開始、及び/又は停止されるタイマーであってよい。
The backoff timer associated with the second congestion management may be a backoff timer for slice-based congestion management as described above. Further, the backoff timer for slice-based congestion management may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in S-NSSAI and / or PLMN units.
具体的には、スライスベースのバックオフタイマーは、特定のS-NSSAIに対応付けられ、その特定のS-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、その特定のS-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。
Specifically, the slice-based backoff timer may be a timer that is associated with a specific S-NSSAI and prohibits the transmission of SM request messages using that specific S-NSSAI. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using that particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマーに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the SM request message that was prohibited by the PLMN before the change is allowed to be sent, the SM request message using the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be sent. It may mean that it is acceptable.
また、no S-NSSAIに対応付けられ、no S-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、no S-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、no S-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
Also, it may be a timer associated with no S-NSSAI and prohibiting the transmission of SM request messages using no S-NSSAI. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using noS-NSSAI during the counting of this timer. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. In addition, when it is expressed that the transmission of the SM request message prohibited by the PLMN before the change is permitted, it may mean that the transmission of the SM request message using no S-NSSAI is permitted.
また、第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーとは、これまで説明したとおり、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーであってよい。さらに、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAI、及び/又はDNN、及び/又はPLMN単位で、開始、及び/又は停止されるタイマーであってよい。
Further, the back-off timer associated with the third congestion management may be a back-off timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN, as described above. Further, the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in units of S-NSSAI and / or DNN and / or PLMN.
具体的には、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、特定のS-NSSAと特定のDNNの組み合わせに対応付けられ、その特定のS-NSSAIと特定のDNNを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、その特定のS-NSSAIと特定のDNNを用いたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマーに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIと、バックオフタイマーに対応付けられたDNNと同じDNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
Specifically, the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of a specific S-NSSA and a specific DNN, and the specific S-NSSAI and the specific DNN are assigned. It may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of the SM request message used. In other words, UE_A10 may be configured not to send SM request messages with that particular S-NSSAI and that particular DNN while this timer is counting. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the SM request message that was prohibited by the PLMN before the change is allowed to be sent, it is associated with the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and the backoff timer. It may mean that the transmission of the SM request message using the same DNN as the DNN is allowed.
また、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAと特定のDNNの組み合わせに対応付けられ、no S-NSSAIと特定のDNNを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、no S-NSSAIと特定のDNNを含めたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、no S-NSSAIと、バックオフタイマーに対応付けられたDNNと同じDNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
In addition, the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of no S-NSSA and a specific DNN, and the SM request message using no S-NSSAI and a specific DNN. It may be a timer for prohibiting transmission. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages including no S-NSSAI and a specific DNN during the counting of this timer. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the SM request message that was prohibited by the PLMN before the change is allowed to be sent, the SM request message using no S-NSSAI and the same DNN as the DNN associated with the backoff timer. May mean that the transmission of is allowed.
また、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、特定のS-NSSAとno DNNの組み合わせに対応付けられ、特定のS-NSSAIとno DNNを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、特定のS-NSSAIとno DNNを用いたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマーに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIと、no DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
In addition, the backoff timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of specific S-NSSA and noDNN, and the SM request message using the specific S-NSSAI and noDNN It may be a timer for prohibiting transmission. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using a particular S-NSSAI and noDNN during this timer count. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. If it is expressed that the transmission of SM request messages prohibited by PLMN before the change is allowed, SM using the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and no DNN It may mean that the request message is allowed to be sent.
また、S-NSSAIとDNNの組み合わせに対する輻輳管理のためのバックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとno DNNの組み合わせに対応付けられ、no S-NSSAI及びno DNNを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマーであってよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中は、no S-NSSAI及びno DNNを用いたSM要求メッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマーのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、no S-NSSAIと、no DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。
In addition, the back-off timer for congestion management for the combination of S-NSSAI and DNN is associated with the combination of no S-NSSAI and no DNN, and sends SM request messages using no S-NSSAI and no DNN. It may be a timer for prohibiting. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send SM request messages using noS-NSSAI and noDNN during the counting of this timer. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send SM request messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. .. In addition, when it is expressed that the transmission of SM request message prohibited by PLMN before the change is permitted, it means that the transmission of SM request message using no S-NSSAI and no DNN is permitted. You may.
なお、no S-NSSAIを用いてSM要求メッセージを送信すると表現した場合には、特定のS-NSSAIを含めずにSM要求メッセージを送信することであってよい。こうしたSM要求メッセージを受信したネットワークは、S-NSSAIが含まれていないことから、デフォルトのS-NSSAI、及び/又は、デフォルトのネットワークスライスに対する要求であると認識してもよい。したがって、no S-NSSAIとは、SM要求メッセージにS-NSSAIを含まないことを示す情報、及び/又は、デフォルトのネットワークスライスを要求することを意味する情報であってよい。
If it is expressed that the SM request message is transmitted using no S-NSSAI, the SM request message may be transmitted without including the specific S-NSSAI. Since the network that received such an SM request message does not include S-NSSAI, it may be recognized as a request for the default S-NSSAI and / or the default network slice. Therefore, no S-NSSAI may be information indicating that the SM request message does not include S-NSSAI and / or information indicating that a default network slice is requested.
また、no DNNを用いてSM要求メッセージを送信すると表現した場合には、特定のDNNを含めずにSM要求メッセージを送信することであってよい。こうしたSM要求メッセージを受信したネットワークは、DNNが含まれていないことから、デフォルトのDNNに対する要求であると認識してもよい。したがって、no DNNとは、SM要求メッセージにS-NSSAIを含まないことを示す情報、及び/又は、デフォルトのDNNを要求することを意味する情報であってよい。
Further, when it is expressed that the SM request message is transmitted using no DNN, the SM request message may be transmitted without including the specific DNN. The network that receives such an SM request message may be recognized as a request for the default DNN because it does not contain a DNN. Therefore, no DNN may be information indicating that the SM request message does not include S-NSSAI and / or information indicating that a default DNN is requested.
さらに、UE_A10は、第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第14の識別情報を前記バックオフタイマーのタイマー値に設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいてS-NSSAIを提供した場合に、前記バックオフタイマーに前記S-NSSAIを対応付けてもよい。逆にUE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいてS-NSSAIを提供しなかった場合に、前記バックオフタイマーにno S-NSSAIを対応付けてもよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may start a backoff timer associated with the second congestion management based on the reception of the fifteenth identification information. Further, UE_A10 may set the 14th identification information to the timer value of the backoff timer based on the reception of the 14th identification information. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI with the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI is provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. On the contrary, UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI is not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIとを用いて第2の輻輳管理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーに、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIとを関連付けてもよい。さらに言い換えると、第2の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIとを関連付けられていてもよい。
Further, UE_A10 uses S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network and S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network based on the reception of the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information. A second congestion management may be implemented. In other words, UE_A10 provides the S-NSSAI that UE_A10 provides to the network to the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management based on the receipt of the 14th and / or 15th identification information. And UE_A10 may be associated with S-NSSAI provided by the network. In other words, the backoff timer associated with the second congestion management may be associated with the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network and the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network.
ここで、第15の識別情報は、第69の5GSM(Session Management)理由値であってよい。さらに、第15の識別情報は、特定のスライスに対してのリソースが不十分なことが原因で、要求されたサービスを提供することができないことを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the fifteenth identification information may be the 69th 5GSM (Session Management) reason value. Further, the fifteenth identification information may be a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a specific slice.
さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいてS-NSSAIを提供しなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとを関係付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいてS-NSSAIを提供しなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとを関連付けられ付けてもよい。
Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment procedure, the backoff timer may be associated with no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI in the PDU session establishment procedure, the backoff timer is associated with no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. You may attach it.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. May be associated with. In other words, if S-NSSAI is not provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be the attached S-NSSAI. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 associates the backoff timer with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されなかった場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message and is transmitted / received. It may be associated with S-NSSAI. In other words, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will accept no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the message and sent / received. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with the included S-NSSAI sent and received.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when no S-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. May be associated with. In other words, if no S-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be the attached S-NSSAI. In other words, when noS-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, UE_A10 associates the backoff timer with the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when noS-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is included in the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message and is transmitted / received. It may be associated with S-NSSAI. In other words, when no S-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer accepts no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the message and sent / received. In other words, when noS-NSSAI is provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with the included S-NSSAI sent and received.
ここで、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIは、PDUセッションに対応付けられたマップドS-NSSAIであってもよいし、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIのマップドS-NSSAIであってもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたマップドS-NSSAIであってもよいし、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIのマップドS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Here, the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be a mapped S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, or a mapped S-NSSAI of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session. You may. Further, the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a mapped S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and sent and received, or may be included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be a mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI sent and received.
さらに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。言い換えると、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。
In addition, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, UE_A10 sends SM request messages using no S-NSSAI and / or PDUs. Transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI associated with the session may be prohibited. In other words, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, the SM request message using no S-NSSAI of UE_A10. Transmission and / or transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be prohibited.
さらに、UE_A10は、第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第14の識別情報を前記バックオフタイマーのタイマー値に設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIとDNNとを提供した場合に、前記バックオフタイマーに前記S-NSSAIと前記DNNとを対応付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIを提供し、DNNを提供しなかった場合に、前記バックオフタイマーに前記S-NSSAIとno DNNとを対応付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIを提供せず、DNNを提供した場合に、前記バックオフタイマーにno S-NSSAIと前記DNNとを対応付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIとDNNとを提供しなかった場合に、前記バックオフタイマーにno S-NSSAIとno DNNとを対応付けてもよい。
Furthermore, UE_A10 may start a backoff timer associated with a third congestion management based on the reception of the fifteenth identification information. Further, UE_A10 may set the 14th identification information to the timer value of the backoff timer based on the reception of the 14th identification information. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI and the DNN with the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI and the DNN are provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, UE_A10 may associate the S-NSSAI and noDNN with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI is provided and DNN is not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI with the DNN in the backoff timer when the S-NSSAI is not provided and the DNN is provided in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, UE_A10 may associate no S-NSSAI and no DNN with the backoff timer when S-NSSAI and DNN are not provided in the PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIと、DNNとを用いて第3の輻輳管理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーに、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIと、DNNとを関連付けてもよい。さらに言い換えると、第3の輻輳管理に対応づけられたバックオフタイマーは、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したS-NSSAIと、UE_A10がネットワークから提供されたS-NSSAIと、DNNとを関連付けられていてもよい。尚、前記DNNは、UE_A10がネットワークに提供したDNN、及び/又はUE_A10がネットワークから提供されたDNNであってよい。
Further, UE_A10 includes S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network, S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network, and DNN based on the reception of the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information. A third congestion management may be performed using. In other words, UE_A10 provides the S-NSSAI that UE_A10 provides to the network to the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management based on the receipt of the 14th and / or 15th identification information. , And UE_A10 may associate DNN with S-NSSAI provided by the network. In other words, the backoff timer associated with the third congestion management is associated with the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 to the network, the S-NSSAI provided by UE_A10 from the network, and the DNN. Good. The DNN may be a DNN provided by UE_A10 to the network and / or a DNN provided by UE_A10 from the network.
ここで、第15の識別情報は、第67の5GSM(Session Management)理由値であってよい。さらに、第15の識別情報は、特定のスライス及びDNNに対してのリソースが不十分なことが原因で、要求されたサービスを提供することができないことを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the fifteenth identification information may be the 67th 5GSM (Session Management) reason value. In addition, the fifteenth identifying information may be a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a particular slice and DNN.
さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIを提供せず、DNNを提供した場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとを関連付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIを提供せず、DNNを提供した場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとを関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, when UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and provides DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, the backoff timer includes no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session and the DNN. May be associated. Furthermore, when UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and provides DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, S-NSSAI and S- sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message are included in the backoff timer. NSSAI may be associated with the DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、前記DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided and DNN is provided together with the PDU session establishment request message by UE_A10, the backoff timer is associated with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with the S-NSSAI and the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message and DNN is provided, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI. And the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN is provided together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and PDU. The S-NSSAI associated with the session may be associated with the DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、前記DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIが提供されず、DNNが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided and DNN is provided together with the PDU session establishment request message by UE_A10, the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. The S-NSSAI included and transmitted / received may be associated with the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if S-NSSAI is not provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message and DNN is provided, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI. And the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN is provided together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and PDU. The S-NSSAI sent and received included in the session establishment acceptance message may be associated with the DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、前記DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when NOS-NSSAI and DNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is S associated with noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. -May be associated with NSSAI and the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI associated with the session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. The associated S-NSSAI may be associated with the DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、前記DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message. The S-NSSAI transmitted and received may be associated with the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer is no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be the DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides no S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer and establishes the PDU session with no S-NSSAI. The S-NSSAI sent and received included in the acceptance message may be associated with the DNN.
ここで、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとDNNとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIと前記DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。言い換えると、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれて送受信されたDNNとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIと前記DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIと前記DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。
Here, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with the S-NSSAI associated with the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session and the DNN, the SM request message using the noS-NSSAI and the DNN of UE_A10. And / or the transmission of the SM request message using the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session and the DNN may be prohibited. In other words, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and the S-NSSAI sent and received in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and the DNN sent and received in the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10, transmission of SM request message using no S-NSSAI and the DNN, and / or transmission of SM request message using S-NSSAI and the DNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. May be banned.
さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIとDNNとを提供しなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとを関連付けてもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、S-NSSAIとDNNとを提供しなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとを関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, the backoff timer is set to no S-NSSAI and S-NSSAI and no DNN associated with the PDU session. It may be associated. Furthermore, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN in the PDU session establishment procedure, S-NSSAI sent and received included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message in the backoff timer. And no DNN may be associated.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、no DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is set to S associated with no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. -May be associated with NSSAI and noDNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be S-NSSAI associated with the session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with the associated S-NSSAI and no DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、no DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、S-NSSAIとDNNとが提供されなかった場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Furthermore, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN sent and received. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer will be no S-NSSAI and PDU. It may be the S-NSSAI included in the session establishment acceptance message and sent / received, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, if UE_A10 does not provide S-NSSAI and DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to no S-NSSAI and establishes the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI sent / received included in the acceptance message and no DNN.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、no DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when NOS-NSSAI and noDNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is associated with noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and no DNN. In other words, when NOS-NSSAI and noDNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer becomes noS-NSSAI. It may be S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides noS-NSSAI and noDNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN associated with.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられてもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるS-NSSAIは、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとであってもよく、前記バックオフタイマーに関連付けられるDNNは、no DNNであってもよい。さらに言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UE_A10によって、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、UE_A10は、前記バックオフタイマーを、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けてもよい。
Further, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when NOS-NSSAI and noDNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is included in the noS-NSSAI and the PDU session establishment acceptance message. It may be associated with S-NSSAI and noDNN sent and received. In other words, when NOS-NSSAI and noDNN are provided by UE_A10 together with the PDU session establishment request message in the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer becomes noS-NSSAI. It may be the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and the DNN associated with the backoff timer may be no DNN. In other words, in the PDU session establishment procedure, when UE_A10 provides noS-NSSAI and noDNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, UE_A10 sets the backoff timer to noS-NSSAI and the PDU session. It may be associated with S-NSSAI sent / received included in the establishment acceptance message and no DNN.
ここで、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIとno DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。言い換えると、no S-NSSAIとPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとに関連付けられたバックオフタイマーの実行中は、UE_A10の、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信、及び/又はPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されたS-NSSAIとno DNNとを用いたSM要求メッセージの送信が禁止されてもよい。
Here, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with the S-NSSAI and noDNN associated with the noS-NSSAI and PDU session, the SM request using the noS-NSSAI and noDNN of UE_A10. The transmission of messages and / or the transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and noDNN associated with a PDU session may be prohibited. In other words, during the execution of the backoff timer associated with no S-NSSAI and no DNN included in the no S-NSSAI and PDU session establishment acceptance message, UE_A10, no S-NSSAI and no DNN The transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and / or the transmission of SM request messages using S-NSSAI and noDNN included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be prohibited.
尚、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報は、PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて送受信される、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれて送受信されてもよい。さらに、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報は、PDUセッション変更手続きにおいて送受信される、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージに含まれて送受信されてもよい。さらに、第14の識別情報、及び/又は第15の識別情報は、PDUセッション解放手続きにおいて送受信される、PDUセッション解放コマンドメッセージに含まれて送受信されてもよい。
The 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session establishment refusal message transmitted / received in the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session change refusal message transmitted / received in the PDU session change procedure. Further, the 14th identification information and / or the 15th identification information may be included in the PDU session release command message transmitted / received in the PDU session release procedure.
ここで、上述した挙動は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIが更新された場合に、実施されてもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIが更新された場合に、上述した挙動を実施してもよい。尚、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIの更新は、PLMNの変更に基づいて、実施されてもよい。より詳細には、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIの更新は、UE_A10のPLMNの変更に基づいて、実施されてもよい。
Here, the above-mentioned behavior may be performed when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated. In other words, UE_A10 may perform the above behavior when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated. The update of S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the change of PLMN. More specifically, the update of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the PLMN change of UE_A10.
前述した、第2の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーの2例と、第3の輻輳管理のバックオフタイマーの4例のうちのいずれか一つ、又は複数のバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している際、UE_A10は以下に示す第1の処理例から第8の処理例のいずれかの処理を実行するよう設定されてよい。
Counting one or more of the two examples of the second congestion management backoff timer and the third congestion management backoff timer described above, or a plurality of backoff timers is executed. At this time, UE_A10 may be set to execute any of the processes from the first process example to the eighth process example shown below.
まず、第1の処理例を説明する。
First, the first processing example will be described.
なお、第1の処理例では、第20の識別情報は、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されているか否かを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理は、第2の輻輳管理であってもよいし、第3の輻輳管理であってもよい。
In the first processing example, the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN. The S-NSSAI-based congestion management may be a second congestion management or a third congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報、又は現在のPLMNのみにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報、又は第22の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the twentieth identification information is information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN, or S-NSSAI-based only in the current PLMN. Information may be included to indicate that congestion management is applied. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、現在のPLMNのみにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN. Furthermore, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied only in the current PLMN.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、カウントされるバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であるか否かを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、前記バックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理で用いられるバックオフタイマーであってよい。
Furthermore, the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not the backoff timer to be counted is valid in all PLMNs. The back-off timer may be a back-off timer used in S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であることを示す情報、又はカウントされているバックオフタイマーが、現在のPLMNにおいてのみ有効であることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報、又は第22の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the twentieth identification information indicates that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs, or the counted backoff timer is valid only in the current PLMN. Information indicating that may be included. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であることを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、現在のPLMNにおいてのみ有効であることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the backoff timer being counted is valid only in the current PLMN.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNが輻輳しているか否かを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、ホームPLMNが輻輳しているとは、ホームPLMN中のスライスが輻輳していることであってもよい。さらに、ホームPLMNが輻輳しているとは、ホームPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が行われている状態であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 20th identification information may be an information element indicating whether or not the home PLMN is congested. The fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the slices in the home PLMN are congested. Further, the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the home PLMN is performing S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、ホームPLMNが輻輳していることを示す情報、又はホームPLMNは輻輳していないことを示す情報を含めることができてよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報、又は第22の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the twentieth identification information may include information indicating that the home PLMN is congested or information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、ホームPLMNが輻輳していることを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、ホームPLMNは輻輳していないことを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is congested. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIが、ホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであるか、ビジテットPLMNのS-NSSAIであるかを示す情報であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 20th identification information is information indicating whether the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN or the S-NSSAI of the visit PLMN. There may be.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報、又はS-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがビジテッドPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報、又は第22の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the 20th identification information includes information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN, or S-NSSAI-based congestion management. It may include information indicating that the associated S-NSSAI is a visited PLMN S-NSSAI. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be the 21st identification information or the information including the 22nd identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがビジテッドPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the visited PLMN.
さらに、第1の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ビジテットPLMNにおいて送受信される識別情報であり、ホームPLMNでは送受信されることのない識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the first processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
第1の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第1の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the first processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the first processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNである場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
このように、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信するか否かに関わらず、第1の処理例を実行してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信していなくても、第1の処理例を実行するよう設定されてよい。つまり、UE_A10は、ホームPLMNで受信したバックオフタイマーによる規制は、PLMNを変更しても継続するよう設定されてもよい。
As described above, UE_A10 may execute the first processing example regardless of whether or not the 20th identification information described later is received at the time of receiving the backoff timer. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the first processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
次に、第1の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第1の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the first processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the first processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, if it receives the 22nd identification information when the backoff timer is received, and / or if it does not receive the 20th identification information when it receives the backoff timer, it will move to the destination. The PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報に設定された第20の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer. When the 20th identification information set in is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer. When is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第2の処理例を説明する。
Next, the second processing example will be described.
なお、第2の処理例では、第20の識別情報は、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理は、第2の輻輳管理であってもよいし、第3の輻輳管理であってもよい。
In the second processing example, the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN. The S-NSSAI-based congestion management may be a second congestion management or a third congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。さらに、第20の識別情報は、現在のPLMNのみにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報を含めることができないインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the 20th identification information may include information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN. Further, the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot include information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied only in the current PLMN. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、現在のPLMNと前記PLMN以外のPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が適応されていることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that S-NSSAI-based congestion management is applied to the current PLMN and PLMNs other than the PLMN.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、カウントされるバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であることを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、前記バックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理で用いられるバックオフタイマーであってよい。
Furthermore, the twentieth identification information may be an information element indicating that the backoff timer to be counted is valid in all PLMNs. The back-off timer may be a back-off timer used in S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。さらに、第20の識別情報は、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、現在のPLMNにおいてのみ有効であることを示す情報を含めることができないインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs. Further, the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot contain information indicating that the backoff timer being counted is valid only in the current PLMN. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、カウントされているバックオフタイマーが、全てのPLMNにおいて有効であることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the counted backoff timer is valid in all PLMNs.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNが輻輳していることを示すインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。尚、ホームPLMNが輻輳しているとは、ホームPLMN中のスライスが輻輳していることであってもよい。さらに、ホームPLMNが輻輳しているとは、ホームPLMNにおいて、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理が行われている状態であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 20th identification information may be an information element indicating that the home PLMN is congested. The fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the slices in the home PLMN are congested. Further, the fact that the home PLMN is congested may mean that the home PLMN is performing S-NSSAI-based congestion management.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、ホームPLMNが輻輳していることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。さらに、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNは輻輳していないことを示す情報を含めることができないインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the home PLMN is congested. Further, the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot contain information indicating that the home PLMN is not congested. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、ホームPLMNが輻輳していることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the home PLMN is congested.
さらに、第20の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIが、ホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 20th identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
この場合、第20の識別情報には、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報を含めることができてよい。さらに、第20の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがビジテッドPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報を含めることができないインフォメーションエレメントであってよい。言い換えると、第20の識別情報は、第21の識別情報を含む情報であってもよい。
In this case, the 20th identification information may include information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN. Further, the twentieth identification information may be an information element that cannot include information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the visited PLMN. In other words, the twentieth identification information may be information including the twenty-first identification information.
ここで、第21の識別情報は、S-NSSAIベースの輻輳管理に対応づけられているS-NSSAIがホームPLMNのS-NSSAIであることを示す情報であってよい。
Here, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that the S-NSSAI associated with the S-NSSAI-based congestion management is the S-NSSAI of the home PLMN.
また、第20の識別情報は、ビジテットPLMNにおいて送受信される識別情報であり、ホームPLMNでは送受信されることのない識別情報であってよい。
Further, the 20th identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
第2の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第2の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the second processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the second processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNである場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
このように、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信するか否かに関わらず、第2の処理例を実行してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信していなくても、第2の処理例を実行するよう設定されてよい。つまり、UE_A10は、ホームPLMNで受信したバックオフタイマーによる規制は、PLMNを変更しても継続するよう設定されてもよい。
In this way, UE_A10 may execute the second processing example regardless of whether or not the 20th identification information described later is received when the backoff timer is received. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the second processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
次に、第2の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第2の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the second processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the second processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, if the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is explained according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of request messages. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第20の識別情報、及び/又は第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 20th identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer. , And / or when the 21st identification information is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第3の処理例を説明する。
Next, a third processing example will be described.
なお、第3の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報、第22の識別情報は、第1の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the third processing example, the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
さらに、第3の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNにおいても、ビジテットPLMNにおいても送受信可能な識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the third processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
第3の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第3の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the third processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the third processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When UE_A10 changes the PLMN, when the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, and / or when UE_A10 changes the PLMN, If the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, in each example, depending on the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of the described SM request message. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、移動先のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していない場合であり、さらに、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を含む第20の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
More specifically, UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received. Sometimes when the 20th identification information is not received, and / or when the 20th identification information including the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, and / or when the backoff timer is received. When the 22nd identification information is received, the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts back in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報に設定された第20の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer. When the 20th identification information set in is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer. When is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第3の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第3の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the third processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the third processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
If UE_A10 does not receive the 20th identification information when the backoff timer is received, and / or if UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information when the backoff timer is received when the PLMN is changed. The destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報に設定された第20の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and sets the 20th identification information set as the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer. When received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and if the 21st identification information is received together with the value of the backoff timer, the counting back is performed. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第4の処理例を説明する。
Next, the fourth processing example will be described.
なお、第4の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報、第22の識別情報は、第1の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the fourth processing example, the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
さらに、第4の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNにおいても、ビジテットPLMNにおいても送受信可能な識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the fourth processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
第4の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第4の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the fourth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the fourth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts the backoff timer in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the situation, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、移動先のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していない場合であり、さらに、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を含む第20の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
More specifically, UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received. When the 20th identification information including the 22nd identification information is sometimes received, and / or when the 22nd identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, the PLMN at the destination counts. Depending on the back-off timer, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, UE_A10 changed the PLMN when the PLMN before the change was the home PLMN and the 21st identification information was received when the backoff timer was received, and / or UE_A10 changed the PLMN. At that time, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, each of the PLMNs at the destination is counted according to the backoff timer. The restrictions on the transmission of SM request messages described in the example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第4の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第4の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the fourth processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the fourth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
If UE_A10 does not receive the 20th identification information when the backoff timer is received, and / or if UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information when the backoff timer is received when the PLMN is changed. The destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報に設定された第20の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and sets the 20th identification information set as the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer. When received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 is counting the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and if the 21st identification information is received together with the value of the backoff timer, the counting back is performed. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第5の処理例を説明する。
Next, a fifth processing example will be described.
なお、第5の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報は、第2の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the fifth processing example, the 20th identification information and the 21st identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
さらに、第5の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNにおいても、ビジテットPLMNにおいても送受信可能な識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the fifth processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
第5の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第5の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the fifth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the fifth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を含まない第20の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When UE_A10 changed the PLMN, if the PLMN before the change was the home PLMN and did not receive the 20th identification information when the backoff timer was received, and / or UE_A10 changed the PLMN. At that time, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 20th identification information that does not include the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, the backoff counted in the destination PLMN is counted. Depending on the timer, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、移動先のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していない場合であり、さらに、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を含まない第20の識別情報を受信した場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
More specifically, UE_A10 is the case when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is not executed in the destination PLMN, and the backoff timer is received. If the 20th identification information is not received at times, and / or if the 20th identification information that does not include the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received, the PLMN at the destination counts. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、且つ、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts back in the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the 21st identification information is received when the backoff timer is received. Depending on the off-timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第20の識別情報、及び/又は第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 20th identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer. , And / or when the 21st identification information is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第5の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第5の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the fifth processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the fifth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、及び/又は、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を含まない第20の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When UE_A10 changed the PLMN, it did not receive the 20th identification information when it received the backoff timer, and / or when UE_A10 changed the PLMN, it did not receive the 21st identification information when it received the backoff timer. When the 20th identification information containing no information is received, the destination PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第20の識別情報、及び/又は第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and performs the 20th identification information and / or the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer. When received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第6の処理例を説明する。
Next, the sixth processing example will be described.
なお、第6の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報、第22の識別情報は、第1の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the sixth processing example, the 20th identification information, the 21st identification information, and the 22nd identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the first processing example.
さらに、第6の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ビジテットPLMNにおいて送受信される識別情報であり、ホームPLMNでは送受信されることのない識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the sixth processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
第6の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第6の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the sixth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the sixth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNである場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When changing the PLMN, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、移動先のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していない場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
More specifically, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts on the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the backoff timer count is not executed on the destination PLMN. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第6の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第6の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the sixth processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the sixth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第22の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, if it receives the 22nd identification information when the backoff timer is received, and / or if it does not receive the 20th identification information when it receives the backoff timer, it will move to the destination. The PLMN may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報に設定された第20の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer. When the 20th identification information set in is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 21st identification information is added together with the value of the backoff timer. When is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第7の処理例を説明する。
Next, the seventh processing example will be described.
なお、第7の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報は、第2の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the seventh processing example, the twentieth identification information and the twenty-first identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
さらに、第7の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ビジテットPLMNにおいて送受信される識別情報であり、ホームPLMNでは送受信されることのない識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the seventh processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information transmitted / received in the visit PLMN and may not be transmitted / received in the home PLMN.
第7の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第7の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the seventh processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the seventh processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNである場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When changing the PLMN, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
より詳細には、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、移動先のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していない場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
More specifically, when changing the PLMN, UE_A10 counts on the destination PLMN if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN and the backoff timer count is not executed on the destination PLMN. Depending on the back-off timer being set, it may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, the backoff timer is counted in the PLMN before the change, and the backoff timer is also counted in the destination PLMN. If you are executing, you may continue to regulate the transmission of SM request messages as described in each example, depending on the backoff timer you are counting. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第7の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第7の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the seventh processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the seventh processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
If the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, UE_A10 allows the SM request message described in each example to be sent in the destination PLMN according to the backoff timer being counted. May be set. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがビジテットPLMNであり、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第20の識別情報、及び/又は第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, in UE_A10, when the PLMN is changed, the PLMN before the change is the visit PLMN, the count of the backoff timer is executed in the PLMN before the change, and the 20th identification information is executed together with the value of the backoff timer. , And / or when the 21st identification information is received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting backoff timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
次に、第8の処理例を説明する。
Next, the eighth processing example will be described.
なお、第8の処理例では、第20の識別情報、第21の識別情報は、第2の処理例で説明した識別情報と同様であってよい。
In the eighth processing example, the twentieth identification information and the twenty-first identification information may be the same as the identification information described in the second processing example.
さらに、第8の処理例の場合、第20の識別情報は、ホームPLMNにおいても、ビジテットPLMNにおいても送受信可能な識別情報であってよい。
Further, in the case of the eighth processing example, the twentieth identification information may be identification information that can be transmitted and received in both the home PLMN and the visit PLMN.
第8の処理例における、ホームPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第8の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ホームPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
In the eighth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when receiving the backoff timer at the home PLMN and then moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the eighth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the home PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNがホームPLMNである場合には、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
When the PLMN is changed, if the PLMN before the change is the home PLMN, UE_A10 sends the SM request message explained in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Regulations may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
このように、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信するか否かに関わらず、第8の処理例を実行してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、バックオフタイマーの受信時に、後述する第20の識別情報を受信していなくても、第8の処理例を実行するよう設定されてよい。つまり、UE_A10は、ホームPLMNで受信したバックオフタイマーによる規制は、PLMNを変更しても継続するよう設定されてもよい。
In this way, UE_A10 may execute the eighth processing example regardless of whether or not the twentieth identification information described later is received when the backoff timer is received. In other words, UE_A10 may be set to execute the eighth processing example when the backoff timer is received, even if the twentieth identification information described later is not received. That is, UE_A10 may be set so that the regulation by the backoff timer received at the home PLMN continues even if the PLMN is changed.
次に、第8の処理例における、ビジテットPLMNでバックオフタイマーを受信し、その後、他のPLMNへ移動する際の処理を説明する。言い換えると、以下では、第8の処理例における、前記バックオフタイマーが実行中に、ビジテットPLMNから他のPLMNへ移動する際のUE_A10の処理を説明する。
Next, in the eighth processing example, the processing when the visit PLMN receives the backoff timer and then moves to another PLMN will be described. In other words, in the eighth processing example, the processing of UE_A10 when moving from the visit PLMN to another PLMN while the backoff timer is being executed will be described below.
UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第20の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
When the UE_A10 changes the PLMN, if the 20th identification information is not received when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is explained according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. It may be set to allow the transmission of request messages. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
但し、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、バックオフタイマーの受信時に第21の識別情報を受信した場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
However, when the UE_A10 changes the PLMN and receives the 21st identification information when the backoff timer is received, the SM described in each example is described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. Restrictions on sending request messages may continue. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、バックオフタイマーの値と共に第20の識別情報、及び/又は第21の識別情報を受信した場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Further, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 executes the count of the backoff timer in the PLMN before the change, and performs the 20th identification information and / or the 21st identification information together with the value of the backoff timer. When received, the restriction on the transmission of the SM request message described in each example may be continued according to the counting back-off timer. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
さらに、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、変更前のPLMNにおいてバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行していて、且つ、移動先のPLMNにおいてもバックオフタイマーのカウントを実行している場合、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信の規制を継続してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を禁止するよう設定してもよい。
Furthermore, when the PLMN is changed, UE_A10 counts if the backoff timer is being counted in the PLMN before the change and the backoff timer is being counted in the destination PLMN as well. Depending on the back-off timer, the regulation of sending the SM request message described in each example may be continued. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to prohibit the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the counting backoff timer.
尚、全ての処理例において、UE_A10は、PLMNを変更した際、上述した条件に当てはまらない場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許すよう設定してもよい。言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明したSM要求メッセージの送信を許容するよう設定してもよい。さらに言い換えると、この場合、移動先のPLMNにおいて、UE_A10は、カウントしているバックオフタイマーに応じて、各例で説明した、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたSM要求メッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。
In all processing examples, when the PLMN is changed, if the above conditions are not met, the SM request message explained in each example will be sent according to the backoff timer being counted in the destination PLMN. May be set to allow transmission of. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 may be set to allow the transmission of the SM request message described in each example according to the backoff timer being counted. In other words, in this case, in the destination PLMN, UE_A10 is allowed to send the SM request message described in each example, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, depending on the backoff timer being counted. It may be set to.
ここで、上述した挙動は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIが更新された場合に、実施されてもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIが更新された場合に、上述した挙動を実施してもよい。尚、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIの更新は、PLMNの変更に基づいて、実施されてもよい。より詳細には、PDUセッションに対応付けられたS-NSSAIの更新は、UE_A10のPLMNの変更に基づいて、実施されてもよい。
Here, the above-mentioned behavior may be performed when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated. In other words, UE_A10 may perform the above behavior when the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session is updated. The update of S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the change of PLMN. More specifically, the update of the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session may be carried out based on the PLMN change of UE_A10.
また、NW(ネットワーク)がUE_A10に送信すると表現した場合には、AMF又はSMFがUE_A10に送信することであってよく、UE_A10がNWに送信すると表現した場合には、UE_A10がAMF又はSMFに送信することであってよい。さらに、NWがUE_A10から受信すると表現した場合には、AMF又はSMFがUE_A10から受信することであってよく、UE_A10がNWから受信すると表現した場合には、UE_A10がAMF又はSMFから受信することであってよい。
Also, when NW (network) expresses that it transmits to UE_A10, AMF or SMF may transmit to UE_A10, and when UE_A10 expresses that it transmits to NW, UE_A10 transmits to AMF or SMF. It may be to do. Furthermore, when NW expresses that it receives from UE_A10, AMF or SMF may receive from UE_A10, and when UE_A10 expresses that it receives from NW, UE_A10 may receive from AMF or SMF. It may be there.
[2.変形例]
本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであっても良い。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。 [2. Modification example]
The program that operates in the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls the Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate the computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention. The program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであっても良い。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。 [2. Modification example]
The program that operates in the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls the Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate the computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention. The program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
尚、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現する為のプログラムをコンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録しても良い。この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することによって実現しても良い。ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、装置に内蔵されたコンピュータシステムであって、オペレーティングシステムや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、半導体記録媒体、光記録媒体、磁気記録媒体、短時間動的にプログラムを保持する媒体、あるいはコンピュータが読み取り可能なその他の記録媒体であっても良い。
Note that the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it. The "computer system" as used herein is a computer system built into a device, and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices. The "computer-readable recording medium" is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. Is also good.
また、上述した実施形態に用いた装置の各機能ブロック、または諸特徴は、電気回路、たとえば、集積回路あるいは複数の集積回路で実装または実行され得る。本明細書で述べられた機能を実行するように設計された電気回路は、汎用用途プロセッサ、デジタルシグナルプロセッサ(DSP)、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ(FPGA)、またはその他のプログラマブル論理デバイス、ディスクリートゲートまたはトランジスタロジック、ディスクリートハードウェア部品、またはこれらを組み合わせたものを含んでよい。汎用用途プロセッサは、マイクロプロセッサでもよいし、従来型のプロセッサ、コントローラ、マイクロコントローラ、またはステートマシンであっても良い。前述した電気回路は、デジタル回路で構成されていてもよいし、アナログ回路で構成されていてもよい。また、半導体技術の進歩により現在の集積回路に代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、本発明の一以上の態様は当該技術による新たな集積回路を用いることも可能である。
Further, each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed in an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits. Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein are general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or a combination thereof. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine. The electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or more aspects of the present invention can also use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
尚、本願発明は上述の実施形態に限定されるものではない。実施形態では、装置の1例を記載したが、本願発明は、これに限定されるものではなく、屋内外に設置される据え置き型、または非可動型の電子機器、たとえば、AV機器、キッチン機器、掃除・洗濯機器、空調機器、オフィス機器、自動販売機、その他生活機器等の端末装置もしくは通信装置に適用出来る。
The invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the embodiment, an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other living equipment.
以上、この発明の実施形態に関して図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計変更等も含まれる。また、本発明は、請求項に示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。また、上記各実施形態に記載された要素であり、同様の効果を奏する要素同士を置換した構成も含まれる。
As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and design changes and the like within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention are also included. Further, the present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims, and the technical scope of the present invention also includes embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments. Is done. In addition, the elements described in each of the above embodiments include a configuration in which elements having the same effect are replaced with each other.
1 移動通信システム
5 DN_A
6 PDN_A
10 UE_A
20 UTRAN_A
22 NB_A
24 RNC_A
30 PGW_A
35 SGW_A
40 MME_A
45 eNB_A
50 HSS_A
80 E-UTRAN_A
90 コアネットワーク_A
120 NG-RAN_A
122 NR node_A
190 コアネットワーク_B
230 SMF_A
235 UPF_A
239 UPF_C
240 AMF_A 1 Mobile communication system
5 DN_A
6 PDN_A
10 UE_A
20 UTRAN_A
22 NB_A
24 RNC_A
30 PGW_A
35 SGW_A
40 MME_A
45 eNB_A
50 HSS_A
80 E-UTRAN_A
90 Core Network_A
120 NG-RAN_A
122 NR node_A
190 Core network_B
230 SMF_A
235 UPF_A
239 UPF_C
240 AMF_A
5 DN_A
6 PDN_A
10 UE_A
20 UTRAN_A
22 NB_A
24 RNC_A
30 PGW_A
35 SGW_A
40 MME_A
45 eNB_A
50 HSS_A
80 E-UTRAN_A
90 コアネットワーク_A
120 NG-RAN_A
122 NR node_A
190 コアネットワーク_B
230 SMF_A
235 UPF_A
239 UPF_C
240 AMF_A 1 Mobile communication system
5 DN_A
6 PDN_A
10 UE_A
20 UTRAN_A
22 NB_A
24 RNC_A
30 PGW_A
35 SGW_A
40 MME_A
45 eNB_A
50 HSS_A
80 E-UTRAN_A
90 Core Network_A
120 NG-RAN_A
122 NR node_A
190 Core network_B
230 SMF_A
235 UPF_A
239 UPF_C
240 AMF_A
Claims (6)
- UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
前記UEは、
PDU(Protocol Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージを、制御装置に送信し、
PDUセッションIDと、第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)とを含むPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信し、
前記PDUセッションIDを含むPDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを、制御装置から受信する、
送受信部と、
前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、バックオフタイマーを開始する制御部とを備え、
前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとDNN(Data Network Name)とが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに対応付けられ、
前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIとno DNNとに対応付けられる、
ことを特徴とするUE。 UE (User Equipment)
The UE is
Sends a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the controller and sends it to the controller.
A PDU session establishment acceptance message including the PDU session ID and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information) is received from the control device, and the PDU session establishment acceptance message is received.
A PDU session change rejection message including the PDU session ID is received from the control device.
Transmitter and receiver,
A control unit that starts a backoff timer based on the reception of the PDU session change refusal message is provided.
When no S-NSSAI and DNN (Data Network Name) are provided by the UE together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is the no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and the above. Associated with DNN,
When the UE provides no S-NSSAI and no DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the first S-NSSAI and no DNN. Attached,
UE characterized by that. - 前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージは、さらに、第1の情報と第2の情報とを含み、
前記第1の情報は、特定のスライス及びDNNに対してのリソースが不十分なことが原因で、要求されたサービスを提供することができないことを示す理由値であり、
前記第2の情報は、バックオフタイマーの値を示す情報であり、
前記バックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAI、DNN及びPLMN(Public Land Mobile Network)単位で、開始、及び停止されるタイマーである、
ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のUE。 The PDU session change refusal message further includes first information and second information.
The first information is a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a specific slice and DNN.
The second information is information indicating the value of the backoff timer.
The back-off timer is a timer that is started and stopped in units of S-NSSAI, DNN and PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network).
The UE according to claim 1. - 前記第1のS-NSSAIは、mapped S-NSSAIである、
ことを特徴とする請求項1又は請求項2に記載のUE。 The first S-NSSAI is mapped S-NSSAI,
The UE according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the UE is characterized by the above. - UE(User Equipment;端末装置)の通信制御方法であって、
PDU(Protocol Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージを、制御装置に送信するステップと、
PDUセッションIDと、第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)を含むPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信するステップと、
前記PDUセッションIDと、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージを、前記制御装置から受信するステップと、
前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、バックオフタイマーを開始するステップとを有し、
前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとDNN(Data Network Name)とが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIと前記DNNとに対応付けられ、
前記PDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、前記UEによって、no S-NSSAIとno DNNとが提供された場合、前記バックオフタイマーは、no S-NSSAIと前記第1のS-NSSAIとno DNNとに対応付けられる、
ことを特徴とするUEの通信制御方法。 UE (User Equipment) communication control method
A step to send a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) session establishment request message to the controller,
A step of receiving a PDU session establishment acceptance message including the PDU session ID and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information) from the control device, and
The step of receiving the PDU session ID and the PDU session change refusal message from the control device, and
It has a step of initiating a backoff timer based on the receipt of the PDU session change rejection message.
When no S-NSSAI and DNN (Data Network Name) are provided by the UE together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer is the no S-NSSAI, the first S-NSSAI, and the above. Associated with DNN,
When the UE provides no S-NSSAI and no DNN together with the PDU session establishment request message, the backoff timer corresponds to no S-NSSAI and the first S-NSSAI and no DNN. Attached,
UE communication control method characterized by that. - 前記PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージは、さらに、第1の情報と第2の情報とを含み、
前記第1の情報は、特定のスライス及びDNNに対してのリソースが不十分なことが原因で、要求されたサービスを提供することができないことを示す理由値であり、
前記第2の情報は、バックオフタイマーの値を示す情報であり、
前記バックオフタイマーは、S-NSSAI、DNN及びPLMN(Public Land Mobile Network)単位で、開始、及び停止されるタイマーである、
ことを特徴とする請求項4に記載のUEの通信制御方法。 The PDU session change refusal message further includes first information and second information.
The first information is a reason value indicating that the requested service cannot be provided due to insufficient resources for a specific slice and DNN.
The second information is information indicating the value of the backoff timer.
The back-off timer is a timer that is started and stopped in units of S-NSSAI, DNN and PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network).
The UE communication control method according to claim 4, wherein the UE communication control method. - 前記S-NSSAIは、mapped S-NSSAIである、
ことを特徴とする請求項4又は請求項5に記載のUEの通信制御方法。 The S-NSSAI is a mapped S-NSSAI,
The UE communication control method according to claim 4 or 5.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2021567605A JPWO2021132452A1 (en) | 2019-12-26 | 2020-12-24 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2019-236463 | 2019-12-26 | ||
JP2019236463 | 2019-12-26 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021132452A1 true WO2021132452A1 (en) | 2021-07-01 |
Family
ID=76575966
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2020/048406 WO2021132452A1 (en) | 2019-12-26 | 2020-12-24 | Ue and communication control method |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JPWO2021132452A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021132452A1 (en) |
Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2019521607A (en) * | 2017-04-19 | 2019-07-25 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | Method for processing PDU session establishment procedure and AMF node |
-
2020
- 2020-12-24 JP JP2021567605A patent/JPWO2021132452A1/ja active Pending
- 2020-12-24 WO PCT/JP2020/048406 patent/WO2021132452A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2019521607A (en) * | 2017-04-19 | 2019-07-25 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | Method for processing PDU session establishment procedure and AMF node |
Non-Patent Citations (3)
Title |
---|
HUAWEI ET AL.: "SINE_5G: Discussion on back-off control and retry restriction mechanisms in 5GS", 3GPP TSG CT WG1 MEETING #114, C1-190038, 14 January 2019 (2019-01-14), pages 1 - 5, XP051568563 * |
MEDIATEK INC.: "Discussion of S-NSSAI based congestion control", 3GPP TSG CT WG1 MEETING #120, CL-196416, 30 September 2019 (2019-09-30), pages 1 - 4, XP051788027 * |
SHARP: "Congestion control upon PLMN change", 3GPP TSG-CT WG1 MEETING #111, C1-183759, 28 May 2018 (2018-05-28), pages 1 - 15, XP051459823 * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2021132452A1 (en) | 2021-07-01 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6884731B2 (en) | UE communication control method | |
WO2020071502A1 (en) | Ue | |
JP6869908B2 (en) | UE and UE communication control method | |
JP6855431B2 (en) | UE and UE communication control method | |
WO2020100636A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
JP6884730B2 (en) | UE communication control method | |
WO2020204097A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2020204096A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2021029381A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
JP7079141B2 (en) | UE communication control method | |
JP6901413B2 (en) | UE and UE communication control method | |
WO2020204094A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2020145307A1 (en) | Ue, core network device, and communication control method | |
WO2020153126A1 (en) | Ue | |
WO2021132452A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2021132451A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2020204095A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
WO2021029383A1 (en) | Ue and communication control method | |
JP2019186718A (en) | Ue, control unit and communication control method | |
JP2019145935A (en) | UE and communication control method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20906227 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2021567605 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 20906227 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |